Three-Phase Asynchronous Motor Series 1R.5/1S.5: Operating Instructions Edition 03.2011

Three-phase asynchronous motor
Series 1R.5/1S.5
Operating instructions Edition 03.2011
1RR5719-6JA90-Z
No. 5006153010001
Order No. AD.06537.00 EN

Disclaimer
Unless expressly permitted it shall be prohibited to copy this document, to We have checked the content of this document regarding its conformity
use or disclose its content. Violations of this regulation incur liability for with the hardware and software described in it. Even so, deviations cannot
compensation. All rights reserved, in particular for patents and GM be excluded. Therefore any liability for total conformity must be excluded.
registration. The details given in this document are being reviewed on a regular basis
and necessary corrections are included in subsequent publications. Any
suggestions for improvement will be gratefully received.
 Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved Subject to technical change without notice
Order No.: AD.06537.00 EN

Order with A&D LD IO
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
Edition 03.2011 Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Safety instructions .......................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Definitions, Warnings ........................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Safety and application instructions.................................................... 1-3
1.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility ........................................................... 1-4
1.4 Declaration of incorporation .............................................................. 1-5
2 Description / Technical Data .......................................................... 2-1
2.1 Field of Application ............................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Design ............................................................................................... 2-1

2.2.1 Stator ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2.2 Electrical Connections....................................................................... 2-2
2.2.3 Auxiliary heating ................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.4 Rotor.................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.5 Anti-friction bearings.......................................................................... 2-4
2.2.6 Cooling and Ventilation ..................................................................... 2-4
2.2.7 Temperature Monitoring .................................................................... 2-5
2.2.8 Filters................................................................................................. 2-5
2.2.9 Slip rings, Brushes ............................................................................ 2-5
2.3 Technical Data .................................................................................. 2-6
2.4 Attached drawings ............................................................................. 2-8
3 Installation / Mounting .................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Transport, storage ............................................................................. 3-1

3.1.1 Checks after transport ....................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Measures for storage ........................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Notes for installation.......................................................................... 3-2

3.2.1 General notes .................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 Specific notes .................................................................................... 3-4
3.3 Foundations, coarse alignment ......................................................... 3-7
Siemens AG AD.06537.00 EN
1RR5719-6JA90-Z Operating Instructions 5006153010001 3
Table of Contents Edition 03.2011
3.3.1 General notes .................................................................................... 3-7

3.3.2 Removing the transport guards ......................................................... 3-8
3.3.3 De-preservation ................................................................................. 3-8
3.3.4 Completing the machine.................................................................... 3-9
3.3.5 Installation of the coupling................................................................. 3-9
3.3.6 Steel foundations............................................................................. 3-10
3.3.7 Concrete foundations ...................................................................... 3-11
3.4 Fastening, precise alignment .......................................................... 3-17
3.5 Connecting the Stator Winding........................................................ 3-21
3.6 Connecting the Earth Conductor ..................................................... 3-22
3.7 Connecting the Auxiliary Circuits .................................................... 3-23
3.8 Connecting the Current transformers.............................................. 3-23
3.9 Torque of bolt connections .............................................................. 3-24
3.10 Final Activities ................................................................................. 3-25
4 Commissioning ............................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Preparation ........................................................................................ 4-1

4.1.1 Checking the Insulation Resistance .................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 Final Activities ................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Commissioning .................................................................................. 4-4
5 Parameters ....................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Parameter Configuration VC 1100-C11 ............................................ 5-1
5.2 Vibrational speed values ................................................................... 5-1
6 Operation.......................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Switching on ...................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Plant Shutdown ................................................................................. 6-1
7 Maintenance..................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Servicing............................................................................................ 7-1

7.1.1 General Cleaning and Maintenance Checks..................................... 7-3
7.1.2 Rolling-contact Bearing Maintenance ............................................... 7-4
4 1RR5719-6JA90-Z Operating Instructions 5006153010001
Edition 03.2011 Table of Contents
7.1.3 Checking the bearing lubrication after longer shutdown or storage.. 7-5
7.1.4 Brush maintenance ........................................................................... 7-6
7.1.5 Slip ring maintenance........................................................................ 7-7
7.1.6 Filter maintenance............................................................................. 7-8
7.1.7 Maintenance of Air-air Heat Exchanger ............................................ 7-9
7.2 Malfunctions and Remedial Measures ............................................ 7-10

7.2.1 Malfunctions of brushes and slip rings ............................................ 7-11
8 Spare Parts....................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Spare parts list 1RR5719-6JA90-Z ................................................... 8-1
9 Test Certificates / Logbook ............................................................ 9-1
9.1 Commissioning .................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Services............................................................................................. 9-3
9.3 Trouble shooting................................................................................ 9-5
9.4 Amendments ..................................................................................... 9-7
9.5 Test Certificates ................................................................................ 9-9
10 Additional Operating Instructions (Options, third-party suppliers)10-1
10.1 Vibration monitoring system VC1100 C11 ...................................... 10-2
10.2 Vibration Velocity Sensor type AS – 022 ........................................ 10-2
1RR5719-6JA90-Z Operating Instructions 5006153010001 5
Table of Contents Ausgabe 03.2011
Note
For reasons of clarity these operating instructions do not contain all details and
may not consider each single form of application.
If you need further information or incur any problems that are not dealt with in
these operating instructions sufficiently, please don't hesitate to call for the
necessary information at your local Siemens branch.
In addition we would like to point out that the contents of these operating
instructions are not part of or amendments to any previous or current
agreements, commitments or legal relationship. Any obligation on part of
Siemens follows from the respective purchase order, which also contains the
complete and exclusively binding warranty regulations. These operating
instructions neither extend nor limit these contractual warranty obligations.
6 1RR5719-6JA90-Z Operating Instructions 5006153010001
1 Safety instructions
1
1.1 Definitions, Warnings
Qualified Personnel
in accordance with these Operating Instructions or the warnings on the product are
persons familiar with installation, mounting, commissioning and operation of the
product and having the qualification necessary for their task, such as:
1) training or instruction or authorisation to switch on and off, earth and mark
electric circuits and devices in accordance with the standard safety
requirements.
2) training or instruction in accordance with the standard safety requirements for
maintenance and usage of appropriate safety equipment.
3) first aid training.
Danger
DANGER
means that death, grievous bodily harm or material damage to property will occur
if the respective precautions are not taken.
Warning
WARNING
means that death, grievous bodily harm or material damage to property may occur
if the respective precautions are not taken.
Caution
CAUTION
with warning triangle means that a slight bodily harm may occur if the respective
precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without warning triangle means that a damage to property may occur if the
respective precautions are not taken.
1RR5719-6JA90-Z Operating Instructions 5006153010001 1-1
Safety instructions Edition 03.2011
Attention
ATTENTION
means that an unwelcome result or situation may occur if the respective hint is not
observed.
Note
NOTE
is an important piece of information concerning the product or the respective part of
the Operating instruction that shall particularly been paid attention to.
WARNING
When electrical devices are operated certain parts of these appliances will always
be under dangerous tension.
Therefore grievous bodily harm or damage to property may occur if warnings are
not observed.
Only appropriately qualified personnel is authorised to work with this device.
This personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings and maintenance
measures in accordance with these Operating Instructions.
The faultless and safe operation of this device requires proper transport, specialist
storage, installation and mounting as well as careful operation and maintenance.
National safety guidelines shall be observed.
1-2 1RR5719-6JA90-Z Operating Instructions 5006153010001
Edition 03.2011 Safety instructions
1.2 Safety and application instructions

DANGER
These electrical machines are installation units for usage in industrial electrical
power installations. When operated, these installation units have bare live parts
and additional rotating parts. Therefore, grievous health damage or material
damage to property may be caused if necessary covers are removed without
permission, in case of improper usage, wrong operation or insufficient
maintenance.
If the machines are used outside industrial areas the site of installation shall be
secured against unauthorised entry by means of appropriate equipment (such as
protective fences) and respective signs.
This observance of these operation instructions is the supposition for the right to
claim under guarantee.
The logbook (chapter 9) is to keep conscientiously.
It is assumed that the persons responsible for the safety of the plant will guarantee
that
♦ the basic construction works for the plant as well as transport, mounting,
installation, commissioning, maintenance and repair work are carried out or
controlled by responsible specialists.
♦ Operating Instructions and machine documentation are always available during

all works.
♦ technical data and details regarding admissible mounting, connection,

surrounding and operation conditions are strictly observed.
♦ the plant specific installation and safety precautions are met and the regulations
concerning the usage of personal protective equipment are observed.
♦ unqualified persons are prohibited to work at or near these machines.
Therefore these Operating Instructions only contain hints that are necessary for
qualified personnel under normal operation of the machines.
The Operating Instructions and machine documentation are available in the

languages agreed upon in the delivery contracts.
NOTE
It is recommended to use the support and services offered by the respective
SIEMENS service centres for construction, mounting, maintenance and service
tasks.
1.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility

Under normal operation on the electrical power system according to EN 50 160 the
machines comply with the requirements fixed in the guideline on electromagnetic
compatibility 89/336/EWG.
NOTE
Very uneven torque (such as with piston compressor drives) forces a non-
sinusoidal motor current, the harmonics of which can cause both impermissible
reaction on the system and impermissibly strong electromagnetic interference
emission.
Edition 03.2011 Safety instructions
1.4 Declaration of incorporation
2 Description / Technical Data
2
2.1 Field of Application
The 1RR5 machine series is designed for as many as possible fields of application
within drive engineering and energy transformation.
It is characterised by solid toughness, long service live and reliability as well as

great variability for optimal adaptation to its respective function.
2.2 Design
The machines correspond to the following regulations:
Rating and operation in service IEC / EN 60034-1

Degree of protection IEC / EN 60034-5
Cooling IEC / EN 60034-6
Type of construction IEC / EN 60034-7
Noise emission IEC / EN 60034-9
Vibration severity grade IEC / EN 60034-14
2.2.1 Stator
IM 1001 type of construction (horizontal) as end-shield bearing motor.
Solid stator housing made of grey iron with laterally mounted end shields. The
motor is installed on the bases of these end shields.
The laminated stator core is pressed in the stator housing with end stop on the D-
end of the housing. The stator core consists of insulated electrical sheet steel
circular lamination and is screwed on by means of a secured axial clamping bolt
joint.
Stator winding:
Three-phase double layer integral coil winding with foil mica insulated E-CU -flat
wires. The insulation system is an insulation class F synthetic resin mica insulation.
The winding overhangs are supported by cored banding rims, in change-speed
motors by additional polyester-glass fibre-supporting rings.
The stator winding terminal leads are connected to the cable connection clamps.
Description / Technical Data Edition 03.2011
♦ Service port:
Ports for brush change are provided on the N side. They are covered by a
suitable lid with an inspection window for brush check.
A port for the air filter is provided below this port. It is also covered by a lid.
♦ Brush yoke:
The brush yoke is arranged on the N-side end shield.
Insulated steel bolts carry the live brush supports which are connected by
cables with the rotor connection box. The brush holders are fastened to the
brush supports in a current-transmitting way.
The brush and brush holder types are indicated on the data sheet or the spare
parts list.
2.2.2 Electrical Connections
Stator Connection
The high-voltage box contains lead-through terminals with short-circuit-resistant
cast-resin insulators as well as M 16 connecting bolts.
When designing or selecting the sealing end of the mains-side cable, take into
account the internal dimensions of the connecting box (see dimensional drawing
”Cable connection”).
The protection class – specific sealing at the cable inlet is ensured by flexible
rubber O-rings which may be adapted to the cable diameter by cut-ins.
The terminal box is equipped with 2 grounding conductor connections.

The terminal box contains an equipotential bonding, i.e. a connection bridging the
seal to the stator housing.
Tightening torque for terminal M 16 : max. 30 Nm
min. 15 Nm
Rotor connection
The cable connection is designed for degree of protection class IP 55 and consists
of the terminal box, the cable joint and the terminal strip.
The latter are connected with the brush assembly by cables insulated in a sound
thermal and electrical fashion.
See dimensional drawing for design.
Measuring Point Connection

Connections for temperature monitoring are arranged in a separate terminal box.
For a diagram of measuring points see connection diagram.
Number and position of measuring points are evident in the connection diagram as
well as in the machine dimensional drawing.
Edition 03.2011 Description / Technical Data
Protective or Earth Conductor Connections

The machine has the following protective or earth conductor connections:
♦ at least 1 internal protective conductor connection in the terminal box and in the
rotor connection box
(with the exception of terminal box for temperature sensor)
♦ 1 grounding connection with clamp
All connections are red and marked by a protective conductor or grounding symbol.
2.2.3 Auxiliary heating

The motor is equipped with an auxiliary heating systems. The heating is connected
in a separate terminal box, see connection diagram.
Rated power and voltage as well as specification for the position of the connections
are to be inferred from the connection diagram and the machine dimensional
drawing.(chapter 2.4)
2.2.4 Rotor
Solid steel shaft with shrunk on laminated rotor core and rotor winding. The rotor
core consists of insulated electrical sheet steel circular lamination. End stop at
shaft collar D-end. Axial clamping bolts. The laminated core has axial cooling
openings.
The rotor winding is artificial resin – mica insulated and installed in the core.
The 3-phase tappings lead to the slip rings.
Star connection
2.2.5 Anti-friction bearings

♦ Standard anti-friction bearings are used.
♦ Design: D-end locating bearing
ND-end floating bearing, preloaded, insulated
♦ Bearing type: D-end 6338 MC3
ND-end 6334 MC3
♦ Theoretical bearing life: 50 000 operating hours if properly serviced and
operated under the agreed operating conditions
♦ Anti-friction bearing grease: Shell Alvania RL 3
• Operating temperature: -25°C to +130°C
• Water resistance
in acc. with DIN 51807: Evaluation stage 0 at 90°C
• Dripping temperature
in acc. with DIN ISO 2176: +190°C minimum
• Application: general application, with the exception of
air conditioning
• Designation
in acc. with DIN 51502: K 3 K - 20
♦ In the case of proper transportation and storage at 30°C max. the first grease
filling will be fully functional in accordance with the lubricant manufacturer’s
warranty. When this time is over, proceed as described under chapter 7.1.3.
♦ Lubrication periods:
Lubricating Type of bearing Relubrication Quantity of re- First filling

point interval, hours lubrication capacity
D-end 6338 MC3 5,000; 160 g appr. 1,000 g
ND-end 6334 MC3 minimum 130 g appr. 800 g
1/annum
2.2.6 Cooling and Ventilation

♦ Tube cooling (circulating air cooling)
Cooling system IC 611 / IC 6A1A1
♦ The motor is axially self-ventilated by an interior exhaust on the D-end.
♦ The warm air becomes re-cooled in the structured air-to-air cooler.
The outside air flow is propelled by a radial fan arranged on the N-end.
♦ The direction of rotation is to be considered in accordance with inspection report
or rating plate absolutely, since the interior exhaust is effective only in the
prescribed direction of rotation.
♦ Cooling conditions according to VDE 0530, if not differently agreed.
Independently of the place of assembly, the cooling air, which flows through the
machine inside, must practically be free of aggressive gases and steams
(relative humidity max. 80%, dust content max. 1 mg/m³, SO2-content max.
1,5mg/m³).
2.2.7 Temperature Monitoring

♦ Stator winding monitoring:
embedded resistance thermometer
Number per machine: 6
Resistance material: platinum, 100 Ohm at 0°C.
The end leads run in protective tubes and are connected to the special terminal
box (chapter 2.4).
♦ Monitoring of anti-friction bearings

A RTD is installed for each bearing (D - and ND - end).
Temperature Limits
According to DIN VDE 0530 the following temperature limits apply:
Machine parts Temperature class Warning Tripping
Stator winding B 135°C 140°C
Stator winding F 160°C 165°C
Bearings - 85°C 90°C
2.2.8 Filters
For slip-ring rotor machines with a closed internal cooling circulation, dry filters with
textile filling are used to clean the cooling air.
Each plug-in opening is covered by 1 cover.
2.2.9 Slip rings, Brushes

Slip ring minimum diameter see Chapter 7.1.4.
Brushes type and dimensions see Chapter 8
2.3 Technical Data

Type 1RR5719-6JA90-Z
three-phase asynchronous slip-ring motor
Driven machine Ventilator
Unit 1
Rated power 2,900 kW
Duty type S1
Rated voltage 11,000 V ± 10 %
Rated current 186 A
Rated frequency 50 Hz ± 2 %
Rated speed 993r.p.m.
Direction of rotation CCW, facing D-end
Efficiency at rated power 96.4 %
Rated power factor 0.85
Rotor standstill voltage 2,750 V

Rotor current 630 A
Breakdown torque 2.6 x Rated torque

2
Moment of inertia 465 kgm
Starting method by rotor starter
Starting conditions:
Starting current 2.0 x Rated current

Cold machine (ambient per hour maximum 3 starts in succession
temperature)
Machine at normal operation per hour maximum 2 starts in succession

temperature
One additional start After a cooling down period of at least 30
minutes
Max. number of starts per year 1,000

Number of starts at residual none
voltage
Run-up time at rated voltage max. 30 sec
Installation outdoor
Altitude max. 1,000 m
Ambient temperature min. - 10°C … max.+ 40°C
Cooling air temperature max. + 40°C

1m-Sound pressure level 85 dB (A) +3 dB (no load)
Windings insulation class F
Temperature rise acc. to class B

Winding temperature detectors 6 x RTD in stator winding;
(2 x RTD per phase),
2-/ 3-or 4- wire connection from terminals
Bearings D-end: anti-friction bearing

ND-end: anti-friction bearing, insulated
grease lubricated
Bearing detectors 1x double - RTD per bearing (2 per motor),
2-/ 3- or 4-wire connection from terminals
1x SPM – nipple per bearing
1 x sensor AS-022 per bearing (D- and
ND-end) with Vibration monitoring system
VC1100-C11 (1x per motor)
Type of construction IM 1001
Degree of protection
machine / terminal boxes IP 55 / IP 55
Star point terminal box IP 55, with 3 CT’s mounted for diff.
protection,
3 additional CT’s will be loose delivered
Cooling system IC 611
3
Cooling air flow 400 m /min
Anti condensation heater 3AC 380 V; 2,700 W
Weight of motor 16,500 kg ± 5 %
Surface treatment RAL 7032, 120 µm acc. to manufacturers

standard
VC1100 vibration monitor set according to list of parameters. (Chapter 5)
Instructions for planning and design

The motor is designed for a starting current of max. double rated current.
The max. starting time is 30 seconds.
The starting time has to be supervised.
An automatic system transfer is not admissible.
After a voltage failure > 100 ms the motor has to be started by the motor starter
again.
The max. voltage unsymmetry is 1 %.
The optimal humidity is between 8 and 15 g/m³.
2.4 Attached drawings

• Dimension drawing machine AB.21905.00
• Dimension drawing cable connection Stator FR.13690.00
• Dimension drawing cable connection Rotor FR.13404.00
• Dimension drawing star point-current transformer FR.14375.00
• Connection diagram AN.14274.00
sheet 1 – 2
3 Installation / Mounting
3
3.1 Transport, storage
Danger
The machine shall be transported and lifted in that position only which corresponds
to its configuration.
Observe the transport plates at the machine.
Take into account the weight of the machine when selecting the lifting tackle and
load takeups.
(refer to nameplate or dimensional sketch, chapter 2.4).
Note the following hints:
♦ Use only the carrying eyelets or bollards at the stator housing for lifting. Do not
lift at the shaft end or other points.
♦ Connect the load takeups with the carrying eyelets using suitable shackles.
♦ The angle of the ropes at the crane hook shall not exceed 90°.
♦ If necessary, use rope guides or spreading devices in order to avoid damage!
♦ Lift the machine without jerks and place it – without jerks – onto a level
foundation surface.
3.1.1 Checks after transport

After transport, check the machine for damage.
Repair minor damage immediately.
Repair damaged painted areas by applying the appropriate paint.
3.1.2 Measures for storage

Store the machine if not installed within ten days.
Installation / Mounting Edition 03.2011
Storage rooms
Store the machine in covered state in dry, tempered and vibration-free rooms
protected from weather influences.
Tempering of the rooms shall prevent the development of condensation water at
the machine components. In general this is the case if the relative air humidity is
less than 50 % and the room temperature is 10 °C above the outside temperature.
Preservation
♦ Bright parts shall be protected completely by applying corrosion protection
grease or wax.
♦ Greased or waxed components or parts shall be covered closely by oiled paper,
foil, etc. to prevent damage.
♦ The applied grease shall be replaced after one year because the protective
action ceases after that period of time.
♦ Check all stored components at regular intervals.
3.2 Notes for installation
3.2.1 General notes
Foundation design
Machine foundations are used to accept the static and dynamic loads of the
machine.
Caution
Foundations have to be designed according to the approved rules of civil
engineering, e.g. according to DIN 4024. Static and dynamic calculations have to
be made for this purpose.
Dynamic foundation calculation for exclusive imbalance excitation can be omitted if

the sum of the rotating masses is less than one hundredth of the mass of the
overall system. If the mass of the rotor has not been indicated in the dimensional
sketch, it shall be assumed to be 1/3 of the total mass of the electric machine.
The design of the foundation is of utmost importance to the quiet run of the
machine. With the foundation built properly, the effective values of the vibration
velocity – measured at the feet of the housing (at the pillow block feet of pillow
block machine) - should be max. 30 % (API 541) of the measuring values at the
bearing points.
If the values exceed this percentage and if sources outside of the machine can be
excluded, the design and execution of the foundations and fasting of the machine
have to be checked.
Vibration values according to ISO 10816 shall be applicable to the operation of

electric machines.
When executing cable ducts take into account the bending radii and connection
height of the cables.
Edition 03.2011 Installation / Mounting
Installation
Note
Detailed special knowledge and practical experience is required for correct
alignment and safe fastening.
If the necessary operations are not known we recommend contacting the
manufacturer for assistance
Attention
When arranging lines or other components at the machine housing, take into
account the increased temperatures at these housing components during
operation.
Attention
It is not allowed to weld parts to the machines or drill additional holes. If this is
required, obtain the consent of the machine manufacturer.
Balancing quality
The rotor has been dynamically balanced to balancing level G2.5 according to
ISO1940.
For shaft ends with fitting key, the type of balancing can be taken from the
following designation at the front of the D end of the shaft end:
♦ Designation ”H” means balancing with half fitting key (standard design). The
coupling must be balanced prior to shaping the fitting key groove. If the coupling
hub is shorter than the shaft end, machine off that part of the fitting key which
protrudes the coupling up to the shaft diameter or insert a spacer ring between
the coupling hub and the shaft collar which includes a fitting key groove.
♦ Designation “F” means balancing with the whole fitting key (special design).
The coupling must be balanced after having shaped the fitting key groove. No
modifications are required for the fitting key.
The couplings used must be balanced dynamically with balancing quality G2.5
according to ISO1940
Noise emission
When evaluating the noise at existing working places, if any, for the operators of
the plant take into consideration that – during operation of three-phase machines
at rated load – the A evaluated sound pressure level, measured according to ISO
1680, of 70 dB(A) is exceeded.
3.2.2 Specific notes
Sliding bearing machines

When switching on sliding bearing machines, an oil film develops in the bottom
bearing shell. This results in minor increase of the axis height by approx. 0.1 mm.
When aligning vertically (refer to chapter 3.4) it may become necessary –
depending on the bearings of the work machine – to adapt alignment of the
machine accordingly.
In rare cases, there are work machines which expand laterally during operation.
Because electric machines do not expand laterally, this should also be taken into
account for alignment.
When aligning precisely (refer to chapter 3.4), the rotor must not be cranked
through unless some soil has been applied to the bearing seats of the shaft in
advance. To this end, remove the top bearing shells.
End shield bearing machines

End shield bearing machines are provided with anti-friction or sliding bearings
which are flanged directly to the end shields (design IM B3 / IM B20).
After a few hours in rated operation, the axis height increases slightly due to the
heating of the machine.
This amounts to approx. 0.25 % of the vertical distance from the bottom edge of
the foot to the shaft center.
When aligning vertically (refer to chapter 3.4) it may become necessary –

depending on the expansion of the work machine – to adapt alignment of the cold
machine by a few 1/10 mm in order to ensure optimum alignment of the warm
machine.
In rare cases, there are work machines which expand laterally during operation.
Because electric machines do not expand laterally, this should also be taken into
account for alignment.
Single-bearing machines
Single-bearing machines are provided with one floating bearing only at the N end
and are coupled rigidly. The working machine shall include a fixed bearing and be
capable to carry part of the weight of the rotor.
In addition to chapters 3.3 and 3.4 note the following:
♦ Remove the transport guard which supports the rotor at the D end only if the
rotor can be fixed in its position in another suitable way or can be supported via
the.
♦ The whole shaft train must be aligned.
♦ Check that the magnetic center position is kept and also check the air gap
between the core assemblies of stator and rotor.
♦ The rotor must run in the center in the floating bearing. Follow the information
given in the dimensional sketch (chapter 3.4). The axial clearing of the floating
bearing shall be capable of compensating any thermal shaft growth.
In any case, these works should be assisted by the after-sales service department
of the manufacturer. Otherwise a specific assembly manual should be prepared
together with the manufacturer of the working machine.
Plummer block bearing machines

Plummer block bearing machines are sliding bearing machines where the bearings
stand at own feet and are not flanged at the end shields.
For plummer block bearing machines the plummer block bearing of which rests
directly on the foundation frame or via a bracket, note the following in addition to
chapters 3.3 and 3.4:
♦ During all alignment work note that the rotor is axial in the magnetic central
position. This central position can be determined via the additional plate at the
stator housing.
♦ Precise alignment is by shims beneath the foot holes of the stator housing and
the plummer block bearing housing.
♦ Check that the magnetic center position is kept and also check the air gap
between the core assemblies of stator and rotor. Check both at the D and N end
at several points of the circumference. Deviation from the minimum to the
maximum value shall not exceed 10 %.
♦ The rotor shall run in the centre in the bearings. To do so, remove the bearing
covers and the top bearing shells. The axial gap between the bearing shell and
the shaft collar must be equal at the left and right of the bearing shell. For
information about the bearing clearance, please refer to the dimensional sketch
(chapter 2.4).
Large machines
Large machines are machines where the rotor is transported separately. These
machines have to be assembled at the place of use. In any case, these works
should be assisted by the after-sales department if the manufacturer. Otherwise a
specific assembly manual should be ordered.
Articulated shaft drives

For articulated shaft drives, the bearings of the machine must be suitable for the
additional forces.
Note the following in addition to chapters 3.3 and 3.4:
♦ Precise alignment is limited to placing the machine horizontally in the

longitudinal and transverse axes.
♦ For the proper operation of an articulated shaft, the minimum angle should not
be less than approx. 3° for the offset to the working machine (refer to the
information given by the manufacturer of the articulated shaft)
♦ The parts of the articulated shaft must be plugged together at the sliding
coupling in the position marked by the manufacturer. Otherwise there may be
impacts which might cause damage to the electric machine.
Belt drives
For belt drives, the bearings of the machine must be suitable for the additional
forces.
Note the following in addition to chapters 3.3 and 3.4:
♦ The belt pulleys of the machine must be flush with the belt pulley of the working
machine.
♦ A tensioning device is required for the proper operation of the belt drive.
3.3 Foundations, coarse alignment
3.3.1 General notes

Typical fastening variants are introduced in the following, but this list is not
exhaustive.
All screws, anchor bolts or nuts must at least of strength class 5.6 according to
ISO898.
The motor can be used as calliper when embedding the foundation parts in
concrete. Insert the coupling before in order to facilitate coarse alignment.
If the foundation parts are embedded in concrete without motor, exact positioning
of the foundation parts is required. Laser measuring equipment is recommended
here for such work. Prior to coarse alignment, the concrete must have cured.
Precise alignment can be carried immediately after curing.
Magnetic central position

For all alignment work at machines with two floating bearings, make sure that the
rotor is axially in the magnetic central position which is marked by a pointer at D
end bearing. The mark at the pointer must coincide with a groove in the shaft.
1 Pointer with mark

2 Shaft
3 D end bearing
Using a water level

Several hints are given in the following chapters on how to use a water scale.
♦ The following surfaces are suitable for alignment in longitudinal axis:

• cylindrical shaft end
• shaft in sliding bearing seat with the bearing shell open
• cylindrical parts of coupling hub
♦ The following surfaces are suitable for alignment in transverse axis:
• parts of the base plates or the foundation frame protruding the machine feet
(for coarse alignment only)
• horizontal housing parts
3.3.2 Removing the transport guards
Attention
The fitting keys are only protected from falling out during transport. If for machines
with two shaft ends no drive part is inserted on a shaft end, protect this fitting key
from being expelled and shortened to half the length for rotor alignment type “H”
(standard design).
Depending on the type of transport and the bearing used, the rotor at the D end
shaft end can be clamped by a transverse beam and spindles. Demount the latter.
Seal the threaded holes of the spindles at the bearing using screws. These screws
are accommodated in the transverse beam.
Oiled paper is provided between the slip ring and the carbon brushes of
commutator machines. Remove this paper. When re-inserting the carbon brushes
make sure that they rest correctly on the slip ring.
The carbon brushes must be re-installed in the same position, i.e., they must not
be distorted.
The brush flexibles must move freely.
3.3.3 De-preservation
The machine has been preserved by the manufacturer. Remove these
preservation agents only when starting assembly at the place of installation.
Use commercial solvents (e.g. test or petroleum ether) for de-preservation.
Warning
When using chemical cleansing agents, take note of the warnings and hints for use
given in the associated safety data sheet. Chemical substances must be
compatible with the components, in particular in case of plastic materials.
3.3.4 Completing the machine

In some exceptional cases the machine is transported with the attachment parts
demounted, such as the radiator bonnets, ventilator motors or speed transmitters.
These components must be mounted at the machine prior to assembly using the
supplied fasteners according to the dimensional sketch.
3.3.5 Installation of the coupling
Warning
For machines with two floating bearings use only couplings the axial clearance of
which is limited.
Caution
The coupling must have been balanced dynamically with balancing quality level
G2.5 according to ISO1940.
The following operations are required unless specified otherwise by the coupling
manufacturer:
♦ Determine the installation temperature of the coupling (included in the scope of

services of coupling dimensioning)
♦ Check the dimensions and shapes of the shaft end and coupling bore.
♦ De-preserve all fitting faces (refer to chapter 3.2.1)
♦ Uniformly heat the coupling half to installation temperature, e.g. inductively in
the furnace or ring burner.
♦ Quickly and centrally install the coupling half onto the shaft end. Do not use
blows in order to prevent damage to the bearings.
3.3.6 Steel foundations

The design of a steel foundation depends on the application of the machine. In
most cases the foundations are tables of steel floors in buildings or vehicles. Table
foundations must be built on concrete with the suitable load-bearing
characteristics.
During the acceleration and deceleration phases of the machine the natural
frequency is run through at foundations set to below resonance which might cause
unquiet running for a short period of time.
1 Steel foundation
9 Shims for precise alignment
10 Machine foot
11 Washer, reinforced
12 Hexagon-head screw ISO4017
Operations:
♦ Place the machine onto the prepared raw foundation.

♦ For sliding bearing machines with two floating bearings, the rotor must be in the
magnetic central position. The neutral position is indicated by a pointer and a
groove in the shaft at the E end bearing (refer to chapter 3.3.1)
♦ Precise alignment can be started immediately if the threaded bores for the foot
holes have been prepared in the steel foundation (1) (refer to chapter 3.4)
Otherwise, further operations are required:
♦ Coarsely align the machine. Note that the gap (for dimension of gap refer to
coupling manufacturer or plant project) is uniform at the circumference at the
coupling to the working machine. Measure the gap at the left and right. The
difference should not exceed 0.5 mm.
The height of the machine should be 3 – 4 mm less than that of the working
machine in order to allow later precise alignment using shims.
♦ Mark the foot holes at the steel foundation (1).
♦ Remove the machine.
♦ Drill core holes matching the hexagon-head screws (12) into the steel
foundation (1) after marking and cut the threads.
Remove any chips.
♦ After having placed the machine onto the steel foundation immediately start
precise alignment (refer to chapter 3.4)
3.3.7 Concrete foundations

The concrete used must have a minimum quality according to strength class
C20/25 in compliance with EN206-1 or C20/25 in compliance with DIN1045-2.
Prior to the beginning of work compare the raw foundation with the data given in
the dimensional sketch.
The term “foundation anchor” is used in the following for stone bolts, anchor bolts
and hammer head bolts.
The following figures show the foundation anchors with reduced lengths. Their
lengths depend in the structural conditions.
Tightening torques
The tightening torques apply only for foundation anchors in concrete foundations.
For tightening torques for machine screws please refer to chapter 3.9
Pitches lubricated by Pitches oiled slightly

MoS2 paste (µ=0.14)
(µ=0.11)
Dimension Assembly Test Assembly Test
[Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
M24 148 126 182 155
M30 296 252 366 311
M36 509 433 631 536
M42 826 702 1025 871
M48 1224 1040 1520 1292
M56 1983 1686 2465 2095
M64 2926 2487 3641 3095
M72*6 4257 3618 5309 4513
M80*6 5782 4915 7223 6140
M90*6 8324 7075 10419 8856
M100*6 11556 9823 14488 12315
Concrete foundation with foundation blocks
1 Raw foundation
2 Cast concrete
3 Casting chute
4 Foundation block
9 Shim for precise alignment
10 Machine foot
Operations:
♦ Screw the foundation blocks (4) without shims (9) centrally at the through holes
of the machine feet (10). To ensure the exact central position it is possible to
wrap the hexagon-head screws (12) by cardboard strips.
♦ Place the machine onto the prepared raw foundation (1) where holes are
provided for the foundation blocks (4).
♦ For sliding bearing machines with two floating bearings, the rotor shall be in the
magnetic central position; refer to chapter 3.3.1
♦ Coarsely align the machine. Note that the gap (for dimension of gap refer to
coupling manufacturer or plant project) is uniform at the circumference at the
coupling to the working machine. Measure the gap at the top, bottom, the left
and right. The maximum difference should not exceed 0.5 mm.
machine in order to allow later precise alignment using shims (9).
♦ Use a water level and check the horizontal alignment in the longitudinal and
transverse axes. In the longitudinal axis, place the water level onto the
cylindrical shaft end or the coupling half, in the transverse axis on the housing.
If necessary, repeat the above operations.
♦ Moisten the holes for the foundation blocks and remove water, if any.
♦ Grout the holes for the foundation blocks using concrete (2). The concrete
should end approx. 10 mm below the top edge of the foundation block (4).
♦ Depending on the type of concrete, curing of the cast concrete may take up to
one week. The foundation should remain loaded with the machine during the
curing phase.
♦ Loosen the hexagon-head screws (12) from the machine feet, remove
cardboard strips, if any, and start precise alignment (refer to chapter 3.4)
Concrete foundation with base plate or foundation frame/with stone bolts
1 Raw foundation
2 Cast concrete
3 Casting chute
4 Flat iron for coarse alignment
5 Base plate/foundation frame
6 Foundation anchor bushing
7 Foundation anchor:
Stone bolt DIN529
8 Hexagonal nut ISO4032
10 Machine foot
Assembly with base plates is described in the following. Assembly with foundation
frame is analogous.
Operations:
♦ Screw the base plates (5) without shims (9) centrally at the through holes of the
machine feet (10). To ensure the exact central position it is possible to wrap the
hexagon-head screws (12) by cardboard strips.
♦ Insert the stone bolts (7) from below into the foundation anchor bushings (6)
and lock them at the top end by a hexagonal nut (8). The thread should
protrude by approx. 20 mm.
♦ Place the machine onto the prepared raw foundation (1). Approx. 40 – 60 mm
should be left below the base plates for the flat iron used for coarse alignment
(4).
♦ Coarsely align the machine by placing flat irons (4) between the raw foundation
(1) and the base plates (5). The flat irons (4) should be at a distance of approx.
500 mm and also directly at the left and right of the foundation anchor bushing
(6) to prevent the base plates (5) from distortion when tightening the stone bolts
(7).
For coarse alignment note that the gap (for dimension of gap refer to coupling
manufacturer or plant project) is uniform at the circumference at the coupling to
the working machine. Measure the gap at the top, bottom, the left and right. The
maximum difference should not exceed 0.5 mm.
♦ Tighten the stone bolts (7) by means of the hexagonal nuts (8).
transverse axes.
♦ Moisten the recesses in the raw foundation to be cast and remove any water.
♦ Grout the recesses using concrete (2). The concrete should end approx. 10 mm
below the top edge of the base plates (5).
curing phase.
♦ As soon as the cast concrete has cured fully, re-tighten the hexagonal nuts (8)
of the stone bolts (7) crosswise.
♦ Loosen the hexagon-head screws (12) from the machine feet (10), remove
Concrete foundation with base plate or foundation frame/with anchor bolts
1 Raw foundation
2 Cast concrete
3 Casting chute
Anchor bolt DIN797
9 Shim for precise alignment
10 Machine foot
13 Anchor plate
14 Anchor nut
frame is analogous.
Operations:
♦ Insert the anchor bolts (7) into the foundation anchor bushings (6) and lock
them at the top end by a hexagonal nut (8). The thread should protrude by
approx. 20 mm.
should be left below the base plates (5) for the flat irons (4) used for coarse
alignment.
♦ Initially mount the anchor plates (13) and anchor nuts (14) as loose as possible
to allow for height alignment. If necessary, re-adjust the hexagonal nut (8) and
the anchor nut (14) several times.
(1) and the base plates (5). The flat irons (4) should be at a distance of approx.
500 mm and also directly at the left and right of the foundation anchor bushing
(6) to prevent the base plates (5) from distortion when tightening the
stone bolts (7).
transverse axes.
below the top edge of the base plates (5).
curing phase.
of the stone bolts (7) crosswise.
♦ Loosen the hexagon-head screws (12) from the machine feet (10), remove
Concrete foundation with base plate or foundation frame/with hammer head

bolts
1 Raw foundation
2 Cast concrete
3 Casting chute
Hammer head bolt DIN261
10 Machine foot
13 Anchor plate DIN24539
14 Pipe
frame is analogous.
Operations:
♦ Embed the anchor plates (13) together with the matching pipes (14) into the raw
foundation (1) according to the planned position of the foundation anchors. Do
not fill concrete into the pipes.
♦ Insert the hammer head bolts (7) into the anchor bushings (6) of the base plates
(5) and lock them at the top end by a hexagonal nut (8). The thread should
protrude by approx. 20 mm.
should be left below the base plates (5) for the flat irons (4) used for coarse
alignment.
♦ Insert the hammer head bolts (7) into the anchor plates (13). The hammer head
bolts can be inserted only in one position into the anchor plates and are fixed by
turning them 90° clockwise. For coarse alignment take into account a sufficient
clearance of the anchor bolts.
(1) and the base plates (5). The flat irons should be at a distance of approx. 500
mm and also directly at the left and right of the foundation anchor bushing (6) to
prevent the base plates (5) from distortion when tightening the hammer head
bolts (7).
♦ Tighten the hexagonal nuts (8) of the hammer head bolts (7) crosswise. Prevent
any distortion at the machine feet (10).
transverse axes.
below the top edge of the base plates (5. Do not embed the pipes (14) in order
to allow for the later replacement of the hammer head bolts (7).
curing phase.
of the hammer head bolts (7) crosswise. Depending on the type of concrete this
may take maximum one week.
♦ Loosen the hexagon-head screws (12) from the machine feet, remove
3.4 Fastening, precise alignment

Caution
Correct alignment is a requirement for the smooth and vibration-free run of the
machine.
This is applicable not only to rigid but also to flexible couplings. Remaining
alignment errors may also cause damage to the coupling or bearings.
The screw-in depth of the hexagon-head screws at the foot holes must at least
correspond to the screw diameter.
The term “foundation anchor” is used in the following for stone bolts, anchor bolts
and hammer head bolts.
Tightening torques
Please refer to chapter 3.9
Necessary measuring equipment

♦ Dial with tripod
♦ Laser alignment device
♦ Calliper („feeler gauges“)
♦ Water level for machine construction
Preparatory actions
The following actions are required prior to precise alignment:
♦ The grouting concrete must have cured fully.

♦ Check the foundation anchors for tight seat in the base plate or foundation
frames. For tightening torques please refer to chapter 3.7
♦ Seal the openings of the anchor bushings by the supplied covers.
♦ All transport guards must have been removed.
Refer to chapter 3.2
Carrying out the work

Precise alignment of the machine is by measuring between the coupling halves of
the machine and the working machine.
Shims are placed beneath the machine feet for alignment. The thinnest shims shall
not be thicker than 0.3 mm. The shims should be combined such that height
compensation is achieved by as low a number of shims as possible.
The shims shall fit the foot size so that the whole foot area can rest.
For machines with feet of grey-cast iron, 0.2 mm deep milled openings are
provided at the supporting areas. These milled openings are used to provide
defined clamping conditions. During assembly check the support of the machine
feet to the foundation only in the area of the foot areas which are outside of the
milled openings.
1 Machine foot
2 Checking the shims
Operations (for figures refer to chapters 3.3.6 and 3.3.7)
♦ Screw the machine feet (10) loosely with the foundation using hexagon-head
screws (12) and washers (11) placed beneath. Sufficient clearance should exist
beneath the screw head in order to allow for the vertical alignment of the
machine.
♦ Compensate the height of all machine feet (10) using shims until the coupling
half of the machine is at the same level as the working machine.
♦ Use the feeler gauges and check at the shims whether the machine uniformly
loads all feet. Correct the shims, if necessary.
♦ Use a water level and check whether the machine is transverse to its
longitudinal axis. Repeat the above operations, if necessary.
♦ Axially move the machine such that the gap between the coupling halves
corresponds to the dimension specified by the coupling manufacturer or the
plant project.
♦ Use a measuring dial and check whether the coupling halves run truly on the
shaft. Crank through the shafts for this purpose. The radial run-outs shall not
exceed the value x of the table below. Otherwise contact the manufacturer of
the component.
♦ Check that the following allowances are kept, use the laser alignment device: In
the event that the manufacturer of the working machine has given specifications
for operation, they shall be taken into account for alignment.
Speed [min-1] x [mm]

< 1400 0.03
1400 … 2900 0.02
> 2900 0.01
♦ Carry out precise alignment by adding or removing shims and moving the
machine until the allowances are achieved. Then tighten the hexagon-head
screws (12) at the machine feet (10) crosswise.
♦ Check for alignment again. Check a second time after having turned the rotor
by 180°.
♦ Record the measuring values!
Pinning the machine
1 Conical pin EN28736

Pinning of the machine is recommended in order to facilitate alignment when re-

assembling the machine.
Operations:
♦ Inclines bores, diameter from 12 mm to 25 mm depending on the machine size,
are provided near the fastening holes at the machine feet. These bores must be
drilled through diagonally at the machine (e.g. left front and right rear side) with
the same diameter into the steel parts of the foundation.
♦ Ream the bores by means of a conical reamer (cone 1:50) until the conical pin
can be inserted by hand on top flush.
♦ Screw the hexagon-head screw (3) together with the washer (2) approx. 5 mm
deep onto the conical pin. Then cautiously drive in the conical pin (1) using a
hammer so that it sinks into the bore for some mm.
♦ Tighten the hexagon-head screw (2) by hand.
♦ When demounting the machine it is possible to withdraw the conical pin by
tightening the hexagon-head screw.
3.5 Connecting the Stator Winding

Caution
The terminals are suited for connecting copper cables. If aluminium cables shall be
connected, use cable lugs with copper butt strap and aluminium sleeve (Cupal, Al-
Cu, Bimetallic) to avoid contact corrosion.
♦ Proper installation of the plant cables in the cable terminal (terminal box).
♦ These works shall be carried out by specialist personnel.
♦ Thoroughly carry out cable layout and entry fitting with suitable cable lugs that
comply with the nominal current.
♦ For maximum admissible outer cable diameter refer to dimension drawing
"Cable connection ”.
♦ Keep minimum sparking air distance in accordance with the nominal voltage of
the machine between bare, live parts.
♦ Carry out cable layout in a way that excludes short circuits and electric arcs.
♦ Seal cable entry fittings in accordance with required degree of protection.
♦ Observe terminal designation, proper connection and contacts as well as tight
bolting.
♦ According to VDE 0530 phase sequence L1, L2, L3 at U, V, W for clockwise
rotation and L1, L2, L3 at V, U, W for counter-clockwise rotation.
♦ For details concerning sense of rotation refer to nameplate or test certificate.
♦ For tightening torques of screws refer to table in chapter 3.9.
Occupational Safety
All electro-conductive parts that may be touched and that do not belong to the
operating circuit are connected electrically conductive with each other and with the
protective conductor's or earth conductor's terminal. The resistance of these parts
to the protective or earth conductors must not exceed 0,1 Ohm. This shall
particularly be observed in case of repetitive mounting. All mounting, connection
and installation works shall be carried out in accordance with the valid instructions
by trained personnel and are subject to the accident prevention rules valid at the
place of installation.
Final Activities
Please check that
♦ all electrical connections in the terminal box are tightened properly (see chapter
3.9) and realised in accordance with the above sections.
♦ the machine is connected in accordance with the specified direction of rotation.
♦ the interior of the terminal box is clean and free from remaining cables.
Now close the terminal box.
3.6 Connecting the Earth Conductor

Warning
Observe the instructions given by the manufacturer of the system at the place of
erection.
The cross-section of the earthing conductor of the machine shall comply with the
erection regulations, e.g. according to IEC / EN 60204-1 a cross section of
> 35 mm² of the conductor requires a cross section of at least 50 % of the cross
section of the line conductor.
The contact surface shall be bright and protected against corrosion by means of an
appropriate agent, e.g. non-corroding petrolatum.
All contact surfaces shall be marked with:
OR
The earthing conductor (grounding conductor) shall be connected with the cable
connection of the stator winding (terminal box), please refer to chapter 3.5, and the
cable connection of the rotor winding, if applicable.
For information on the position and nature of the connection, please refer to the
"Dimensional sketch cable connection", chapter 2.4.
Ground the machine housing at the base earth electrode or the steel base for
equipotential bonding.
For this purpose, use the gripper clamp at the machine housing or at the bottom
end plate (in case of a vertical machine).
Position: please refer to "Dimensional sketch", chapter 2.4.
The use of a gripper clamp enables the connection of compact circular conductors
and multi-wire conductors with a cross-section of 16mm² to 240mm². A conductor
sleeve shall be used in case of multi-wire conductors.
Another option is to unscrew the gripper clamps and screw on especially prepared
flat conductors or to screw cables with lugs at two tapped holes M10. The lock
washer must be placed directly under the screw head and not between the contact
surface of the housing and the flat conductor or lug.
3.7 Connecting the Auxiliary Circuits

♦ Connect plant measuring lines for temperature sensors properly in the special
terminal box
♦ cable entry with compression gland
In accordance with the order placed the connection clamps for the auxiliary circuits,
such as temperature sensors are located in one or two terminal boxes.
On the terminal diagram inside the respective box cover and in the machine
documentation the necessary details for connecting the auxiliary circuits are given.
The connection clamps are suited for conductor cross-sections of up to 4 mm².

Connection lines shall be chosen taking into consideration the rated current and
the plant-specific conditions (e.g. ambient temperature, type of installation etc. in
accordance with IEC / EN 60204-1).
3.8 Connecting the Current transformers
Caution
The machine is delivered with current transformers short-circuited on the
secondary side. The short circuit shall only be removed after connecting the
respective device (e. g. differential protection relay).
3.9 Torque of bolt connections

For tightening torques of foundation anchors (stone bolts, anchor bolts and
hammer head bolts) in concrete foundations please refer to chapter 3.3
Production and testing torque

non-greased bolt connections (µ=0,14)
Bolt connections Strength 4.6 and 5.6 Strength 8.8 Strength 8.8
Cu / Brass or Cu, Brass, Al, Grey -mech. unlocked -mech. locked
cast screws -conductor bars locked
Dimension Production Testing Production Testing Production Testing Production Testing
[Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
M4 1.0 0.7 1.4 1.0 3.0 2.1 3.3 2.3
M5 2.0 1.4 2.7 1.9 5.9 4.2 6.7 4.7
M6 3.5 2.5 4.6 3.2 10 7.0 11.5 8.1
M8 8.4 5.9 11 7.7 25 17.5 27 18.9
M10 13.2 9.2 17.1 12.0 38.1 26.7 54 37.8
M12 22.6 15.8 30.3 21.2 66.1 46.3 92 64.4
M14 - - 48.2 33.7 105 73.5 145 101.5
M16 55.2 38.6 73.9 51.7 163 114.1 225 157.5
M18 - - 101 70.7 233 163.1 320 224
M20 107 74.9 143 100.1 331 231.7 460 322
M22 - - 194 136 451 316 620 434
M24 183 128 245 172 568 398 790 553
M27 - - 366 256 856 600 1 160 812
M30 369 258 494 346 1 130 791 1 550 1085
M33 502 385 673 471 1 560 1092 - -
M36 840 588 1 120 784 2 020 1420 - -
M39 - - 1 380 966 2 640 1850 - -
M42 - - 1 370 959 3 230 2260 - -
M45 - - 1 700 1 190 3 990 2800 - -
M48 - - 2 050 1 440 4 860 3400 - -
M52 - - 2 630 1 840 6 200 4340 - -
M56 - - 3 280 2 300 7 750 5430 - -
M64 - - 4 890 3 420 11 600 8120 - -
M68 - - 5 890 4 120 13 800 9660 - -
3.10 Final Activities

Prior to closing the terminal boxes, please verify that
♦ the lines are connected in accordance with the attached terminal diagram.
♦ the interior of the terminal box is clean and free from remaining cable parts.
♦ the parts of the cable screwing joints are fastened tightly and are suitable and
properly installed with regard to degree of protection, type of installation,
admissible conductor cross-section etc.
♦ the connection lines are bare and the conductor insulation may not be
damaged.
♦ unused entries are closed, if applicable, and the covering elements are screwed
in tightly (i.e. may only be detached using appropriate tools).
♦ all gaskets and gasket surfaces of the terminal box are in a good condition.
♦ all clamping screws of possibly existing terminal screws are fixed tightly (does
also apply for possibly existing unused clamps).
Note
Anti-friction bearing machines with grease lubrication have been greased and
subjected to a trial run by the manufacturer. Re-greasing prior to start-up is not
required.
For machines with oil lubrication, the bearings and also the oil system, if any, have
to be filled with oil according to the dimensional sketch.
4 Commissioning
4
4.1 Preparation
Warning
Coverings providing protection against accidental contact with active or rotating
parts or coverings that are necessary for a proper air circuit and thus effective
cooling, must not be open under operation.
Modifications in comparison to normal operation (higher power input, temperatures
or vibrations, unusual noise or smell, reaction of monitoring systems and so on)
indicate that the normal function is disturbed. In order to avoid disturbances that
could cause direct or indirect grievous injuries to persons or damages to property,
the responsible maintenance personnel shall be notified immediately. In case of
doubt - taking into consideration the plant specific safety conditions - switch off the
machine immediately!
4.1.1 Checking the Insulation Resistance
Warning
During and immediately after measuring the terminals are dangerously energized
and must not be touched.
Please ensure that no system voltage may be applied to mains cables.
Prior to first commissioning and after extended standstill periods or storage the
resistance value shall be checked as this value may have fallen below the
minimum insulation resistance due to long-time humidity, penetrated into the
installation because of unfavourable transport, storage and installation conditions.
Measurements shall only be carried out by specialist personnel!
Perform the control measurement with a conventional magneto or a suitable
measuring bridge at a voltage of 1,000 V.
♦ Minimum insulation resistanct: Ris

When calculating Ris the nominal voltage UN (kV) and winding temperature are
to be taken into consideration.
Winding star-connected, star point not brought out, phase-to-phase
measurement.
Commissioning Edition 03.2011
Winding Minimum insulation resistance (MΩ)

at operating temperature (approx. 75°C) Risw = 1 x UN (kV)
cold (approx. 20°C) Risk = 15 x UN (kV)
Risw = Minimum insulation resistance, warm

Risk = Minimum insulation resistance, cold
♦ Analysing the checking measurement

If the measurement reveals that the minimum value is not met, the machine
must not be taken into operation and the winding shall be dried.
♦ Evaluating the humidity

In order to evaluate the condensation quantity we recommend to calculate the
polarization index N.
This index results from the following equation
Ris 60 s (Measured value after 60 s measuring)

N = -------------
Ris 15 s (Measured value after 15 s measuring)
N is > 1,3 if the winding is dry.

For N < 1,3 the winding shall be dried.
Drying the winding insulation

Only necessary in accordance with the results of the insulation resistance check
measurement.
The drying methods follow from the equipment available at the place of installation.
Drying may only be carried out by specialist personnel.
♦ Hot-air drying
• Use available hot-air aggregates.
• During the drying process turn the rotor every 20 min by ¼ rotation in order
to achieve regular drying.
♦ Open-circuit ventilation
• If possible locate outlet side opposite the inlet side.
• Open completely closed machines on both sides.
This drying method is particularly suited in case of surface condensation.
♦ Electrical drying
• Apply low direct or alternating voltage.
• Adjust the current so that the winding temperature does not exceed 75°C.
• Optional supply, for instance at U terminal.
• Discharge for instance at V, W terminals.
• Cyclically change connections each hour in order to achieve regular drying.
• Locate air inlet and outlet side opposite each other.
Edition 03.2011 Commissioning
• If possible locate outlet side on the top.

• Use low forced ventilation to lead off humidity.
This drying method is particularly suited in case of very damp windings (I-value
near 1 MΩ)
♦ Drying by means of heating units

• e.g. drying oven, infrared device, heating resistors, hot-air fans and other
suitable devices or equipment.
• If possible, use heating equipment with temperature adjustment.
• Open machine, ensure that humidity is lead off.
• Observe temperature distribution on the machine.
Drying conditions:
♦ Drying processes shall always be carried out slowly and steadily.
♦ Maximum drying temperature 75°C.
♦ Continue drying process until the insulation resistance increases significantly
and reaches its minimum value. Try to reach a higher resistance value as a
reserve.
♦ Measure insulation resistance each hour.
♦ Complete report on the measured values.
♦ In order to control local temperature rise include appropriate thermometers.
♦ Ensure that humidity is lead off.
♦ Make machine ready for operation after the drying process.
4.1.2 Final Activities

♦ Check grease collector for proper fit.
♦ Check air ports with service screen fabric for cleanliness.
Check operating conditions with regard to the dust and oil content in the cooling
air (see chapter 2.2.6).
♦ General:
• Check assembly screw connections for tight fit.
• Terminal check. Proper connection. Clean terminal housing. Sealed cable
gland. Observe direction of rotation. Proper contact screwed joints of the
connecting cables. Check specialist execution of cable lugs.
• Check the gaskets (terminal box cover, operating opening, air ducts) for
proper condition and exact seat, replace, if necessary.
• Compare technical machine data with respective electrical installation.
Observe data given on the nameplate.
• Clean installation surfaces. Remove all mounting tools and accessories from
the machine area.
• Check the coupling protection for proper seat.
Commissioning Edition 03.2011
Note
This list may not be complete. Further additional checks may be necessary in
accordance with the particular installation specific conditions.
4.2 Commissioning
Prior to initial commissioning a test run shall be carried out.
Caution
If starting conditions are specified in section 2.3., they must be observed.
♦ rotation test
♦ No-load operation:
• Coupled with unloaded driven machine.
• Checks: Bearing temperature, bearing noises, balance quality
• Time needed: In case of positive test results until the steady state of the
bearing temperatures is reached.
♦ On-load operation:
• After faultless no-load operation.
• On-load operation during extended testing period under operating
conditions, e.g. 72-hour test run.
• Current overload see VDE 0530

5 Parameters
5
5.1 Parameter Configuration VC 1100-C11
see annex
5.2 Vibrational speed values

The limit values of vibrational speed (warning and switch off) depend on the type of
foundation (rigid or flexible) and shall be determined in accordance with
DIN ISO 10816-3.
Recommendation for rigid foundation:
Warning at commissioning the measured value + 25 %,

however maximum 5.6 mm/s
(limit value for zone “B” 4.5 mm/s x 1.25)
Switch off 8,9 mm/s

(limit value for zone “C” 7.1 mm/s x 1.25)
Parameters Edition 03.2011
Siemens AG Settings for Vibration monitoring
A&D LD IOEM
VC1100-C11: Parameter-Einstellungen
Parameter Configuration / Définition des paramètres
Anlage / Project: Sinoma Senegal Line
Kanalwahl und Sensor-Daten - Gruppe I
Channel and Pickup Selection - Group I / Groupe I : Choix du canal et données sur le capteur
I01 Kanal A Y [X] N [ ] D-end
Channel A / Canal A
I02 Kanal B Y [X] N [ ] ND-end
Channel B / Canal B
I03 Sensor a [X] v [ ] AS-022
Pickup / Capteur
I04 Einheit mV/g [X] mV/m/s2 [ ]
Unit / Unité mV/mm/s [ ] mV/ips [ ]
I05 Empfindlichkeit [____100________]
Sensitivity / Sensibilité
I06 Frequenzganglinearisierung Y [ ] N [X]
Frequency response linearization / Linéarisation de fréquence
Kennwert-Definitionen - Gruppe J
Channel Configuration - Group J / Groupe J : Définition du type de mesure
J01 Kanal A: Schwingung Y [X] N [ ]
Channel A: Vibration / Canal A: Vibration
J02 Kanal B: Schwingung Y [X] N [ ]
Channel B: Vibration / Canal B: Vibration
J03 Kanal A: Messgröße a [ ] v [X] s [ ]
Channel A: Parameter / Canal A: Grandeur de mesure
J04 Kanal B: Messgröße a [ ] v [X] s [ ]
Channel B: Parameter / Canal B: Grandeur de mesure
J05 Kanal A: Einheit g [ ] m/s2 [ ] mm/s [X]
Channel A: Unit / Canal A: Unité ips [ ] mm [ ] mils [ ]
J06 Kanal B: Einheit g [ ] m/s2 [ ] mm/s [X]
Channel B: Unit / Canal B: Unité ips [ ] mm [ ] mils [ ]
J07 Kanal A: Signalbewertung rms [X] pc [ ] ppc [ ]
Channel A: Signal Detection / Canal A: Détection
J08 Kanal B: Signalbewertung rms [X pc [ ] ppc [ ]
Channel B: Signal Detection / Canal B: Détection
J09 Kanal A: Messbereichs-Endwert [_______20_______]
Channel A: Full Scale / Canal A: Pleine échelle
J10 Kanal B: Messbereichs-Endwert [_______20_______]
Channel B: Full Scale / Canal B: Pleine échelle
J11 Kanal A: Lager-Zustand BCU Y [ ] N [X]
Channel A: Bearing Condition (BCU) / Canal A: Etat des roulem. (BCU)
J12 Kanal B: Lager-Zustand BCU Y [ ] N [X]
Channel B: Bearing Condition (BCU) / Canal B: Etat des roulem. (BCU)
J13 Kanal A: BCU Messbereichs-Endwert [______________]
Channel A: BCU Full Scale / Canal A: Pleine échelle (BCU)
J14 Kanal B: BCU Messbereichs-Endwert [______________]
Channel B: BCU Full Scale / Canal B: Pleine échelle (BCU)
J15 Kanal A: BCU Mittelwertbildung Y[]N[]
Channel A: BCU Averaging (BCU) / Canal A: Moyennage (BCU)
J16 Kanal B: BCU Mittelwertbildung Y[]N[]
Channel B: BCU Averaging (BCU) / Canal B: Moyennage (BCU)
J17 Kanal A: BCU Mittelungszeit [______________]
Channel A: Mean time (BCU) / Canal A: Temps de moyennage (BCU)
J18 Kanal B: BCU Mittelungszeit [______________]
Channel B: Mean time (BCU) / Canal B: Temps de moyennage (BCU)
J19 Kanal A: BCU Normierungsfaktor [______________]
Channel A: BCU Scaling Factor / Canal A: La valeur de référence en BCU
J20 Kanal B: BCU Normierungsfaktor [______________]
Channel B: BCU Scaling Factor / Canal B: La valeur de référence en BCU
Rev. Datum Bemerkung / Comment WSD WSQP Item-No. 2451801856/734 K-0681310

05.11.2010 Neugeb Motor 1RR5719-6JA90-Z Blatt / Page 1/4
U:\Dokumentation_Siemens\Dokumentation\K-0681310 - Sinoma Senegal Line\Schwingungsüberwachung\Param_List_VC1100.doc
A&D LD IOEM
Filter-Einstellungen - Gruppe K
Filter Configuration - Group K Groupe K : Définition des filtres
K01 Kanal A: Untere Eckfrequenz 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [ ]
Channel A: Low cutoff frequency / Canal A: Passebas 10Hz ISO [X] * Spez. [ ]
K02 Kanal B: Untere Eckfrequenz 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [ ]
Channel B: Low cutoff frequency / Canal B: Passebas 10Hz ISO [X] * Spez. [ ]
K03 Kanal A: Obere Eckfrequenz 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [X]
Channel A: High cutoff frequency / Canal A: Passehaut * Spez. [ ]
K04 Kanal B: Obere Eckfrequenz 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [X]
Channel B: High cutoff frequency / Canal B: Passehaut * Spez. [ ]
Analog-Ausgänge - Gruppe L
Analog Output - Group L / Groupe L : Sorties analogiques
L01 Analogausgang 1: Bereich 0..10V [ ] 0..20mA [ ]
Analog Output 1: 0..10V / Sortie analogique 1: Plage 0..10V 4..20mA [X]
L02 Analogausgang 2: Bereich 0..10V [ ] 0..20mA [ ]
Analog Output 2: 0..10V / Sortie analogique 2: Plage 0..10V 4..20mA [X]
L03 Analogausgang 1: Messgröße vib_A [X] BCU_A [ ]
Analog Output 1: Parameter / Sortie analog. 1: Type de mesure vib_B [ ] BCU_B [ ]
L04 Analogausgang 2: Messgröße vib_A [ ] BCU_A [ ]
Analog Output 2: Parameter / Sortie analog. 2: Type de mesure vib_B [X] BCU_B [ ]
L05 Analogausgang 1: Bereichsendwert [_______20______]
Analog Output 1: Full Scale / Sortie analogique 1: Pleine échelle
L06 Analogausgang 2: Bereichsendwert [_______20______]
Analog Output 2: Full Scale / Sortie analogique 2: Pleine échelle
∗ Nur möglich mit eingebautem Zusatzfilter

∗ Possible only if a supplementary filter is installed as an option. / ∗ N'est possible qu'avec le filtre supplémentaire
Grenzwert-Überwachung - Gruppe M
Limit Configuration - Group M / Groupe M : Choix et définition des types de surveillance
M01 Kanal A: Überwachung Y [X] N [ ]
Channel A: Monitoring / Canal A: Surveillance
M02 Kanal B: Überwachung Y [X] N [ ]
Channel B: Monitoring / Canal B: Surveillance
M03 Kanal A: Überwachung lim_1 Y [X] N [ ]
Channel A: Monitor lim_1 / Canal A: Surveillance avec lim_1
M04 Kanal B: Überwachung lim_1 Y [X] N [ ]
Channel B: Monitor lim_1 / Canal B: Surveillance avec lim_1
M05 Kanal A: Überwachung lim_2 Y [X] N [ ]
Channel A: Monitor lim_2 / Canal A: Surveillance avec lim_2
M06 Kanal B: Überwachung lim_2 Y [X] N [ ]
Channel B: Monitor lim_2 / Canal B: Surveillance avec lim_2
M07 Kanal A: Überwachung lim_b Y[]N[]
Channel A: Monitor lim_b / Canal A: Surveillance avec lim_b
M08 Kanal B: Überwachung lim_b Y[]N[]
Channel B: Monitor lim_b / Canal B: Surveillance avec lim_b
M09 Kanal A: Grenzwert lim_1 [______max. 5.6*___] ** valid for rigid
Channel A: Value lim_1 / Canal A: Valeur limite lim_1 foundation
M10 Kanal B: Grenzwert lim_1 [______max. 5.6*___]
Channel B: Value lim_1 / Canal B: Valeur limite lim_1
M11 Kanal A: Grenzwert lim_2 [______max. 8.9 *___]
Channel A: Value lim_2 / Canal A: Valeur limite lim_2
M12 Kanal B: Grenzwert lim_2 [______max. 8.9 *___]
Channel B: Value lim_2 / Canal B: Valeur limite lim_2
M13 Kanal A: Grenzwert lim_b [______________]
Channel A: Value lim_b / Canal A: Valeur limite lim_b
M14 Kanal B: Grenzwert lim_b [______________]
Channel B: Value lim_b / Canal B: Valeur limite lim_b
M15 Kanal A: Grenzwert-Verzögerung lim_1 [______10________]
Channel A: Delay Time lim_1 / Canal A: Temporisation limite lim_1
A&D LD IOEM
M16 Kanal B: Grenzwert-Verzögerung lim_1 [______10________]

Channel B: Delay Time lim_1 / Canal B: Temporisation limite lim_1
M17 Kanal A: Grenzwert-Verzögerung lim_2 [______10________]
Channel A: Delay Time lim_2 / Canal A: Temporisation limite lim_2
M18 Kanal B: Grenzwert-Verzögerung lim_2 [______10________]
Channel B: Delay Time lim_2 7 Canal B: Temporisation limite lim_2
M19 Kanal A: Grenzwert-Verzögerung lim_b [______________]
Channel A: Delay Time lim_b / Canal A: Temporisation limite lim_b
M20 Kanal B: Grenzwert-Verzögerung lim_b [______________]
Channel B: Delay Time lim_b / Canal B: Temporisation limite lim_b
**) Parametereinstellung in Verantwortung des Kunden - nach Inbetriebnahme des Antriebes

Parameter setting in responsibility of the customer – after opening the drive
Relais-Zuordnung - Gruppe N
Relay Configuration - Group N / Groupe N : Affectation des relais
N01 Kanal A: lim_1 wirkt auf -- [ ] K1 [X] K2 [ ] K3 [ ] warning
Channel A: lim_1 assigned to / Canal A: Agissant sur la limite lim_1
N02 Kanal B: lim_1 wirkt auf -- [ ] K1 [X] K2 [ ] K3 [ ] warning
Channel B: lim_1 assigned to / Canal B: Agissant sur la limite lim_1
N03 Kanal A: lim_2 wirkt auf -- [ ] K1 [ ] K2 [X] K3 [ ] trip
Channel A: lim_2 assigned to / Canal A: Agissant sur la limite lim_2
N04 Kanal B: lim_2 wirkt auf -- [ ] K1 [ ] K2 [ ] K3 [X] trip
Channel B: lim_2 assigned to / Canal B: Agissant sur la limite lim_2
N05 Kanal A: lim_b wirkt auf -- [ ] K1 [ ] K2 [ ] K3 [ ]
Channel A: lim_b assigned to / Canal A: Agissant sur la limite lim_b
N06 Kanal B: lim_b wirkt auf -- [ ] K1 [ ] K2 [ ] K3 [ ]
Channel B: lim_b assigned to / Canal B: Agissant sur la limite lim_b
N07 Relais K1: Selbsthaltung Y [ ] N [X]
Relay K1: Latching / Relais K1: Autoalimenté
N08 Relais K2: Selbsthaltung Y [X] N [ ]
N09 Relais K3: Selbsthaltung Y [X] N [ ]
N10 Relais K1: Ruhestrom-Schaltung Y [X] N [ ]
Relay K1: Normally Energized / Relais K1: Sécurité positive
N13 Relais K1: Grenzwert-Verknüpfung AND [ ] OR [X]
Relay K1: Logic / Relais K1: Fonction logique
Relay K2: Logic / Relais K2: Fonction logique
Relay K3: Logic 7 Relais K3: Fonction logique
OK-Überwachung - Gruppe O
OK Monitoring - Group O / Groupe O : Autosurveillance
O01 Kanal A: OK-Überwachung Y [X] N [ ]
Channel A: OK-Monitoring / Canal A: Autosurveillance
O02 Kanal B: OK-Überwachung Y [X] N [ ]
Channel B: OK-Monitoring / Canal B: Autosurveillance
O03 Kanal A: OK-Untergrenze [___-21.000____]
Channel A: OK-Lower Limit / Canal A: Limite inférieure
O04 Kanal B: OK-Untergrenze [___-21.000____]
Channel B: OK-Lower Limit / Canal B: Limite inférieure
O05 Kanal A: OK-Obergrenze [____-2.000____]
Channel A: OK-Upper Limit / Canal A: Limite supérieure
O06 Kanal B: OK-Obergrenze [____-2.000____]
Channel B: OK-Upper Limit / Canal B: Limite supérieure

A&D LD IOEM
Übertragungs-Parameter der seriellen Schnittstellen - Gruppe P

Baud Rate for Serial Interface - Group P / Groupe P : Vitesse du transfert des liaisons série
P00 Geräteadresse [______1_______]
Device Address / Adresse d'appareil
P01 Serielle Schnittstelle 1: Übertragungs-Geschwindigkeit 9600 [X] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ]
Serial Port 1 / Liaison série 1: Vitesse de transfert (Baud) 1200 [ ]
P02 Serielle Schnittstelle 2: Übertragungs-Geschwindigkeit 9600 [X] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ]
Serial Port 2 / Liaison série 2: Vitesse de transfert (Baud) 1200 [ ]
Generell gilt:
- Anfahr- und Abschaltvorgänge sowie Netzumschaltungen sind nicht in die
Schwingungsüberwachung einzubeziehen.
In general is valid:
- Start-up and shut-down-process as well as system transfer is not to be integrated for the condition
monitoring

6 Operation
6
Warning
Coverings providing protection against accidental contact with active or rotating
parts or coverings that are necessary for a proper air circuit and thus effective
cooling, must not be open under operation.
Modifications in comparison to normal operation (higher power input, temperatures
or vibrations, unusual noise or smell, reaction of monitoring systems and so on)
indicate that the normal function is disturbed. In order to avoid disturbances that
could cause direct or indirect grievous injuries to persons or damages to property,
the responsible maintenance personnel shall be notified immediately. In case of
doubt - taking into consideration the plant specific safety conditions - switch off the
machine immediately!
6.1 Switching on
Warning
Vibration monitoring shall be hidden during motor start, motor deceleration and
mains switch-over.
The limit values according to list of parameters M09 ... M12 are applicable to a rigid
foundation.Higher values are admissible for flexible foundations
(refer to DIN ISO 10816-3).
Caution
If starting conditions are specified in section 2.3., they must be observed.
If possible, start up the machine unloaded and check its balance quality.
If the machine runs faultlessly load the machine and check the temperature of
bearings and stator winding - if possible by means of existing measuring
equipment (refer to Chapter 4.2).
6.2 Plant Shutdown

Prior to longer plant shutdowns you have to presevere the machine.
see Chapter 3.1.2
Operation Edition 03.2011
7 Maintenance
7
7.1 Servicing
Warning
Prior to the commencement of any works on the machine make sure that the
installation is isolated properly. Pay not only attention to main circuits, but also to
existing additional or auxiliary circuits, in particular heating installations!
Some machine parts may be hot!
When cleaning with pressurised air, be careful to use suitable extraction and
personal protection measures (safety goggles, breathing filters or similar devices)!
If chemical cleaning agents are used, observe the warnings and application
instructions given on the respective safety material data sheet. Chemicals shall be
suited for the components, this applies in particular to synthetic materials.
Note
As operating conditions may be very different, only general intervals may be given,
that are valid for a faultless operation.
The machine requires only little, but necessary maintenance work.
These are, among others:
♦ bearing maintenance including lubrication

♦ Maintenance of slip rings and brushes
♦ cleaning the machine and accessories (filters).
Regular maintenance ensures continuous availability of the machine with lowest
possible maintenance costs.
Maintenance activities shall be carried out by trained personnel.
Completed maintenance activities shall be documented.
The torques from bolt connections (chapter 3.9) shall be followed.
For maintenance activities on running machines instructions or protective
measures against hot steam in case of possible winding- or terminal short-circuits
shall be established.
Depending on the operating and application conditions it may become necessary

to reduce maintenance intervals.
Maintenance Edition 03.2011
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Component after initial every month every year Chapt.

commissioning
Motor, complete Check operation in Check operation General cleaning and 7.1.1
service, balance in service, checking; check
quality, noises balance quality, insulation resistance 4.1.1
noises
Plant coupling check alignment after check alignment on the

one weeks operation plant
Rolling-contact after first week of operation re-lubrication, 2.2.5

bearing further re-lubrication according to lubrication schedule
Terminal box Cleaning; 7.1.1

Cable connection Clean contacts;
Protective and establish specified
earth conductor contact pressure
terminal
Brushes and Check condition and mobility of brushes Check brush pressure 7.1.5
Brush holders and mobility
Slip rings Check condition Check condition Cleaning 7.1.5
Filters 7.1.6
air-air heat checking the 7.1.7

exchanger condition,
cleaning if
necessary
When servicing the machine you have to pay attention to the weights of
components:
Component Weight
Rotor. complete 5,800 kg
Slip ring unit 170 kg
Bearing unit D-end 130 kg
Bearing unit ND-end 105 kg
End shield D-end 700 kg
End shield ND-end 1,200 kg
Cooling cover, complete 1,100 kg
Cover of outer shaft fan 175 kg
Outer shaft fan 35 kg
Edition 03.2011 Maintenance
7.1.1 General Cleaning and Maintenance Checks
Slip ring space including inserts

Inspection intervals: monthly together with the brush inspection (see chapter
7.1.4 visual inspection for contamination.
Cleaning intervals: depending on inspection result, at least every six months.
Cleaning should be performed as follows:
♦ Remove cover of maintenance port.

♦ Remove filter and clean in accordance with chapter 7.1.6
♦ Carefully clean slip ring space, the entire brush assembly and the slip ring body
by vacuuming with an
industrial vacuum cleaner and simultaneously brushing and wiping with a
clean, fluff-free cloth.
♦ Visual inspection of brushes, brush holders, brush bolts and slip rings.
♦ Perform the maintenance work required. Keep oil and contact grease away from
the slip rings.
♦ Install filter (if provided for the type in question); check seals of all covers
opened, renew if required or re-paste with adhesive varnish; firmly close all
covers.
Entire machine
Depending on the local operating conditions the machine shall be thoroughly
checked for contaminations and cleaned if necessary, at least once a year.
Cleaning:
Thorough cleaning using an industrial type vacuum cleaner supported by brushing
and wiping with fibre-free cloth.
In machines with closed circuit cooling the heat exchanger shall be cleaned
simultaneously.
In addition all accessible installation bolt joints shall be checked for proper seat.
The cable connections in the terminal boxes shall be checked for proper contact,
tight seat and proper execution.
Check the gaskets (terminal box cover, operating opening, air ducts) for proper
condition and exact seat, replace, if necessary.
Make the machine ready for operation after cleaning it.
7.1.2 Rolling-contact Bearing Maintenance
Re-lubrication
In order to ensure the proper function of the rolling-contact bearings re-lubrication
is necessary at regular intervals. Re-lubrication activities shall be carried out with
the machine running.
♦ Re-lubrication intervals: refer to Chapter 2.2.5

♦ Type of lubricant: refer to Chapter 2.2.5
- Fresh grease from the manufacturer shall have been stored for at least 6
weeks in order to avoid "bleeding"
- The lubricating grease shall be clean and stored well tempered.
♦ Lubricating points and respective re-lubrication grease quantities:
- For details refer to the lubrication plates on the machine.
- Exceeding the specified grease quantity when re-lubricating shall be
inadmissible as this may cause malfunctions due to grease leaking into the
machine.
♦ necessary equipment: commercially available grease gun for button head
lubricating nipples
♦ Re-lubrication procedure:
- Draw out grease collector, empty collecting container and grease its seal
surfaces, immediately re-install grease collector properly
- Press in specified re-lubrication quantity (grease of the same sort) with
machine running.
- Operating the machine with completely filled grease collecting container may
cause malfunctions due to grease leaking into the machine. That's why this
is inadmissible.
♦ Using different grease types:
- If grease of the type specified is not available for compelling reasons
adequate lubricating grease shall be used. If compatibility of these two
grease types is not guaranteed, the grease filling shall be totally renewed.
Nota
Immediately after the re-lubrication process the temperature at the bearing may
rise as the grease is still spread insufficiently. After several hours of operation the
usual temperatures should be regained.
Used grease will not always collect in the grease collector due to the existing
grease spaces within the bearing.
Caution
Re-lubrication is not an appropriate measure to prevent bearing noise or bearing
vibrations. Additional re-lubrication as compared with the specified re-lubrication
intervals or too large a re-lubrication amount may result in heating up and damage
to the bearings.
Total Refill
Total refill is only necessary after extended standstill periods (see Chapter 2.2.5),
in case of bearing changes or when using another grease type.
Procedure:
♦ Dismantle bearing entirely and clean thoroughly using petroleum ether or
solvent naphtha.
Observe instructions concerning the use of petroleum ether or solvent naphtha.
Explosion hazard!
♦ Immediately after evaporation grease bearing parts with fresh grease of the
specified original or replacement type and pack in oil-impregnated paper until
reinstallation.
Installation room must be free from dust.
♦ Mount machine ready for operation. In case of grease replacement replace also
grease in the lubricating tubes.
♦ Start machine for test run and immediately press grease of the specified original
or replacement type in the bearings with the machine running. The quantity to
be pressed into each bearing shall be established taking into account the
grease quantity applied directly when fitting the bearing (see Chapter 2.2.5 -
Initial Lubrication).
♦ Check grease collector and empty, if necessary (see above).
♦ Empty grease collector after 20 operating hours.
7.1.3 Checking the bearing lubrication after longer shutdown or

storage
In depending on ambient conditions, the full functionality of the indicated grease
will last approx. 1 year (normal atmosphere) or 6 months (sea-water containing
atmosphere) at +30°C max.
If the shutdown or storage period under the above-mentioned conditions is longer
than indicated, the functionality of the grease used must be thoroughly checked.
Lubrication specialists must decide whether re-lubrication (see chapter 2.2.5) or
replenishment is necessary.
7.1.4 Brush maintenance

The carbon brushes shall be regularly inspected through the service flap. When
changing the brushes, make sure to use the prescribed brush brands and
dimensions. Dimensions see chapter 8.
Monthly inspection interval

st
♦ 1 inspection after a one-week operating period.
♦ Check condition of brushes during machine shutdown. Pull out and check each
brush separately.
Properly run-in brushes have a shining sliding surface.
Evaluation of the brush condition also involves taking into account the condition
of slip rings.
Replace any damaged, worn or not properly running brushes by brushes of the
same brand.
♦ Check brush height.
Make a written note of brush wear to be able to collect comparative values.
Take into account operating limit or admissible residual height (=1/3 of height of
new brush).
For this purpose have a wear mark indicating the admissible residual height.
When the brush has reached or nearly reached this state due to wear, replace
brush by brush of identical brand.
♦ Re-install the inspected brushes on the correct sides. They must easily move.
The brushes must not ”chatter”. In this case change brushes and check brush
holder.
♦ Check contamination of slip ring space and clean if required.
Annual inspection interval

♦ Check brush pressure:
The brush holder is equipped with a high-precision spring.
The specific brush pressure lies at
+20%
p = 20 kPa
- 7%
and is guaranteed by this spring without re-tensioning device for the entire wear
range.
If the prescribed brush pressure is no longer attained, replace the damaged
brush holder.
♦ Check brush holders:
Check the brush holders in a dismantled state using a spring balance and a
dynamometer.
The specific brush pressure must be in conformity with the value. mentioned
above.
Brush replacemen
New brushes (Type and dimensions see Chapter 8) must be coarsely ground and
fine-ground to the radius of the slip rings. This can be done either in a fixture
outside the machine or directly on the slip ring using abrasive cloth. Grind until at
least 80 % of the contact face of each brush is seated.
Then wipe the face clean using a lintfree, soft cloth. Remove any emery crystals or
other foreign matter carefully.
Clean the slip ring area, the brushgear and slip rings thoroughly.
(see Chapter 7.1.1)
7.1.5 Slip ring maintenance

Inspection interval: every 6 months, or during brush replacement
The slip rings are contact surfaces and have a shining brush running surface under
normal operating conditions. The quality of the slip ring surface is an indication of
the brush running properties. Check the surface condition by visual inspection after
the machine has been shut down.
If the admissible radial run-out of the slip rings is exceeded, outside turning with a
surface roughness of Rz 10 is required. A surface finer than Rz 10 should be
avoided, as this will prevent the development of the necessary patina.
Please note that slight brush marks may occur after the run-in period (approx. 500
operating hours) which, however, do not affect the functional safety of the slip
rings.
If burns, scorches or grooves are detected on the surface, the admissible radial
run-out of the slip rings has been exceeded, and the slip rings must be turned.
In the case of insignificant stains the slip rings should be rapidly ground with a
manual grinding tool in the direction of rotation. The manual grinding tool must
correspond to the actual roundness of the slip rings. Fine abrasive cloth should be
inserted between the grinding tool and the slip rings.
Any existing patina should not be removed by grinding. This patina ensures good
contact properties under the existing operating conditions.
Maximum admissible radial run-out of the slip rings during operation: 0.2 mm
When turning or grinding the slip rings, take into account their minimum diameter:
490 mm
7.1.6 Filter maintenance

Inspection interval: every 2 months together with the inspection of the brushes
(see chapter 7.1.4).
Visual inspection for contamination with the machine at standstill.
Changing interval: depending on inspection result, but at least every 6 months
Changing the filter:
♦ Remove filter, detach clamp bolt; pull out filter mats.

♦ Make sure that the filter mats are replaced. (see Spare parts list in Chapter 8)
When doing so, make sure that the filter mat lies flat and without any gaps
against the sides. Tension the filter mat only to an extent that is necessary to
mount it without gaps. Over-tensioning may result in lateral gaps or damage!
♦ The denser filter mat side is printed with details of the manufacturer and shall
point downwards.
♦ Complete the filter; check filter foot seal and seal of the maintenance ports,
renew or re-paste if required.
♦ Install filter, firmly close maintenance port.
7.1.7 Maintenance of Air-air Heat Exchanger
Inspection interval: monthly or in case of reduced cooling effect.

♦ In accordance with the machine design, silencers may have to be removed prior
to inspection.
♦ Check the pipes for visible contamination and deposits.
♦ If deposits are larger than 0.5 mm, clean the pipes.
♦ Depending on the ambient conditions and the results of the inspection, the
inspection interval may be extended.
Cleaning the Pipes

♦ Depending on the machine design, silencers and hoods may have to be
removed prior to inspection.
♦ Blow the pipes with pressurized air.
♦ Depending on the nature of the deposits, suitable brushes may be necessary
for proper cleaning.
♦ After cleaning, mount all components and check for tight and proper fit.
7.2 Malfunctions and Remedial Measures

Malfunction Possible Cause Remedial Measure
- motor does not start - at least 2 supply conductors - check installation mains
coupled or disconnected; interrupted supply, switches, fuses
no noise
- machine dead - check terminal
connections
- motor does not start - 1 supply conductor interrupted - see above
coupled or disconnected;
humming noise
- bearing damaged or jammed - check bearing, if
necessary replace
bearing
- motor does not or too - load torque too large - unload driven machine
slowly start if loaded
- mains voltage too low - check system voltage
- motor starts at no load, - voltage drop in supply - check plant supply
does not take on load conductor too large conductors
- motor makes humming - stator winding interrupted - measure winding phase
noise when running, stator resistance values and
winding heats up very fast winding temperature
- system voltage too large - check system voltage
- insufficient cooling due to - clean
contaminated air supply lines
- wrong sense of rotation - check terminal
connections;
observe direction arrow
- abnormal noise - mechanical causes - clarification, check
foundation, coupling, ...,
eliminate fault
- electrical causes - noise stops if motor is
switched off; consult
motor manufacturer
- coupled irregular, - coupling or driving machine - check coupling and
disconnected regular fault alignment, check driving
machine
- lowering foundation - re-align machine,
correct foundation
- insufficient balancing of driven - re-balance
parts
- disconnected irregular - out-of-balance - irregularity remains
running during voltage-free
runout; re-balancing
necessary

- disconnected irregular - stator winding phase interrupted - check current
running (continued) consumption of all
supply conductors
- rotor drags because of bearing - check bearing, if
damage necessary, replace
bearing
- fastening screws loose - check screwed joints,
tighten
- resonance in the foundation - foundation detuned
- motor distorted - check alignment
- bearings too warm - bearing damage - check bearings
- wrong or unsuitable grease for - observe greasing
rolling-contact bearings details, re-lubrication,
grease change
7.2.1 Malfunctions of brushes and slip rings

These disturbances occur due to unusual operation conditions, unsatisfactory
maintenance or extreme circulating air conditions. Under normal conditions these
disturbances do not occur during correct machine maintenance.
The specification serves for the information in an emergency.

- brush fire, sparking - unequal or wrong brush - functional check of
pressure brushes and brush
holder; replace brush
holder
- insufficient grinding-in of the - new grinding-in of the
brushes brushes
- distorted connection twisted - check the twisted wires,
wires if required replace
brushes
- distance between brush holder - readjust brush holder
and slip ring too large
- untrue slip rings - check slip rings;
measure the out-of-
roundness deviation
using a dial gauge;
take into account the
admissible maximum
value

- brush fire, sparking - oil, grease and dirt on the slip - clean by means of a
(continued) ring surface non-fray cloth slightly
impregnated with petrol;
keep grooves clean
- vibration due to bearing - check bearing or
damage or coupling and/or coupling and/or
machine imbalance machine; if required,
replace bearing;
balance coupling; notify
the manufacturer of the
machine
- vibration due to loose - check foundation or
foundation and/or housing bolting for tight
housing bolting or fit; measure oscillations
extreme operating at current operating
conditions conditions; notify the
manufacturer
- mechanical damage to the slip - rework slip rings on the
rings lathe; slight round off
edges
- high or irregular brush - wrong brush brand, mixed - replace brushes,
wear equipment with brushes of comply with the brand
different brands specified
- unequal brush - check the brush
pressure pressure, replace the
(heavy deviation) brush holder, if required
- dust accumulation on slip rings, - thoroughly clean the
precipitation of ambient vapours slip rings and/or regrind
or gases on the slip ring using a wooden
grinding block; check
the
ambient air conditions
on the plant side
- untrue slip rings - see above
- brushes rattle or break out - unequal or wrong brush - measure the brush
pressure pressure and/or replace
brush holder
- brush holder faulty - check and/or replace
brush holder
- brushes ground in - carry out new
insufficiently grinding-in of the
brushes or replace
- mechanical damage to slip - check and/or rework
rings and/or untrue slip rings slip rings; slightly round
off the edges

- formation of grooves, stria - extreme ambient - check the ambient air
or scratches on the slip conditions; air humidity too conditions
ring surface high; condensation water
precipitation due to intense
temperature variations;
precipitation of vapours or
gases emanating from the plant
- blocked brushes in the holder, - check the brushes,
even due to brush holder or replace,
distorted or damaged if required
connection twisted wires
- wrong brush brand, mixed - see above
equipment with brushes of
different brands
Further causes may result from the specific installation and operating conditions,
that are only known to the operator. Please notify the manufacturer accordingly.
8 Spare Parts
8
General
For a fast and unambiguous spare parts order handling we ask you to exactly
specify the rating plate data with type designation and machine number. These
data are also given in the test report.
8.1 Spare parts list 1RR5719-6JA90-Z
Qty. Designation Dimensions Material number

1 deep-grove ball bearing 6338 MC3 DIN 625 3561 118 3700
D-end
1 deep-grove ball bearing 6334 MC3 DIN 625 3561 118 3617
ND-end
2 resistance thermometer for double- RTD 3811 153 4896
bearings
1 SPM – nipple D-end M8 / 113 mm 3811 299 1504
1 SPM – nipple ND-end M8 / 24 mm 3811 299 1408
2 acceleration sensor type AS-022 3811 299 5910
6 heating elements for each 500 W 3929 219 1105
anti-condensation heater
24 brush holder TlKZf 40x20-25-52-60 3619 110 5231
24 carbon brush 40x20x40 type CG 626 4856 413 6980
2 filter mat MY-STOP 500 AY.90025.44
Spare Parts Edition 03.2011
9 Test Certificates / Logbook
9
9.1 Commissioning
Date Works performed Name / Signature
Test Certificates / Logbook Edition 03.2011
Edition 03.2011 Test Certificates / Logbook
9.2 Services
9.3 Trouble shooting

Date Works performed / reason for the fault Name / Signature
Date Works performed / reason for the fault Name / Signature
9.4 Amendments
Date Works performed / Purpose Name / Signature
Date Works performed / Purpose Name / Signature
9.5 Test Certificates

See the following pages
10 Additional Operating Instructions
(Options, third-party suppliers) 10
Additional Operating Instructions (Options, third-party suppliers) Edition 03.2011
10.1 Vibration monitoring system VC1100 C11

“VIBROCONTROL 1100 C01 / C02 / C11 / C12
Technical Documentation“
Settings
see “Parameter for Vibration monitoring“ Chapter 5
10.2 Vibration Velocity Sensor type AS – 022

see separate Documentation
Edition 03.2011 Additional Operating Instructions (Options, third-party suppliers)
By now the following editions were published: Edition Internal item number
03.2011 2451801856 / 734
Edition 03.2011 comprises the following chapters:
Chapter Amendments Date of

publication
1 Safety Instructions First edition 03.2011
2 Description First edition 03.2011
3 Installation / Mounting Instructions First edition 03.2011
4 Commissioning Instructions First edition 03.2011
5 List of Parameters First edition 03.2011
6 Operating Instructions First edition 03.2011
7 Maintenance Instructions First edition 03.2011
8 Spare Parts List First edition 03.2011
9 Logbook / Text Certificates First edition 03.2011
10 Additional Operating Instructions (options, third-party First edition 03.2011
suppliers)
Siemens AG
Automation technology and drive engineering (A&D)
Section Large Drives (LD) © Siemens AG, 2001
PO box 4743, 90025 Nuremberg Subject to change without prior notice
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order-No.: 2451801856 / 734

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
03.2011
Sicherheitshinweise D
Safety Instructions GB
Consignes de sécurité F
Instrucciones de seguridad E
Istruzzioni di sicurezza I
Instrucoes de seguranca P
Veiligheidswenken NL
Säkerhetsanvisningar S
Sikkerhedshenvisninger DK
Värähtelynmittaus SF
Υποδείξεις ασφαλείας GR
Sigurnosne napomene YU
Указания по безопасности RUS
Instrucţiuni pentru securitatea muncii RO
Zasady bezpieczeństwa PL
C 102 813.001
Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH
Leydhecker Str. 10
64293 Darmstadt
Service Hotline:
Tel.: +49(0)6151 / 428 1400
Fax: +49(0)6151 / 428 1401
E-Mail: info@bkvibro.de
Internet: www.bkvibro.com
Feb 2009
Sicherheitshinweise
D
Sicherheitshinweise im Umgang mit Schwingungsmess-
und Schwingungsüberwachungsgeräten
Im Einzelnen handelt es sich hierbei um Mess-, Diagnose- und Überwachungsgeräte, im
folgenden mit "Gerät" bezeichnet.
Im Umgang mit unseren Geräten einschließlich Zubehör sind, zum Schutz gegen
Verletzungsgefahr, die nachfolgenden Sicherheitshinweise zu beachten.
Zu Ihrer eigenen Sicherheit müssen Sie die einschlägigen Sicherheitshinweise gelesen
und verstanden haben, bevor Sie mit dem Gerät arbeiten.
Bewahren Sie die Sicherheitshinweise so auf, dass diese allen Personen, die mit dem
Gerät arbeiten, zur Einsichtnahme zur Verfügung stehen.
Piktogramme und deren Bedeutung

Unsere Geräte entsprechen dem Stand der Technik und den anerkannten sicher-
heitstechnischen Regeln. Dennoch sind Restgefahren vorhanden, auf die in der
Dokumentation in Form von Piktogrammen hingewiesen wird. Folgende Piktogramme
kommen zur Anwendung:
Warnung vor Gefahrenquelle Warnung vor gefährlicher,

elektrischer Spannung
Sicherung vorgeschriebene Erdung
vorgeschriebener Schutzleiteranschluss
Qualifikation des Betreibers

An den Geräten werden Einstellungen vorgenommen, die bei falschen Einstellungen
weitreichende Folgen haben können z.B. Maschinenschaden, Personenschaden.
Für alle Arbeiten in Verbindung mit unseren Geräten ist nur fachkundiges, sachkundiges
und autorisiertes Personal zugelassen. Darunter fallen unter anderem folgende Arbeiten:
Installation und Inbetriebnahme
Bei der Installation und Inbetriebnahme handelt es sich überwiegend um Arbeiten an
der elektrischen Ausrüstung. Diese Arbeiten dürfen nur von einer Elektrofachkraft oder
von unterwiesenen Personen unter Leitung und Aufsicht einer Elektrofachkraft gemäß
den elektrotechnischen Regeln/Vorschriften vorgenommen werden.
Änderung der Gerätespezifikation
Eine Änderung der Gerätespezifikation hat Auswirkung auf den Überwachungs-
prozess bei stationären Anlagen und Auswirkung auf den messtechnischen Ablauf bei
tragbaren Messgeräten.
Fehlermeldungen
Diese müssen unbedingt beachtet, deren Ursache festgestellt und beseitigt werden.
-3-
Sicherheitshinweise
Wartung und Reparatur

Hier sind die einschlägigen Sicherheitshinweise in der Wartungs- und Reparatur-
anleitung zu beachten.
Warnung vor Gefahrenquelle
Beim Umgang mit unseren Geräten einschließlich dem Zubehör, stellen die
spannungsführenden Teile eine potentionelle Gefahrenquelle dar.
Es handelt sich hierbei um:
Spannungen allgemein
Spannungen über 50 V sind grundsätzlich als gefährlich eingestuft.
Die Netzspannungszuführung
Gefährdete Bereiche im speziellen sind spannungs-führende Teile in den
Geräten. Dies können sein: verschiedene Lötpunkte, Leiterbahnen, die
Klemmen für Netzanschluss, Relaiskontakte usw.
Vor Öffnen des Gerätes Netzspannung allpolig abschalten.
Fremdspannungen
Beim Freischalten eines Gerätes müssen auch eventuell vorhandene
Fremdspannungen berücksichtigt werden.
Sicherungen
Bei Geräten mit vorgesehenem Sicherungswechsel sind nur Original-
sicherungen zugelassen.
Schutzleiter
Der Anschluss ist ausreichend zu dimensionieren und fachgerecht
herzustellen.
Akku-/Batteriewechsel
Vor Akku- oder Batteriewechsel Bedienungshinweise beachten!
Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch
des Gerätes
− Das Gerät ist ausschließlich für seinen bestimmungsgemäßen Gebrauch zu

verwenden. Jeder darüber hinausgehende Gebrauch ist verboten. Für Schäden,
die durch nicht bestimmungsgemäßen Gebrauch entstehen, haftet Brüel & Kjær
Vibro nicht. Das Risiko trägt allein der Anwender.
Der bestimmungs-gemäße Gebrauch ist der Dokumentation zu entnehmen.
− Setzen sie das Gerät nur den zulässigen Umgebungseinflüssen aus. Diese sind
den technischen Gerätedaten zu entnehmen.
− Die elektrische Ausrüstung ist regelmäßig zu warten.

Mängel, wie lose Verbindungen, defekte Steckverbinder usw.müssen umgehend
behoben werden.
des Sensors
Der Sensor darf nur für den im Datenblatt spezifizierten Einsatz verwendet werden.
Jeder darüber hinausgehende Gebrauch gilt als nicht bestimmungsgemäß.
-4-
Sicherheitshinweise
des Kabels
− Das Kabel darf nur für den im Datenblatt spezifizierten Einsatz verwendet
werden. Jeder darüber hinausgehende Gebrauch gilt als nicht bestimmungs-
gemäß.
− Benützen Sie das Kabel nicht, um den Stecker aus der Steckdose zu ziehen.
− Kontrollieren Sie regelmäßig Kabel und Steckverbindungen.

Lassen Sie diese bei Beschädigung sofort von einem Fachmann erneuern.
Einsatz von Fremdfabrikaten
Sensor und Zubehör, die nicht von Brüel & Kjær Vibro geliefert werden, unterliegen
dem Verantwortungsbereich des Betreibers. Der Betreiber hat dafür Sorge zu tragen,
dass die Anforderungen bezüglich elektrischer Sicherheit und technischer Daten, den
zugesagten Eigenschaften entsprechen.
Für Fremdfabrikate übernimmt Brüel & Kjær Vibro keine Haftung.
Für Defekte an Brüel & Kjær Vibro - Produkten, die durch Fremdfabrikate entstehen,
haftet der Betreiber.
Der Betreiber ist verantwortlich ...

für das Einrichten
Für das Einrichten des Gerätes und für die Sicherheit der Betriebsumgebung ist der
Betreiber verantwortlich. Er hat dafür Sorge zu tragen, dass die nationalen und inter-
nationalen Sicherheits-/Schutzvorschriften beachtet und angewendet werden.
für die Funktionssicherheit
Vor Inbetriebnahme einer Anlage muss der Betreiber die Funktionssicherheit des
Gerätes bzw. der Anlage überprüfen.
Der Betreiber ist dafür verantwortlich, dass nur periphere Geräte eingesetzt werden,
die den sicheren Betrieb unserer Anlage gewährleisten.
Empfehlung an den Betreiber

Falls sich durch den Einsatz des Geräts im Zusammenhang mit Maschinen oder Anlagen-
teilen Gefahren ergeben könnten, die nicht im Verantwortungsbereich von Brüel & Kjær
Vibro liegen, müssen betreiberseitig sicherheitstechnische Anweisungen oder Warnungen
erlassen, verbreitet und vom betroffenen Personal verstanden und bestätigt werden.
Hinweis:
Wenn das Gerät in eine Maschine eingebaut oder zum Zusammenbau einer Maschine
bestimmt ist, ist die Inbetriebnahme solange untersagt, bis die Maschine, in die das Gerät
eingebaut wird, den Bestimmungen der EU-Richtlinien entspricht.
Verbot von eigenmächtigen Veränderungen

Das Gerät und Zubehör darf ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung weder konstruktiv
noch sicherheitstechnisch verändert werden. Jede Veränderung schließt eine Haftung
unsererseits für daraus entstehenden Schaden aus.
Insbesondere sind alle Reparaturen, Lötarbeiten an Platinen und das Austauschen von
Bauteilen/Modulen/Leiterplatten ohne ausdrückliche Genehmigung von Brüel & Kjær
Vibro untersagt.
Bei Einsatz von Ersatzteilen sind nur Originalteile von Brüel & Kjær Vibro zu verwenden.
-5-
Safety Instructions
GB
Safety Instructions for the Handling of Vibration
Measuring and Monitoring Systems
In particular, the systems concerned are measuring, diagnosis and monitoring instruments,
hereafter called "system".
When handling these systems including accessories, for protection from danger of injury,
pay heed to the following safety instructions.
For your own safety, make yourself familiar with applicable safety instructions before using
the system.
Keep safety instructions within reach of all persons using the system
Pictograms and their Meanings

Our systems are designed to the latest state of the art and the approved safety technical
regulations. However, there is a number of residual risks, documentation refers to in form
of pictograms. The following pictograms are used:
Source of danger Dangerous electrical voltage
Fuse Specified ground
Specified protective conductor
User Qualification
Settings are effected on systems which if incorrect cause serious damage to machines
and/or persons.
Ensure that all work in conjunction with our systems is performed by skilled, expert and
authorized workers. Among these works are:
Installation and Commissioning
Installation and commissioning primarily concern work on electrical equipment. These
works exclusively be performed by electricians or workers instructed and supervised
by an electrician in accordance with electrotechnical regulations/directives.
Change of System Specification
Any change of system specification has its effects on monitoring process with
stationary systems and on the measuring sequence with portable measuring systems.
Error Messages
Any such message require to be heeded; the cause of error, to be detected and
eliminated.
Maintenance and Repair>
Pay heed to the applicable safety instructions given in Maintenance and Repair
Manual.
-6-
Safety Instructions
Source of Danger
In handling our systems and accessories, live parts are a potential source
of danger. These are:
Voltages in General
As a rule, voltages over 50 V are considered dangerous.
Power Infeed
Hazardous areas are in particular all live parts of system, e.g. certain
soldering points, conducting paths, terminals for mains connection, relay
contacts.
Before opening system unit, disconnect all wires from power supply.
External Voltages
When disconnecting system, watch out for external voltages.
Fuses
With systems provided with exchangeable fuse, exclusively use original
fuses.
Protective Conductor
Ensure that conductor is sufficiently sized and expertly designed.
Storage Battery/Battery Exchange
When exchanging battery, pay heed to instructions given in Operating
Manual !
Intended Use
of System
− Use system exclusively as originally intended. Any use other than originally
intended is prohibited. Brüel & Kjær Vibro does not assume any liability for
damages resulting from inappropriate use.
The user is solely responsible. For originally intended use, see system
documentation.
− Ensure that system is exposed only to admissible environmental influences

specified in technical system data sheet.
− Maintain electrical equipment in regular intervals.

Remedy defects, e.g. loose wires, defective connectors, immediately.
of Sensor
Exclusively use sensor as specified in data sheet. Any use other than specified is
considered inappropriate.
of Cable
− Exclusively use cable as specified in data sheet. Any use other than specified is
considered inappropriate.
− Never use cable to pull plug out of socket.
− Check cable and connectors in regular intervals.

Have any damage immediately repaired by a specialist
-7-
Safety Instructions
Use of Bought-In Items

For pickups and accessories not supplied by Brüel & Kjær Vibro the user is solely
responsible. The user is bound to ensure that the demands on electrical safety and
technical properties conform with the agreed data.
Brüel & Kjær Vibro does not assume any responsibility for bought-in items.
The user is liable for any defect on Brüel & Kjær Vibro products caused by bought-in
items
The User Is Responsible for...

Setup
The user is responsible for system setup as well as for the safety of the operating
environment. He is to ensure that all applicable national and international safety
standards are applied and heeded.
Functional Safety
Before commissioning a plant, user has to check system, or plant, for functional
safety.
The user is bound to ensure that any peripheral used grants safe operation of our
system.
Recommendations to User
If the use of the system in conjunction with machines or plant sections can produce risks
outside of Brüel & Kjær Vibro's responsibility, the user is expected to prepare and
distribute safety technical instructions or warnings and to ensure that the personnel
concerned has received and understood same.
Note:
If system is integrated into a machine or designed to be assembled, commissioning must
not take place until the machine the system is to be integrated in conforms to the EC
directives.
Prohibition of Unauthorized Modifications

System and accessories must not be changed neither in construction nor safety
technology without the express consent of Brüel & Kjær Vibro. Any unauthorized
modification excludes Brüel & Kjær Vibro's liability for resulting damages.
This applies in particular to repair work, soldering work on P.C. boards and replacement of
components/modules/P.C. boards.
When replacing parts, exclusively use the original Brüel & Kjær Vibro spare parts.
-8-
Consignes de sécurité
F
Consignes de sécurité pour la manipulation d'appareils
de mesure et de surveillance des vibrations
Il s'agit plus particulièrement d'appareils de mesure, de diagnostic et de surveillance,
appelés par la suite "appareil". Observer les consignes de sécurité exposées ci-dessous,
destinées à la protection contre les lésions corporelles lors de la manipulation de nos
appareils, accessoires compris.
Vous devez avoir pris connaissance, pour votre propre sécurité, des consignes relatives à
la sécurité, et les avoir ensuite assimilées, avant de travailler avec l'appareil.
Conservez les Consignes de sécurité en un endroit tel, que les personnes qui se servent
de l'appareil puissent les trouver à leur disposition pour les examiner.
Les divers pictogrammes et leur signification

Nos appareils sont conçus selon les règles de l'art et sont conformes à l'égard des
réglements de sécurité reconnus. Il existe pourtant encore des risques résiduels, auxquels
on se refère dans la documentation sous forme de pictogrammes. Les pictogrammes
suivants sont utilisés :
Avertissement d'une source Avertissement d'une tension

de danger électrique dangereuse
Fusible Mise à la terre spécifiée
Conducteur de protection spécifié
Qualification de l'utilisateur
Les appareils feront l'objet de divers réglages qui peuvent avoir de graves conséquences
s'ils sont erronés, p. ex. endommager la machine ou causer des lésions corporelles.
L'exécution des travaux mettant en oeuvre nos appareils ne doit être confiée qu'à un
personnel compétent, expert et autorisé. Les travaux énumérés ci-dessous en font
également partie :
Installation et mise en service
En ce qui concerne l'installation et la mise en service, il s'agit principalement de
travaux portant sur les équipements électriques. Ces travaux ne doivent être exécutés
que par une main-d'oeuvre experte en électricité ou par des personnes qui
travailleront sous la direction et le contrôle d'une personne experte en électricité,
conformément aux Règles/Directives électrotechniques.
Modification de spécification de l'appareil
Une modification de la spécification de l'appareil a des suites pour le porcess de la
surveillance par des installations fixes et de même que pour le déroulement de la
technique de mesure pour les appareils portables.
Messages d'erreurs.
Ceux-ci doivent obligatoirement être considérés et leur cause définie et éliminée.
-9-
Maintenance et réparations.
Il faut observer ici les consignes de sécurité correspondantes du manuel de
maintenance et de réparation.
Avertissement de sources de danger
En manipulant nos appareils, accessoires compris, les pièces conductrices

de courant présentent une source potentielle de danger.
Il s'agit particulièrement :
des tensions en général
Les tensions au-dessus de 50 V sont par principe répertoriées dans la
catégorie des tensions dangereuses.
Les alimentations de tension secteur
Les zones spécialement menacées sont les pièces conductrices dans les
appareils. Celles-ci peuvent être : différents points de soudure, les pistes
conductives, les bornes de raccordement au réseau, les contacts des relais
etc.
Avant d'ouvrir l'appareil déconnecter la tension du réseau des appareils sur
tous les pôles.
Tensions d'origine étrangère
Lors de la déconnexion d'un appareil il faut également tenir compte des
tensions d'origine étrangère éventuellement présentes.
Fusibles
Pour les appareil, pour lesquels un chagement de fusibles est prévu, seuls
sont autorisés les fusibles d'origine.
Conducteur de protection
Il faut prévoir un dimensionnement suffisant du raccordement, qui sera
réalisé avec compétence.
Changement des batteries/accus
Consulter les consignes d'utilisation avant tout changement de batteries
ou d'accus.
Utilisation conforme
de l'appareil
− L'utilisation de l'appareil doit être strictement conforme. Tout outrepassement est

interdit. Brüel & Kjær Vibro n'est pas responsable des dommages qui pourraient
être causés par suite d'utilisation non conforme. Le risque en est sous la seule
responsabilité de l'utilisateur. L'utilisation conforme est décrite dans la documen-
tation.
− Ne soumettez pas l'appareil à d'autres influences que celles de l'environnement

spécifié. Ces conditions sont indiquées dans les caractéristiques techniques de
l'appareil.
− L'équipement électrique doit fait l'objet d'une maintenance régulière. Des

carences, telles que des raccordements desserrés, des connecteurs à prises
défecteuses, etc. doivent être immédiatement éliminées.
du capteur
Le capteur ne doit être utilisé que pour les cas spécifiés par leur fiche technique. Tout
outrepassement est considéré comme non conforme.
du câble
- 10 -
− Le câble doit être utilisé uniquement pour les cas spécifiés par la fiche technique.
Tout outrepassement est considéré comme non conforme.
− N'utilisez pas le câble pour tirer le connecteur hors de la prise de courant.
− Contrôlez régulièrement le câble et les connecteurs. Faites-les remplacer par un

électricien qualifié dès que vous avez constaté un dommage quelconque.
Mise en oeuvre de produits de fabrication externe
Capteurs et accessoires qui ne seraient pas fournis par Brüel & Kjær Vibro se trouvent
sous l'entière responsabilité de l'utilisateur. L'utilisateur doit veiller à ce que les
exigences concernant la sécurité au niveau électrique et des caractéristiques
techniques correspondent aux propriétés spécifiées.
La responsabilité de Brüel & Kjær Vibro n'est pas engagée pour les produits de
fabrication externe. L'utilisateur est seul responsable de tous les défauts qui
pourraient être causés par des produits de fabrication externe sur les produits Brüel &
Kjær Vibro.
L'utilisateur est responsable ...
des réglages
Les réglages des appareils et la sécurité des abords est sous la responsabilité de
l'utilisateur. Il doit veiller à ce que les directives de sécurité et de protection nationales
et internationales soient respectées et utilisées.
de la sécurité de fonctionnement
L'utilisateur doit contrôler la sécurité de fonctionnement des appareils ou de
l'installation avant de procéder à la mise en service.
Il est du domaine de la responsabilité de l'utilisateur que seuls soient mis en oeuvre
des apparareil périphériques pouvant garantir la sécurité de fonctionnement de notre
installation.
Conseils destinés à l'utilisateur
Si des dangers pouvaient résulter de la mise en oeuvre de l'appareil en liaison avec
des machines ou parties de l'installation qui ne seraient pas du domaine de la
responsabilité de Brüel & Kjær Vibro, des directives de sécurité ou des avertissements
doivent être promulgués, diffusés par le côté exploitant, et assimilés et confirmés par
le personnel concerné.
Remarque:
Lorsqu'un appareil est destiné à être monté dans une machine ou à être assemblé avec
une machine, la mise en service est interdite tant que la machine, dans laquelle l'appareil
doit être monté, ne sera pas conforme aux prescriptions des Directives de la CE.
Interdiction de toute modification arbitraire
Aucune modification de l'appareil, ni des accessoires, ne peut être apportée `ni dans
satant constructive qu'à l'égard des règlements de sécurité ne peuvent en aucun cas
être modifiés sans notre accord exprès. Aucune modification des appareils et des
accessoire ne peut être apportée ni à leur conception, ni vis-à-vis des règlements de
sécurité, sans une autorisation formelle de notre part.
Toute modification implique une responsabilité de notre part des tout dommage pouvant
en résulter. Il est en particulier interdit de procéder à quelle que réparation que ce soit, aux
travaux de soudure et à l'échange de composants/modules/circuits imprimés sans une
autorisation exprès de Brüel & Kjær Vibro. Les pièces détachées utilisées ne doivent être
que des pièces d'origine de Brüel & Kjær Vibro.
- 11 -
Instrucciones de seguridad
E
Instrucciones de seguridad para el manejo de los
instrumentos de medición y vigilancia de vibraciones
Se trata de los instrumentos de medición, diagnósis y vigilancia, a continuación
designados como "instrumentos".
Para prevenir accidentes y heridas, se deben observar absolutamente las siguientes
instrucciones de seguridad para el manejo de nuestros instrumentos, incluidos los
accesorios.
Para su propia seguridad, Vd. tiene que haber leído y comprendido las pertinentes
instrucciones de seguridad antes de trabajar con el instrumento.
Guarden las instrucciones de seguridad en un lugar accesible a todas las personas que
trabajan con el instrumento para que éstas puedan consultarlas.
Los pictogramas y su significado

Nuestros instrumentos corresponden al estado actual de la técnica y son conformes a las
reconocidas reglas de seguridad. Sin embargo, existen riesgos residuales que en la
documentación se señalan con pictogramas. Se usan los siguientes pictogramas:
Advertencia contra fuente de Advertencia contra tensión

peligro eléctrica peligrosa
Fusible Puesta a tierra prescrita
Conexión prescrita del conductor

protector
Calificación del operador

En los instrumentos se efectúan ajustes que, en caso de ser incorrectos, pueden traer
graves consecuencias como daño de la máquina o daños personales.
Solamente el personal experto y correspondientemente autorizado debe ejecutar
todo tipo de trabajos con nuestros instrumentos. Esto se refiere, entre otros, a los trabajos
siguientes:
Instalación y puesta en servicio
En lo que se refiere a la instalación y la puesta en servicio, se trata principalmente de
trabajos en el equipo eléctrico. Tales trabajos solamente deben ejecutarse por un
especialista eléctrico o por personal correspondientemente instruido bajo la dirección
y supervisión de un especialista eléctrico conforme a las normas/prescripciones
eléctrotécnicas.
Modificaciones de la especificación del instrumento
Una modificación de la especificación del instrumento tiene influencias - en caso de
instalaciones estacionarias - sobre el proceso de vigilancia y - en caso de medidores
portátiles - sobre el proceso de medición.
- 12 -
Mensajes de error
Estos deben observarse en cualquier circunstancia, hay que localizar y eliminar la
causa.
Mantenimiento y reparación.
En este respecto, se deben observar las pertinentes notas de seguridad en las
instrucciones de mantenimiento y reparación.
Advertencias contra fuentes de peligro
Al trabajar con nuestros instrumentos incluidos los accesorios, las partes

conductoras de corriente representan un peligro potencial. Se trata de:
Tensión en general
Las tensiones superiores a 50 V se clasifican por principio como
peligrosas.
Alimentación de la tensión de red
Especialmente las partes conductoras de tensión dentro de los instru-
mentos se consideran como sectores peligrosos. Se puede tratar de:
diversos puntos de soldadura, conductores impresos, los bornes para la
conexión a la red, contactos de relé etc. Antes de abrir el instrumento,
desconectar la tensión de red para todos los polos.
Tensiones ajenas
Al desconectar un instrumento, también hay que considerar las eventuales
tensiones ajenas.
Fusibles
En caso de instrumentos en los que está previsto el reemplazo de fusibles,
solamente se deben usar fusibles originales.
Conductoes protectores
La conexión debe dimensionarse suficientemente y realizarse de manera
competente.
Cambio de batería/acumulador
¡Seguir las notas de servicio antes de cambiar la batería o el acumulador!
Uso conforme a la finalidad prevista

del instrumento
− El instrumento sólo debe utilizarse para su finalidad prevista. Cualquier uso no

conforme a la finalidad está prohibido. Brüel & Kjær Vibro no puede hacerse
responsable para daños que resultan del uso no conforme a la finalidad. En tal
caso, el usuario tiene que asumir la responsabilidad exclusiva para el riesgo. El
uso conforme a la finalidad está definido en la documentación.
− El instrumento solamente debe exponerse a las admisibles influencias ambien-

tales. Estas están especificadas en los datos técnicos del instrumento.
− El equipo eléctrico debe someterse a un mantenimiento en intervalos regulares.

Los defectos, como p.ej. conectores sueltos o conectadores de enchufe defectos
etc. deben eliminarse inmediatamente.
- 13 -
del sensor
El sensor debe emplearse solamente para el uso especificado en la hoja de datos.
Cualquier otro uso no se considera conforme a la finalidad.
del cable
− El cable debe emplearse solamente para el uso especificado en la hoja de datos.

Cualquier otro uso no se considera conforme a la finalidad.
− No usar el cable para sacar la clavija de la caja de enchufe.
− Controlar el cable y las conexiones de enchufe regularmente. En caso de algún

daño, hay que reemplazarlos inmediatamente por un especialista.
de los productos de fabricación ajena
Los captadores y los accesorios no suministrados por Brüel & Kjær Vibro pertenecen
al área de responsabilidad del operador. El operador debe asegurar que las calidades
garantizadas corresponden a los requisitos en cuanto a la seguridad eléctrica y los
datos técnicos.
Brüel & Kjær Vibro no puede hacerse responsable para los productos de fabricación
ajena.
El operador es responsable de los defectos en los equipos de Brüel & Kjær Vibro que
se deben a productos de fabricación ajena.
El operador es responsable...
de la preparación
El operador asumirá la responsabilidad para la preparación del instrumento y para la
seguridad del ambiente operativo. El operador tiene que asegurar que se observan y
aplican las nacionales e internacionales instrucciones de seguridad y protección.
de la seguridad de funcionamiento
Antes de la puesta en servicio de una instalación, el operador tiene que comprobar la
seguridad de funcionamiento del instrumento o de la instalación.
El operador se hará responsable de que solamente se usen equipos periféricos que
garantizan el funcionamiento seguro de nuestra instalación.
Recomendación para el operador

En caso de que el uso del instrumento en combinación con máquinas o partes de una
instalación podría llevar a peligros que no pertenecen al área de responsabilidad de Brüel
& Kjær Vibro, es necesario que el operador elabore y publique instrucciones o
advertencias de seguridad; el personal afectado tiene que comprender y confirmar el
contenido de las mismas.
Nota:
Si el instrumento está incorporado en una máquina o está diseñado para el ensamblaje
con una máquina, la puesta en servicio queda prohibida hasta que el conjunto de la
máquina en la que se incorpora el instrumento o con la que se ensambla el instrumento
corresponda a las disposicioes de la directiva CE.
- 14 -
Prohibición de modificaciones arbitrarias

Ni el instrumento ni los accesorios deben modificarse respecto a la construcción o la
técnica de seguridad sin nuestro consentimiento expreso. Cualquier modificación excluye
una responsabilidad de nuestra parte para el daño causado por la modificación.
En particular, están prohibidos todos los trabajos de reparación, soldadura en placas de
circuito impreso y el reemplazo de componentes/módulos/placas de circuito impreso sin la
autorización expresa de Brüel & Kjær Vibro.
Si se usan piezas de repuesto, solamente se deben emplear las piezas originales de Brüel
& Kjær Vibro.
- 15 -
Istruzioni di sicurezza
I
Istruzioni di sicurezza nell'impiego della strumentazione
per la misurazione e il monitoraggio delle vibrazioni
Più esattamente si intendono strumenti di misura, diagnosi e monitoraggio, nel seguito
definiti "strumento".
Nell'impiegare i nostri strumenti, con i loro accessori, devono essere osservate le seguenti
istruzioni di sicurezza al fine di prevenire infortuni.
Per la propria sicurezza l'utente deve aver letto e compreso le istruzioni specifiche di
sicurezza, prima di impiegare lo strumento.
Conservare le istruzioni di sicurezza in un luogo accessibile a tutti coloro che lavorano con
lo strumento.
Pittogrammi e loro significato

I nostri strumenti corrispondono allo standard odierno della tecnica e alle regole
riconosciute di tecnica di sicurezza. Sono tuttavia presenti pericoli residui a cui viene fatto
riferimento nella documentazione sotto forma di pittogrammi. Vengono impiegati i seguenti
pittogrammi.
Avvertimento d ifonte di pericolo Avvertimento di tensione

elettrica pericolosa
Fusibili Messa a terra prescritta
Collegamento conduttore di protezione

prescritto
Qualifica della ditta utilizzatrice

Sugli strumenti vengono eseguite parametrizzazioni che se impostate erroenamente
possono avere gravi conseguenze quali ad es. lesioni a persone o danni del macchinario.
Tutti i lavori eseguiti in combinazione con i nostri strumenti possono essere eseguiti solo
da personale tecnico qualificato e autorizzato. In questa categoria ricadono le seguenti
operazioni:
Installazione e messa in servizio
Con installazione e messa in servizio si intendono principalmente lavori sull'equi-
paggiamento elettrico. Questi lavori devono essere eseguiti solo da elettricisti
specializzati o da personale addestrato sotto la direzione e supervisione di un elettri-
cista specializzato secondo le regole/norme elettrotecniche.
Modifica delle specifiche degli strumenti
Una modifica delle specifiche degli strumenti influisce sul processo di monitoraggio in
impianti stazionari e sulle procedure tecniche di misura con strumenti di misura
portatili.
Messaggi di errore
Questi vanno assolutamente rispettati e ne va identificata ed eliminata la causa
- 16 -
Manutenzione e riparazione
Qui devono essere osservate le istruzioni di sicurezza specifiche contenute nel
manuale di manutenzione e riparazione.
Avvertimento da fonti di pericolo
Nell'impiegare i nostri strumenti, inclusi gli accessori, le parti conduttrici di

corrente rappresentano una fonte potenziale di pericolo. Si tratta qui di:
Tensioni in generale
Tensioni superiori a 50 V vengono essenzialmente classificate come
pericolose.
Alimentazione tensione di rete
I settori in pericolo sono specialmente le parti nello strumento conduttrici di
corrente. Queste possono essere: diversi punti di brasatura, conduttori
stampati, morsetti per il collegamento di rete, contatti relè ecc.
Prima di aprire lo strumento deve essere disattivata la tensione di rete
onnipolarmente.
Tensioni esterne
Al momento di cessionare uno strumento devono essere considerate
anche eventuali tensioni esterne presenti.
Fusibili
Nel caso di strumenti per i quali è prevista la sostituzione dei fusibili, sono
consentiti solo fusibili originali.
Conduttori di protezione
Il collegamento deve essere sufficientemente dimensionato e realizzato in
modo competente.
Cambio di batteria/accumulatore
Prima di eseguire la sostituzione della batteria o dell'accumulatore
osservare le istruzioni operative!
Impiego conforme alle norme

dello strumento
− Lo strumento deve essere impiegato esclusivamente solo conformemente alle

norme. E' vietato ogni altro impiego. Brüel & Kjær Vibro declina ogni
responsabilità per danni derivanti da un uso non a norma. Solo la ditta utilizzatrice
si fa carico dei rischi. L'impiego a norma è desumibile dalla documentazione.
− Esporre lo strumento solo a influenze ambientali ammissibili. Queste si desumono

dai dati tecnici degli strumenti.
− La manutenzione dell'equipaggiamento elettrico deve essere eseguita a intervalli

regolari. Vizi, come collegamenti laschi, connettori difettosi ecc. devono essere
eliminati subito.
del sensore
Il sensore deve essere impiegato solo per l'impiego specificato nel foglio dati. Ogni
altro impiego non viene considerato a norma.
- 17 -
del cavo
− Il cavo deve essere impiegato solo per l'impiego specificato nel foglio dati. Ogni
altro impiego non viene considerato a norma.
− Non tirare il cavo per togliere la spina dalla presa.
− Controllare a intervalli regolari i cavi e i connettori. Nel caso di danni, farli

sostituire subito da uno specialista.
di prodotti di altre marche
Trasduttori e accessori che non vengono forniti da Brüel & Kjær Vibro rientrano nella
sfera di responsabilità della ditta utilizzatrice. La ditta utilizzatrice deve provvedere a
fare sì che i requisiti di sicurezza elettrica e dati tecnici corrispondano alle caratte-
ristiche specificate.
Brüel & Kjær Vibro declina ogni responsabilità per prodotti di altre marche.
Per difetti di prodotti Brüel & Kjær Vibro derivanti da prodotti di altre marche, risponde
la ditta utilizzatrice.
La ditta utilizzatrice risponde ...

dell'allestimento
La ditta utilizzatrice risponde dell'allestimento dello strumento e della sicurezza
dell'ambiente di esercizio. La ditta utilizzatrice deve provvedere a far sì che vengano
rispettate e applicate le norme nazionali e internazionali di protezione e di sicurezza.
della sicurezza di funzionamento
Prima della messa in servizio di un impianto la ditta utilizzatrice deve verificare la
sicurezza di funzionamento dello strumento o dell'impianto.
La ditta utilizzatrice è responsabile che vengano impiegati solo dispositivi periferici che
garantiscono l'esercizio sicuro del nostro impianto.
Raccomandazione alla ditta utilizzatrice

Se in seguito all'impiego dello strumento in combinazione con macchine o componenti di
impianti dovessero insorgere pericoli che non rientrano nella sfera di responsabilità di
Brüel & Kjær Vibro, la ditta utilizzatrice deve emettere e divulgare istruzioni o avvertimenti
di tecnica di sicurezza che devono essere comprese e confermate dal personale
operatore.
Avvertenza:
Se lo strumento viene incorporato in una macchina oppure è destinato per l'assemblaggio
di una macchina, la messa in servizio è vietata finché la macchina in cui viene incorporato
lo strument corrisponde alle disposizioni delle direttive CEE.
Divieto di apportare modifiche in modo arbitrario

Lo strumento e gli accessori non devono subire modifiche costruttive né di tecnica di
sicurezza. Ogni modifica esclude una nostra responsabilità per danni da essa derivanti.
In particolar modo sono vietati tutti i lavori di riparazione, brasatura di schede e la
sostituzione di componenti/moduli/circuiti stampati senza l'espressa approvazione di
Brüel & Kjær Vibro.
Nel caso di impiego di parti di ricambio devono essere impiegati solo componenti originali
- 18 -
Instruções de segurança
P
Instruções de segurança relativas à utilização de
aparelhos de medição e monitorização de vibrações
Trata-se de aparelhos de medição, de diagnóstico e de monitorização, seguidamente
denominados "Aparelhos". Ao utilizar os nossos aparelhos, incluindo os acessórios, há
que respeitar as instruções de segurança seguidamente referidas a fim de evitar qualquer
perigo de ferimento.
Em prol da sua própria segurança, deve ter lido e entendido as instruções de segurança
aplicáveis antes de trabalhar com o aparelho.
Guarde as instruções de segurança de maneira a que fiquem à disposição de todas as
pessoas que trabalhem com o aparelho.
Pictogramas e o seu significado

Os nossos aparelhos correspondem ao mais recente nível de conhecimentos técnicos e
respeitam as regras de segurança técnica actualmente em vigor. Todavia, prevalecem
ainda perigos referidos na documentação em forma de pictogramas. Aplicam-se os
seguintes pictogramas:
Aviso de fonte de perigo Aviso de tensões eléctricas

perigosas
Fusível Ligação à terra obrigatória
Condutor de protecção à massa

obrigatório
Qualificação do operador
São efectuadas regulações nos aparelhos que, quando efectuados de forma incorrecta,
podem ter graves consequências, como, p.ex., danos na máquina, ferimentos.
Qualquer trabalho que envolva os nossos aparelhos só pode ser realizado por pessoal
profissional, devidamente instruído e autorizado. Trata-se, entre outros, dos seguintes
trabalhos:
Instalação e colocação em funcionamento
A instalação e colocação em funcionamento envolve, basicamente, trabalhos no
sistema eléctrico. Estes trabalhos só podem ser realizados por electrotécnicos
especializados ou pessoas devidamente instruídas sob a responsabilidade e
supervisão de um electrotécnico em conformidade com as regras/prescrições
aplicáveis da electrotecnia.
Modificações na especificação do aparelho
Uma modificação da especificação do aparelho tem repercussões sobre o processo
de monitorização de instalações estacionárias e sobre o decurso técnico da medição
no caso de aparelhos de medição portáteis.
Mensagens de erro
Estas mensagens têm de ser obrigatoriamente respeitadas, e a sua origem detectada
e eliminada.
- 19 -
Manutenção e reparação
Aqui, há que respeitar as instruções de segurança aplicáveis que se encontram
referidas nas instruções de manutenção e reparação.
Aviso de fontes de perigo
Ao utilizar os nossos aparelhos, incluindo os acessórios, as peças condu-

toras de tensão representam uma potencial fonte de perigo. Trata-se do
seguinte:
Tensões em geral
As tensões superiores a 50 V são sempre classificadas como sendo
perigosas.
A adução de tensão de rede
As áreas particularmente perigosas são as peças condutoras de tensão
nos aparelhos. Podem ser as seguintes: diversos pontos de soldagem,
filas de condutores, os bornes para a ligação à rede, contactos de relé, etc.
Antes de abrir o aparelho, desligar a tensão de rede para todos os pólos.
Tensões externas
Ao libertar um aparelho também se deve tomar em consideração as
tensões externas eventualmente existentes.
Fusíveis
No caso de aparelhos para os quais se prevê a substituição de fusíveis, só
são permitidos fusíveis originais.
Condutores de protecção à massa
A ligação deve ter dimensões suficientes e tem de ser estabelecida
correctamente.
Substituir o acumulador/pilha
Antes de substituir o acumulador ou a pilha, há que observar as
instruções de serviço!
Utilização prevista
do aparelho
− O aparelho deve ser usado exclusivamente para a utilização prevista. Qualquer

utilização divergente do previsto é proibida. A Brüel & Kjær Vibro não assumirá
qualquer responsabilidade por danos resultantes da utilização não conforme ao
previsto. O risco fica totalmente a cargo do utilizador. A utilização prevista é
descrita na documentação.
− O aparelho só deve ser exposto às influências ambientais admissíveis que se

encontram referidas nos dados técnicos do aparellho.
− O sistema eléctrico deve ser submetida a uma manutenção periódica. Defeitos,

tais como uniões soltas, conectores de ficha defeituosos, etc., devem ser
eliminados de imediato.
do sensor
O sensor só pode ser usado para os fins especificados na ficha técnica. Qualquer
utilização divergente do aí descrito é considerada não conforme à utilização prevista.
do cabo
− O cabo só pode ser usado para os fins especificados na ficha técnica. Qualquer
utilização divergente do aí descrito é considerada não conforme à utilização
prevista.
- 20 -
− Não use o cabo para tirar a ficha da tomada.
− Controle periodicamente os cabos e os conectores de ficha. Se detectar qualquer

danificação, mande-os substituir de imediato por um profissional especializado.
para produtos de outros fabricantes
Registadores e acessórios não fornecidos pela Brüel & Kjær Vibro são da responsa-
bilidade do operador. O operador tem de assegurar que as exigências relativas à
segurança eléctrica e aos dados técnicos correspondam às características
garantidas.
A Brüel & Kjær Vibro não assume qualquer responsabilidade por produtos de outros
fabricantes.
O operador é responsável por danos originados por produtos de outros fabricantes
nos produtos da Brüel & Kjær Vibro.
O operador é responsável ...
pela preparação
O operador é responsável pela preparação do aparelho e pela segurança do
ambiente de funcionamento. Ele tem de assegurar o cumprimento e a aplicação das
directivas nacionais e internacionais em matéria de segurança/protecção.
pela segurança de funcionamento
Antes de colocar a instalação em funcionamento, o operador tem de verificar a
segurança de funcionamento do aparelho ou da instalação.
O operador é responsável pela utilização exclusiva de aparelhos periféricos que
garantam o funcionamento seguro da nossa instalação.
Recomendações para o operador
Caso possam surgir situações de perigo, em função da utilização do aparelho juntamente
com máquinas ou partes da instalação, que não sejam da responsabilidade da Brüel &
Kjær Vibro, o operador tem de emitir e divulgar instruções de segurança ou avisos
relativos à segurança e assegurar-se de que o pessoal envolvido as compreenda e
confirme.
Nota:
Se o aparelho for instalado numa máquina ou se destinar à instalação dentro de uma
máquina, a sua colocação em funcionamento fica interdita até que a máquina na qual o
aparelho será instalado esteja em conformidade com as directivas da UE.
Proibição de alterações arbitrárias
O aparelho e os seus acessórios não podem ser alterados relativamente à sua
construção, nem a aspectos de segurança técnica, sem prévio consentimento nosso por
escrito. Qualquer alteração exclui a responsabilidade da nossa parte por eventuais danos
daí resultantes.
Mais especificamente, ficam proibidas quaisquer reparações, trabalhos de soldagem em
platinas e a substituição de componentes/módulos/placas de circuito impresso sem prévio
consentimento expresso por parte da Brüel & Kjær Vibro.
Ao empregar peças sobressalentes, só se devem usar peças de origem da Brüel & Kjær
Vibro.
- 21 -
Veiligheidswenken
NL
Veiligheidswenken voor het bedienen van meet- en
controleapparatuur inzake trillingen
In concreto betreft het meet-, diagnose- en controleapparatuur, hierna ö "apparaatö"
genoemd.
Bij het bedienen van onze apparaten, waaronder ook de accessoires worden begrepen,
dienen ter voorkoming van verwondingen de hiernavolgende veiligheidswenken te worden
nageleefd.
Met het oog op uw eigen veiligheid dient u de betreffende veiligheidswenken te hebben
gelezen en begrepen vooraleer u het apparaat gaat bedienen.
Gelieve u de veiligheidswenken zo op te bergen, dat al diegenen die het apparaat
bedienen, ze kunnen raadplegen.
Betekenis van de pictogrammen

Onze apparaten zijn conform de stand van de techniek en voldoen aan de officile
veiligheidstechnische voorschriften. Desalniettemin kunnen zich gevaren voordoen, waar
in de documentatie in de vorm van pictogrammen op wordt gewezen. Het betreft de
volgende pictogrammen:
Pas op gevaar Pas op, gevaarlijke

electrische spanning
Zekering Aarding verplicht
Kabelmantelaansluiting verplicht
Kwalificatie van de exploitant

Niet juist afgestelde apparaten kunnen verstrekkende gevolgen hebben zoals bijvoorbeeld
beschadigde machines of gewonde personen.
Slechts deskundig, vakkundig en bevoegd personeel mag onze apparaten bedienen.
Het betreft onder meer de volgende werkzaamheden:
Installatie en ingebruikname
Bij de installatie en ingebruikname dienen hoofdzakelijk werkzaamheden aan de
electrische uitrusting te worden uitgevoerd. Deze werkzaamheden mogen slechts door
een electrotechnisch deskundige of door goed genstrueerde personen onder leiding
en toezicht van een electrotechnisch deskundige conform de electrotechnische
regels/voorschriften worden uitgevoerd.
Wijziging van de apparatuurspecificatie
Een wijziging van de apparatuurspecificatie heeft gevolgen voor het controleproces bij
vaste installaties en op het meettechnische werk bij draagbare meetapparatuur.
Storingen
Daar moet de vereiste aandacht aan worden geschonken, de oorzaak dient te worden
vastgesteld en het euvel dient te worden verholpen.
- 22 -
Veiligheidswenken
Onderhoud en reparatie
De betrokken veiligheidswenken in de onderhouds- en reparatiehandleidingen dienen
te worden gerespecteerd.
Pas op gevaar
Tijdens de bediening van onze apparaten, waaronder de accessoires ook

worden begrepen, vormen de spanningsdragende onderdelen een
potentieel gevaar. Het gaat daarbij om:
Spanning algemeen
Spanning boven de 50 V geldt in beginsel als gevaarlijk.
De stroomtoevoer
Gevaarlijke delen zijn in het bijzonder de spanningsdragende onderdelen
van de apparaten. Het kan daarbij gaan om: een aantal soldeerpunten,
leidingskokers, klemmen voor de lichtnetaansluiting, relaiskontakten enz... .
Voor het openen van het apparaat alle polen loskoppelen.
Externe spanning
Bij loskoppelen van een apparaat dient ook rekening te worden gehouden
met eventuele externe spanningsbronnen.
Zekeringen
Indien bij apparaten zekeringen dienen te worden vervangen, dan mogen
slechts originele zekeringen worden gebruikt.
Kabelmantel
De aansluiting moet passend en vakkundig worden uitgevoerd.
Vervanging van accu of batterij
Bedieningswenken voor het vervangen van de accu of batterij dienen te
worden nageleefd!
Bestemmingsconform gebruik
van het apparaat
− Het apparaat mag alleen bestemmingsconform gebruikt worden. Iedere

verdergaande vorm van gebruik is niet toegestaan. Voor schade ontstaan door
niet-bestemmingsconform gebruik is Brüel & Kjær Vibro niet aansprakelijk. Alleen
de exploitant is aansprakelijk. Het bestemmingsconforme gebruik wordt in de
documentatie beschreven.
− Het apparaat mag alleen aan toelaatbare ambiante inwerking blootgesteld

worden. Zulks wordt in de technische specificatie van het apparaat beschreven.
− De electrische uitrusting dient regelmatig te worden onderhouden. Defecten zoals

losse contacten, defecte connectoren enzovoorts dienen onverwijld te worden
verholpen.
van de sensor
De sensor mag alleen gebruikt worden zoals in de gegevensfiche is beschreven.
Iedere verdergaande toepassing wordt als niet- bestemmingsconform beschouwd.
- 23 -
Veiligheidswenken
de kabels
− De kabel mag alleen gebruikt worden zoals in de gegevensfiche is beschreven.

Iedere verdergaande toepassing wordt als niet-bestemmingsconform beschouwd.
− Niet aan de kabel trekken om de stekker uit het stopcontact te trekken.
− De kabels en de langsverbindingen dienen regelmatig te worden gecontroleerd.

Een beschadiging dient direct door een vakman te worden hersteld.
Gebruik van niet-originele produkten
Voor registratieapparatuur en accessoires, die niet door Brüel & Kjær Vibro werden
geleverd, is de exploitant aansprakelijk. De exploitant dient ervoor in te staan, dat aan
de eisen inzake electrische veiligheid en technische specificaties wordt voldaan. Voor
niet-originele produkten is Brüel & Kjær Vibro niet aansprakelijk.
Voor defecten aan Brüel & Kjær Vibro-produkten, die door niet-originele produkten
worden veroorzaakt, is de exploitant aansprakelijk.
De exploitant is verantwoordelijk...
voor de installatie
Voor de installatie van het apparaat en de veiligheid van de werkomgeving is de
exploitant verantwoordelijk. Hij dient ervoor in te staan, dat de nationale en
internationale veiligheids- en beschermingsvoorschriften in acht worden genomen en
worden toegepast.
voor de operationele veiligheid
Voor de ingebruikname van een installatie dient de exploitant de operationele
veiligheid van het apparaat, respectievelijk de installatie te controleren. De exploitant
dient ervoor in te staan, dat gebruikte perifere apparatuur een veilige bediening van
onze installatie waarborgt.
Aanbeveling voor de exploitant

Indien door het gebruik van het apparaat in combinatie met machines of installatieond-
erdelen zich gevaarlijke situaties zouden kunnen voordoen, waarvoor Brüel & Kjær Vibro
niet aansprakelijk is, dan moet de exploitant veiligheidstechnische wenken opstellen, die
aan het personeel overhandigd moeten worden en door het personeel begrepen en
bevestigd worden.
Wenk:
Als het apparaat in een machine dient te worden ingebouwd of op een andere machine
gemonteerd dient te worden, dan is de ingebruikname niet toegestaan totdat de machine,
waarin het apparaat ingebouwd is, voldoet aan de in de EU-richtlijnen opgenomen
bepalingen.
Eigenmachtige veranderingen mogen niet worden aangebracht

Het apparaat en de accessoires mogen zonder onze uitdrukkelijke toestemming
konstruktief noch veiligheidstechnisch veranderd worden. Voor wijzigingen, die schade
veroorzaken, zijn wij niet aansprakelijk. Meer in het bijzonder mogen geen
reparatiewerkzaamheden, soldeerwerkzaamheden aan printplaten worden uitgevoerd en
constructieonderdelen/modules/printplaten worden vervangen zonder de uitdrukkelijke
toestemming van Brüel & Kjær Vibro.
Als vervangingsonderdelen mogen alleen originele Brüel & Kjær Vibro - onderdelen
worden gebruikt.
- 24 -
Säkerhetsanvisningar
S
Säkerhetsanvisningar för arbeten med svängningsmät-
och svängningsövervakningsapparater
Konkret handlar det om mät-, diagnos- och övervakningsapparater, som i följande text
betecknas som "apparat".
För att undvika skador skall nedanstående säkerhetsanvisningar iakttas vid arbeten med
våra apparater inklusive tillbehör.
För Er personliga säkerhet skall dessa säkerhetsanvisningar läsas och förstås innan Ni
börjar arbeta med apparaten.
Förvara säkerhetsanvisningarna så att alla personer som arbetar med apparaten har
möjlighet att läsa dem.
Piktogram och deras betydelse

Våra apparater motsvarar teknikens senaste rön och godkända säkerhetstekniska regler.
Trots detta kan risker föreligga. I dokumentationen hänvisas till dessa i form av piktogram.
Följande piktogram används:
Varning farokälla Varning farlig, elektrisk

spänning
Säkring Föreskriven jordning
Föreskriven skyddsledaranslutning
Användarens kvalifikation
På apparaterna företas inställningar. Felaktiga inställningar kan medföra betydande
konsekvenser som t.ex. maskinskador, personskador.
Samtliga arbeten som utförs i samband med våra apparater får endast genomföras av
fackmässigt utbildad, sakkunnig och auktoriserad personal. Härvid avses bl.a. följande
arbeten:
Installation och idrifttagande
Installation och idrifttagande beträffar till övervägande del arbeten på den elektriska
utrustningen. Dylika arbeten får endast genomföras av fackpersonal för el-arbeten
eller av undervisade personer under ledning och tillsyn av fackpersonal för el-arbeten
enligt elektrotekniska regler / föreskrifter.
Ändring av apparaternas specifikation
En ändring av apparaternas specifikation påverkar övervakningsprocessen vid
stationära anläggningar och det mättekniska förloppet vid bärbara mätapparater.
Felmeddelanden
Felmeddelanden skall under alla omständigheter beaktas. Orsaken till dessa måste
utrönas och undanröjas.
- 25 -
Underhåll och reparation

Härvid skall respektive säkerhetsanvisningar i underhålls- och reparationsanvisningen
iakttas.
Varning - farokällor
De spänningsförande delarna utgör en potentiell farokälla vid arbeten med

våra apparater inklusive tillbehör. Här rör det sig om:
Spänningar allmänt
Spänningar över 50 V klassas principiellt som farliga.
Nätspänningsmatning
Känsliga områden är i synnerhet spänningsförande delar i apparaterna. Det
kan vara: olika lödpunkter, ledarbanor, klämmorna för nätanslutningen,
reläkontakter etc.
Frånkoppla apparatens nätspänning fullständigt innan Ni öppnar den.
Främmande spänningar
Vid frikoppling av apparaten måste även hänsyn tas till eventuellt
existerande främmande spänningar.
Säkringar
Vid apparater med avsett säkringsbyte är endast originalsäkringar tillåtna.
Skyddsledare
Anslutningen skall vara tillräckligt dimensionerad och bör genomföras av
fackpersonal.
Ackumulator- / batteribyte
Iaktta betjäningsanvisningarna innan Ni byter ut ackumulatorn eller
batteriet!
Ändamålsenlig användning
av apparaten
− Apparaten bör uteslutande användas i ändamålsenligt syfte. Varje användning

därutöver är förbjuden. Brüel & Kjær Vibro ansvarar ej för skador som uppstår
pga ej ändamålsenlig användning. Användaren ensam får ta konsekvenserna.
Vad som avses med ändamålsenlig användning framgår av dokumentationen.
− Apparaten får endast utsättas för tillåten inverkan från omgivningen. Vad härmed
avses framgår av apparatens tekniska data.
− Underhåll av den elektriska utrustningen skall regelbundet genomföras.

Bristfälligheter som lösa förbindelser, defekta stickkontakter etc. skall utan
dröjsmål åtgärdas.
av sensorn
Sensorn får endast användas för ändamål som specificeras i databladet. Varje
användning utöver det anses som ej ändamålsenlig.
- 26 -
av kabeln
− Kabeln får endast användas för ändamål som specificeras i databladet. Varje
användning utöver det anses som ej ändamålsenlig.
− Dra ej i kabeln för att dra ut stickkontakten ur stickdosan.
− Kabeln och stickkontakterna skall regelbundet kontrolleras. När dessa är

skadade, låt dem omedelbart bytas ut av fackmässigt utbildad personal.
användning av främmande fabrikat
Gripararmen och tillbehör som ej levereras av Brüel & Kjær Vibro är underkastade
användarens ansvarsområde. Det åvilar användaren att se till att kraven beträffande
den elektriska säkerheten och tekniska data överensstämmer med de utlovade
egenskaperna.
Brüel & Kjær Vibro ansvarar ej för främmande fabrikat.
Användaren ansvarar för defekter på Brüel & Kjær Vibro-produkter som uppstår
genom användning av främmande fabrikat.
Användaren är ansvarig...
för installationen
Användaren är ansvarig för apparatens installation och driftsomgivningens säkerhet.
Det åligger användaren att nationella och internationella säkerhets- / skyddsföres-
krifter iakttas och används.
för funktionssäkerheten
Innan anläggningen tas i drift måste användaren kontrollera apparatens respektive
anläggningens funktionssäkerhet.
Användaren är ansvarig för att endast periferi-apparater kommer till användning som
garanterar en säker drift av vår anläggning.
Rekommendationer för användaren

Om faror uppstår vid insatsen av apparaten i förbindelse med maskiner eller
anläggningsdelar som inte ligger inom Brüel & Kjær Vibro's ansvarsområde, så måste
användaren utfärda anvisningar eller varningar härom och distribuera dessa till berörd
personal som i sin tur skall bekräfta att de har läst och förstått dem.
Hänvisning:
När apparaten byggs in i en maskin eller monteras ihop med en maskin, så får den ej
tagas i drift förrän maskinen, i vilken apparaten har inbyggts, motsvarar EU-riktlinjerna.
Förbud om egenmäktiga förändringar

Apparaten inklusive tillbehör får varken konstruktivt eller säkerhetstekniskt förändras utan
vårt uttryckliga medgivande. Varje ändring medför att vi ej ansvarar för skador som
uppstått av denna anledning.
I synnerhet reparationer, lödningsarbeten på plåtämnen och utbyte av byggdelar / moduler
/ ledarplattor är utan Brüel & Kjær Vibro's uttryckliga medgivande förbjudna.
Vid insatsen av reservdelar skall endast Brüel & Kjær Vibro originalreservdelar användas.
- 27 -
Sikkerhedshenvisninger
DK
Sikkerhedshenvisninger til brugen af svingningsmåle- og
svingningskontrolapparater
Nærmere betegnet drejer det sig herved om måle-, diagnose- og kontrolapparater, som i
det fφlgende kaldes "apparat". Ved brugen af vore apparater inklusive tilbehφr skal man
bmærke de fφlgende sikkerhedshenvisninger til beskyttelse mod faren for at komme til
skade.
For Deres egen sikkerheds skyld skal De have læst og forstået de gældende
sikkerhedshenvisninger, inden De arbejder med apparatet.
Opbevar sikkerhedshenvisningerne sådan, at alle, som arbejder med apparatet, har disse
stående til rådighed og kan læse dem.
Symboler og deres betydning

Vore apparater svarer til teknikkens stand og opfylder de anerkendte, sikkerhedstekniske
regler. Alligevel findes stadig farer, som der i dokumentationen gφres opmærksom på i
form af symboler. Herved anvendes fφlgende symboler:
Advarsel mod en farekilde Advarsel mod farlig, elektrisk

spænding
Sikring Foreskrevet jordforbindelse
Foreskrevet beskyttelsesledertilslutning
Brugerens kvalifikation
På apparaterne foretages indstillinger, som kan have vidtrkkende flger, f.eks.
maskinskader og personkvæstelser, hvis de udfφres forkert. Det er kun tilladt fagkyndigt,
sagkyndigt og autoriseret personale at udfre arbejder af nogen art i forbindelse med
vore apparater. Hertil hφrer blandt andet fφlgende arbejder:
Installation og igangsætning
Ved installationen og igangsætningen drejer det sig overvejende om arbejde på det
elektriske udstyr. Disse arbejder må kun udfφres af en elektriker eller af instruerede
personer under en elektrikers ledelse og tilsyn, og i overensstemmelse med de
elektrotekniske regler/forskrifter.
Ændringer af appatspecifikationen
En ændring af apparatspecifikationen påvirker overvågningsprocessen ved stationære
anlæg samt det måletekniske forlφb ved mobile måleapparater.
Fejlmeldinger
Disse skal ubetinget bemærkes, og årsagen skal fastslås og afhjælpes.
- 28 -
Vedligeholdelse og reparation
Herved skal man overholde de gældende sikkerhedshenvisninger i vedligeholdelses-
og reparationsvejledningen.
Advarsel mod farekilder
Ved brugen af vore apparater inklusive tilbehφret udgr de spændings-

fφrende dele en potentiel farekilde. Dette gælder
Spændinger generelt
Spændinger over 50 V gælder generelt som farlige.
Netspændingstilfφrslen
Specielt er farlige områder de spændingsfφrende dele i apparaterne. Dette
kan være: forskellige loddepunkter, ledende baner, klemmerne til
nettilslutning, relækontakter osv.
Inden apparatet åbnes, skal alle netspændingens poler kobles fra.
Eksterne spændinger
Ved frikobling af et apparat skal man også tænke på eventuelt
forhåndenværende eksterne spændinger.
Sikringer
Ved apparater, som er konstrueret til udskiftning af sikringerne, er det kun
tilladt at benytte originale sikringer.
Beskyttelsesleder
Tilslutningen skal dimensioneres tilstrækkelig og udfφres faglig korrekt.
Udskiftning af akkumulator/batteri
Inden akkumulatoren eller batteriet udskiftes, skal man bemærke
betjeningshenvisningerne !
Brug i overensstemmelse med formlet

... mht. apparatet
− Apparatet må udelukkende anvendes til det formål, det er beregnet til. Enhver
anden brug er forbudt. For skader, som skyldes en brug, som ikke svarer til
formålet, fralægger Brüel & Kjær Vibro sig ethvert ansvar. Risikoen bæres alene
af brugeren. Brugen i overensstemmelse med formålet kan ses i dokumen-
tationen.
− Apparatet må kun udsættes for de tilladte omgivelsespåvirkninger. Disse kan ses

i apparatets tekniske data.
− El-udstyret skal vedligeholdes regelmæssigt. Mangler, f.eks. lφse forbindelser og

defekte stikforbindelser, skal omgående udbedres.
... mht. sensoren
− Sensoren må kun anvendes til den brug, som er specificeret på datasiden.

Enhver anden brug regnes for ikke at være i overensstemmelse med formålet.
- 29 -
... mht. kablet
− Kablet må kun anvendes til den brug, som er specificeret på datasiden. Enhver
anden brug regnes for ikke at være i overensstemmelse med formålet.
− Træk ikke i kablet for at trække stikket ud af stikkontakten.
− Kontroller regelmæssigt kabler og stikforbindelser. I tilfælde af beskadigelse skal

De straks lade de beskadigede dele udskifte af en fagmand.
... mht. brug af fremmede fabrikater
Brugen af fφlere og tilbehφr, som ikke leveres af Brüel & Kjær Vibro, foretages på
brugerens eget ansvar. Brugeren skal sφrge for, at kravene med hensyn til den
elektriske sikkerhed og de tekniske data opfylder de tilsagte egenskaber. Brüel & Kjær
Vibro fralægger sig ethvert ansvar for fremmede fabrikater. Brugeren bærer selv
ansvaret for defekter på Brüel & Kjær Vibro - produkter, som skyldes fremmede
fabrikater.
Brugeren er ansvarlig for ...

... justeringen
Brugeren er ansvarlig for justeringen af apparatet og for driftsomgivelsernes
sikkerhed. Han skal drage omsorg for, at de nationale og internationale sikkerheds-
/beskyttelsesbestemmelser overholdes og anvendes.
... funktionssikkerheden
Inden anlægget tages i brug, skal brugeren kontrollere apparatets hhv. anlæggets
funktionssikkerhed. Brugeren er ansvarlig for, at der kun anvendes perifre apparater,
som garanterer en sikker drift af vores anlæg.
Anbefaling til brugeren

Hvis der kan opstå fare ved brugen af apparatet i forbindelse med maskiner eller
anlægsdele, som ikke hφrer ind under Brüel & Kjær Vibro. Æs ansvarsområde, skal der fra
brugerens side laves anvisninger eller advarsler, som skal bekendtgφres og være forstået
og bekræftet af det pågldende personale.
Henvisning:
Hvis apparatet er indbygget i en maskine eller er bestemt til sammenbygning med en
maskine, er igangsætningen forbudt, indtil det er fastslået, at den maskine, i hvilken
apparatet indbygges, opfylde bestemmelserne fra EU-direktiverne.
Forbud mod egenmægtige ændringer

Apparatet og tilbehφret må ikke ændres - hverken konstruktionsmæssigt eller sikkerheds-
teknisk - uden vores udtrykkelige samtykke. Ved ændringer af enhver art bortfalder vores
ansvar for skader, som opstår derved.
Især er alle reparationer, loddearbejder på platiner og udskiftninger af komponenter
/moduler/printkort forbudt uden udtrykkeligt samtykke fra Brüel & Kjær Vibro.
Ved indsætningen af reservedele m der kun anvendes originale dele fra Brüel & Kjær
Vibro.
- 30 -
Värähtelynmittaus
SF
Värähtelynmittaus- ja värähtelynvalvontalaitteiden
käyttöön liittyviä turvallisuusohjeita
Yksityiskohdittain on seuraavassa kyse mittaus-, diagnoosi- ja valvontalaitteista. Niihin
viitataan tekstissä nimityksellä "laite".
Seuraavat turvallisuusohjeet on huomioitava käytettäessä laitteitamme sekä lisävarusteita,
jotta voitaisiin suojautua loukkaantumisvaaroilta.
Omaa turvallisuuttanne ajatellen on Teidän luettava ja ymmärrettävä asiaankuuluvat
turvallisuusohjeet, ennen kuin alatte tyskennellä laitteen kanssa.
Säilyttäkää turvallisuusohjeet siten, että ne ovat kaikkien niiden henkilöiden nähtävillä ja
käytettävissä, jotka työskentelevät kyseisten laitteiden kanssa.
Piktogrammit ja niiden merkitykset

Meidän laitteemme edustavat viimeisintä tekniikkaa ja yleisesti hyväksyttyjä
turvallisuusteknisiä sääntöjä. Siitä huolimatta on olemassa vaaroja, joihin viitataan
dokumentaatiossa piktogrammien muodossa. Käytössä ovat seuraavat piktogrammit:
Varoitus vaaranlähteestä Varoitus vaarallisesta

sähköisestä jännitteestä
Sulake Säädetty maadoitus
Säädetty suojamaadoituspääte
Yrityksen pätevyysvaatimukset
Laitteisiin suoritetaan säätöjä, joilla voi väärin säädettäessä olla kauas ulottuvia
seurauksia, esimerkiksi konevauriota, henkilövahinkoja. Kaikkia laitteisiimme liittyviä töitä
saa suorittaa vain ammattitaitoinen, asiantunteva ja valtuutettu henkilkunta. Tässä on
kyse muun muassa seuraavista töistä:
Asennus ja käyttöönotto
Asennuksessa ja käyttöönotossa on kyse enimmäkseen sähkövarusteisiin liittyvistä
töistä. Näitä töitä saavat suorittaa sähköteknisten sääntöjen/ ohjeiden ja määräysten
mukaisesti vain sähköalan ammattitaitoinen työvoima tai tehtävään opastetut henkilöt
sähköalan ammattimiesten ohjauksen ja valvonnan alaisina.
Laitteen ohjearvojen muuttaminen
Laitteen ohjearvojen muuttaminen vaikuttaa pysyvien laitteistojen valvontaprosessiin
ja kannettavien mittauslaitteiden mittaustekniseen kulkuun.
Virheilmoitukset
Nämä on ehdottomasti huomioitava ja niiden syy on otettava selville ja poistettava.
- 31 -
Värähtelynmittaus
Huolto ja korjaus
Tässä on huomioitava asiaankuuluvat turvallisuusohjeet, jotka löytyvät huolto- ja
korjausohjeistoista.
Varoitus vaaranlähteistä
Jännitteiset osat muodostavat mahdollisen vaaranlähteen laitteidemme

sekä myös lisävarusteidemme käytön yhteydess. Tässä on kyse
seuraavasta:
Jännitteet yleenäs
Yli 50 voltin jännitteet on periaatteessa luokiteltu vaarallisiksi.
Verkkojännitteen syöttö
Vaarallisia alueita ovat erityisesti laitteissa olevat jännitettä johtavat osat.
Niitä voivat olla erilaiset juotospäätteet, virtaa johtavat reitit, verkkoliittymän
liitäntänavat, relekoskettimet, jne. Ennen laitteen avaamista on
verkkojännite kytkettävä pois päältä kaikista navoista.
Vieraat jännitteet
Kytkettäessä laite vapaaksi on otettava huomioon myös mahdollisesti
olemassa olevat vieraat jännitteet.
Sulakkeet
Laitteissa, joihin on vaihdettava sulake, on sallittua käyttää vain
alkuperäisiä, määrätyn sähkövirran voimakkuuden omaavia sulakkeita.
Suojamaadoitus
Liitäntä on mitoitettava riittävästi ja ammattimiehen on suoritettava se.
Akun vaihto
Ennen akun vaihtoa huomioitava käyttöohjeet !
Asianmukainen käyttö
... Laitteen asianmukainen käyttö
− Laitetta on käytettävä ainoastaan sen asianmukaisessa käyttötarkoituksessa.

Jokainen sen ulkopuolelle jäävä käyttö on kielletty. Brüel & Kjær Vibro ei vastaa
vahingoista, jotka johtuvat epäasianmukaisesta käytöstä. Vastuu on yksinomaan
käyttäjällä. Asianmukaisesta käytöstä löydätte tietoja dokumentaatiosta.
− Käyttäkää laitetta vain sille sallitussa ympäristssä. Tietoja tästä löydätte teknisistä
laitetiedoista.
− Sähköiset varusteet on huollettava säännöllisesti. Viat, kuten irrallaan olevat

liitännät, vialliset pistokkeet, jne. on poistettava ensi tilassa.
... Anturin asianmukainen käyttö
Anturia saa käyttää vain ohjeissa määriteltyyn käyttötarkoitukseen. Kaikki sen
ulkopuolelle jäävät käyttötarkoitukset eivät ole anturin asianmukaista käyttöä.
- 32 -
Värähtelynmittaus
... Johdon asianmukainen käyttö
− Johtoa saa köyttää vain ohjeissa määriteltyyn käyttötarkoitukseen. Kaikki sen

ulkopuolelle jäävät käyttötarkoitukset eivät ole asianmukaista käyttöä.
− Älkää ottako pistoketta pois pistorasiasta johdosta vetämällä.
− Tarkistakaa johto ja pistokekytkennät säännöllisesti. Jos vaurioita löytyy, antakaa

ammattimiehen heti kunnostaa ne.
... Vieraan valmistajan tuotteiden käyttö
Kauhat ja lisävarusteet, joita Brüel & Kjær Vibro ei toimita, kuuluvat yrityksen
vastuualueen piiriin. Yrityksen on pidettävä huoli siitä, että sähköistä turvallisuutta ja
teknisiä tietoja koskevat vaatimukset vastaavat vaadittuja ominaisuuksia. Brüel & Kjær
Vibro ei vastaa vieraiden valmistajien tuottaista. Yritys vastaa itse Brüel & Kjær Vibro -
tuotteille aiheutuvista vioista, joiden syynä ovat vieraan tuottajan valmisteet.
Yritys on vastuussa ...

... asennuksesta
Yritys on vastuussa laitteen asennuksesta ja ja käyttöpaikan turvallisuudesta. Sen on
pidettv huoli siitä, että kansalliset ja kansainväliset turvallisuus- ja suojamäärykset
otetaan huomioon ja ett niitä sovelletaan.
... toimintavarmuudesta
− Ennen laitteiston käyttöönottoa on yrityksen tarkistettava laitteen tai laitteiston

toimintavarmuus. Yritys on vastuussa siitä, että käytössä on vain muita sellaisia
laitteita, jotka takaavat meidän laitteistomme varman toiminnan.
Suositus yritykselle
Jos laitteen käyttöön koneiden tai laitteiston
osien kanssa sisältyy mahdollisia vaaroja, jotka eivät kuulu Brüel & Kjær Vibro:n
vastuualueeseen, on yrittäjän tiedotettava turvallisuusteknisistä ohjeista tai varoituksista ja
julkaistava ne. Asianomaisen henkilökunnan on ymmärrettävä ja vahvistettava nämä
ohjeet.
Ohje:
Jos laite on asennettu koneeseen tai tarkoitettu koneen kokoonpanoa varten, on sen
käyttöönotto niin kauan kielletty kunnes kone, johon laite asennetaan, vastaa EU:n
suuntaviivojen ohjesääntöjä.
Omavaltaisten muutosten tekeminen on kielletty

Laitteeseen ja lisävarusteisiin ei saa tehdä rakenteellisia eikä turvallisuusteknisiä
muutoksia ilman meidän selvää suostumustamme. Muutoksista johtuvista vahingoista
emme vastaa. Erityisesti kaikki korjaukset, platinoiden juottaminen, rakennusyksikköjen /
moduulien/johtolevyjen vaihtaminen toisiin on kielletty ilman Brüel & Kjær Vibro:n selvää
suostumusta. Varaosina on käytettävä ainoastaan Brüel & Kjær Vibro:n alkuperäisiä
varaosia.
- 33 -
Υποδείξεις ασφαλείας
GR
Υποδείξεις ασφαλείας όταν καταγίνεστε με συσκευές
μέτρησης και επιτήρησης ταλαντώσεων
Μεμονωμένα πρόκειται για συσκευές μέτρησης, διάγνωσης και επιτήρησης, οι οποίες θα
αποκαλούνται εφεξής με τον όρο "Συσκευές".
Κατά τη χρήση των συσκευών μας, περιλαμβανομένου και του αξεσουάρ τους, θα πρέπει
για την προστασία από τραυματισμούς να τηρηθούν οι παρακάτω υποδείξεις ασφαλείας.
Για τη δική σας ασφάλεια θα πρέπει να έχετε διαβάσει τις ισχύουσες υποδείξεις ασφαλείας
και να τις έχετε κατανοήσει, πριν εργαστείτε με τη συσκευή.
Οι υποδείξεις ασφαλείας θα πρέπει να φυλάσσονται σε τέτοιο σημείο, ώστε να είναι
προσβάσιμες και διαθέσιμες σε όλα τα άτομα, τα οποία εργάζονται με τη συσκευή.
Εικονογράμματα και η σημασία τους

Οι συσκευές μας ανταποκρίνονται στη σύγχρονη τεχνολογία και στους αναγνωρισμένους
τεχνικούς κανόνες ασφάλειας. Παρ΄ όλα αυτά υπάρχουν και άλλοι κίνδυνοι, για τους
οποίους γίνεται υπόμνηση στην τεκμηρίωση σε μορφή εικονογραμμάτων:
Προειδοποίηση από πηγές Προειδοποίηση από

κινδύνων επικίνδυνη ηλεκτρική τάση
Ασφάλεια Προδιαγραφόμενη γείωση
Προδιαγραφόμενη σύνδεση αυτομάτου διαρροής
Γνώσεις, ικανότητες του χρήστη

Στις συσκευές γίνονται ρυθμίσεις, οι οποίες όταν είναι λάθος, μπορούν να έχουν ευρύτατες
συνέπειες, για παράδειγμα βλάβη συσκευής, σωματικές βλάβες.
Για όλες τις εργασίες σε συνδυασμό με τις συσκευές μας εγκρίνεται μόνο εξειδικευμένο
και εξουσιοδοτημένο προσωπικό. Εδώ ανήκουν ανάμεσα στ΄ άλλα οι ακόλουθες
εργασίες:
Εγκατάσταση και θέση σε λειτουργία για πρώτη φορά
Κατά την εγκατάσταση και θέση σε λειτουργία για πρώτη φορά, πρόκειται κυρίως για
εργασίες στον ηλεκτρικό εξοπλισμό. Αυτές οι εργασίες επιβάλλεται να εκτελούνται
μόνο από εξειδικευμένο ηλεκτρολόγο ή από εκπαιδευμένα άτομα κάτω από την
καθοδήγηση και επιτήρηση ειδικευμένου ηλεκτρολόγου, σύμφωνα με τους κανόνες /
τις προδιαγραφές της ηλεκτροτεχνίας.
Αλλαγή των προδιαγραφών της συσκευής
Μία αλλαγή των προδιαγραφών της συσκευής έχει επιπτώσεις πάνω στη διαδικασία
επιτήρησης μόνιμα τοποθετημένων εγκαταστάσεων και στην πορεία της τεχνικής
μετρήσεων, όταν πρόκειται για φορητές συσκευές μετρήσεων.
Ενδείξεις σφαλμάτων
Αυτές πρέπει να τηρούνται οπωσδήποτε και να διαπιστώνεται και να αντιμετωπίζεται
η αιτία τους.
- 34 -
Συντήρηση και επισκευή

Εδώ πρέπει να τηρούνται οι σχετικές υποδείξεις ασφαλείας του εγχειριδίου οδηγιών
συντήρησης και επισκευής.
Προειδοποίηση από πηγές κινδύνων
Όταν καταγίνεστε με τις συσκευές μας καθώς και με τα εξαρτήματα τους, τα

ηλεκτροφόρα μέρη τους αποτελούν μια δυναμική πηγή κινδύνων.
Σε αυτήν περίπτωση πρόκειται για:
Τάσεις γενικά
Τάσεις πάνω από 50 V θεωρούνται κατά κανόνα επικίνδυνες .
Η παροχή τάσης δικτύου
Περιοχές εκτεθειμένες σε κίνδυνο, είναι συγκεκριμένα τα ηλεκτροφόρα μέρη
μέσα στις συσκευές. Αυτά μπορεί να είναι: διάφορα σημεία κόλλησης,
γραμμές διασύνδεσης, οι ακροδέκτες για τη σύνδεση με το δίκτυο
ρεύματος, επαφές ηλεκτρονόμων κλπ. Προτού ανοίξετε τη συσκευή
κλείνετε την τάση δικτύου σε όλους τους πόλους.
Τάσεις άλλης πηγής
Κατά την αποσύνδεση μιας συσκευής πρέπει να ληφθούν υπόψη επίσης
τυχόν υπάρχουσες τάσεις άλλης πηγής.
Ασφάλειες
Σε συσκευές, στις οποίες προβλέπεται αλλαγή της ασφάλειας είναι
εγκεκριμένες μόνο οι γνήσιες ασφάλειες με προδιαγεγραμμένη ένταση
ρεύματος.
Αγωγός γείωσης
Η σύνδεση πρέπει να έχει επαρκείς διαστάσεις και να είναι
κατασκευασμένη από ειδικό.
Αλλαγή συσσωρευτή / μπαταρίας
Πριν από την αλλαγή συσσωρευτή / μπαταρίας!
Αρμόζουσα χρήση
της συσκευής
− Η συσκευή πρέπει να χρησιμοποιείται αποκλειστικά για την αρμόζουσα χρήση

της. Οποιαδήποτε χρήση που ξεπερνά αυτά τα όρια, απαγορεύεται. Για βλάβες,
που προκύπτουν από ανάρμοστη χρήση ο οίκος Brüel & Kjær Vibro δε φέρει
καμία ευθύνη. Τον επαπειλούμενο κίνδυνο αναλαμβάνει αποκλειστικά ο χρήστης.
Η αρμόζουσα χρήση πρέπει να ληφθεί από την τεκμηρίωση.
− Εκθέτετε τη συσκευή μόνο στις επιτρεπόμενες επιδράσεις περιβάλλοντος. Αυτές

πρέπει να ληφθούν από τα τεχνικά χαρακτηριστικά της συσκευής.
− Ο ηλεκτρικός εξοπλισμός πρέπει να συντηρείται τακτικά. Ζημιές από χαλαρές

συνδέσεις, χαλαρά φισάκια, πρέπει να επιδιορθωθούν αμέσως.
του αισθητήρα
Ο αισθητήρας επιτρέπεται να χρησιμοποιείται μόνο για τη χρήση, που προδιαγράφεται
στο Φύλλο Χαρακτηριστικών. Οποιαδήποτε χρήση πέρα από την προδιαγραφή αυτή
θεωρείται ανάρμοστη.
- 35 -
του καλωδίου
− Το καλώδιο επιτρέπεται να χρησιμοποιείται μόνο για την ειδική χρήση που

αναφέρεται στο Φύλλο χαρακτηριστικών. Κάθε άλλη χρήση θεωρείται ανάρμοστη.
− Μη χρησιμοποιείτε το καλώδιο, για να τραβήξετε το φις από την πρίζα.
− Ελέγχετε τακτικά καλώδια και βυσματικές συνδέσεις.

Αναθέστε την αλλαγή τους αμέσως σε ειδικό.
Χρησιμοποίηση προϊόντων άλλων οίκων
Αισθητήρια και εξαρτήματα, που δεν παραδίνονται από τον οίκο Brüel & Kjær Vibro,
υπάγονται στον τομέα ευθύνης του χρήστη. Αυτός πρέπει να φροντίζει, ώστε οι
απαιτήσεις σχετικά με την ηλεκτρική ασφάλεια και τα τεχνικά χαρακτηριστικά, να
ανταποκρίνονται στις εγκεκριμένες ιδιότητες. Για προϊόντα άλλων οίκων ο οίκος Brüel
& Kjær Vibro δεν αναλαμβάνει καμία ευθύνη.
Για βλάβες σε προϊόντα Brüel & Kjær Vibro, οι οποίες προκύπτουν από προϊόντα
άλλων οίκων, ευθύνεται ο χρήστης.
Ο χρήστης είναι υπεύθυνος ...

για την εγκατάσταση
Για την εγκατάσταση της συσκευής και για την ασφάλεια του περιβάλλοντος της
επιχείρησης ευθύνεται ο επιχειρηματίας. Αυτός πρέπει να φροντίζει, ώστε να
τηρούνται και να εφαρμόζονται οι διατάξεις ασφαλείας / προστασίας.
για την ασφάλεια λειτουργίας
Προτού τεθεί μία εγκατάσταση για πρώτη φορά σε λειτουργία, πρέπει να ελέγξει ο
επιχειρηματίας την ασφάλεια λειτουργίας της συσκευής ή αντίστοιχα της
εγκατάστασης.
Ο επιχειρηματίας ευθύνεται, ώστε να χρησιμοποιούνται μόνο περιφερειακά που να
εξασφαλίζουν την ασφαλή λειτουργία της εγκατάστασης μας.
Σύσταση στο χρήστη
Σε περίπτωση που με τη χρησιμοποίηση της συσκευής σε συνδυασμό με μηχανήματα ή
μέρη της εγκατάστασης θα μπορούσαν να προκύψουν κίνδυνοι που υπάγονται στον τομέα
ευθύνης του οίκου Brüel & Kjær Vibro, πρέπει να εκδοθούν και να διανεμηθούν από την
πλευρά του επιχειρηματία προειδοποιητικές οδηγίες για την τεχνική ασφαλείας, να
κατανοηθούν και η λήψη τους να επιβεβαιωθεί από το προσωπικό.
Υπόδειξη:
’Όταν η συσκευή έχει ενσωματωθεί σε μηχάνημα ή προορίζεται για τη συναρμολόγηση ενός
μηχανήματος, απαγορεύεται να τεθεί το μηχάνημα επί τόσο διάστημα σε λειτουργία, μέχρι
το μηχάνημα, στο οποίο πρόκειται να ενσωματωθεί η συσκευή, ανταποκρίνεται στις
διατάξεις των κατευθυντήριων οδηγιών της Ε.Ε.
Απαγόρευση αλλαγών με δική σας πρωτοβουλία
Συσκευή και εξαρτήματα δεν επιτρέπεται να τροποποιηθούν χωρίς την έγκριση μας ούτε
στην κατασκευή ούτε στην τεχνική ασφάλειας. Οποιαδήποτε τροποποίηση αποκλείει την
ευθύνη από την πλευρά μας για βλάβες που προκύπτουν από αυτήν την αλλαγή. Ιδιαίτερα
απαγορεύονται οποιεσδήποτε επισκευές, κολλήσεις σε κάρτες (τυπωμένου κυκλώματος)
και η αλλαγή στοιχείων κατασκευής, τυποποιημένων δομικών στοιχείων (μοντούλ) /
πλακετών, χωρίς τη ρητή έγκριση του οίκου Brüel & Kjær Vibro.
Όταν χρησιμοποιείτε ανταλλακτικά, προμηθεύεστε μόνο γνήσια ανταλλακτικά από τον οίκο
- 36 -
Sigurnosne napomene
YU
Sigurnosne napomene pri rukovanja sa uređajima za
merenje i nadgledanje vibracija
Pojedinačno se pri tome radi o uređajima za merenje, dijagnozu i nadgledaje, u nastavku
označene sa "uređaj".
Pri rukovanju našim uređajima uključujući pribor, treba radi zaštite od opasnosti od
povreda obratiti pažnju na sledeće sigurnosne napomene.
Za Vašu sopstvenu sigurnost morate pročitati i razumeti dotične sigurnosne napomene,
pre nego što počnete da radite sa uređajem.
Sačuvajte sigurnosne napomene tako, da one stoje na raspolaganju za uvid svim
osobama koje rade sa uređajem.
Simboli i njihovo značenje

Naši uređaji odgovaraju razvoju tehnike i priznatim sigurnosno-tehničkim pravilima. Ipak
postoje ostaci opasnosti, na koje se u dokumentaciji obraća pažnja u formi simbola.
Sledeći simboli su upotrebljeni:
Upozorenja na izvor opasnosti Upozorenja na opasan,

električni napon
Osigurač Propisano uzemljenje
Propisani priključak zaštitnog provodnika
Kvalifikacija korisnika
Na uređajima su preduzeta podešavanja, koja kod pogrešnog podešavanja mogu imati
dalekosežne posledice, na pr. oštećenja mašina, povrede osoba.
Za sve radove na u vezi sa našim uređajima je dopušten samo stručni, upućen i
autorizovan personal. Pod to između ostalog spadaju sledeći radovi:
Instalacija i puštanje u pogon
Kod instalacije i puštanja u pogon se pretežno radi o radovima na električnoj opremi.
Ovi radovi smeju biti preduzeti samo od strane jednog stručnjaka za elektrotehniku ili
od strane upućenih osoba pod vođstvom i nadgledanjem nekog stručnjaka za
elektrotehniku prema elektrotehničkim pravilima/propisima.
Promena specifikacije uređaja
Promena specifikacije uređaja ima dejstvo na proces nadgledanja kod stacionarnih
postrojenja i dejstvo na mernotehnički proces kod prenosivih mernih uređaja.
Poruke o greškama
Na njih se obavezno mora obratiti pažnja, ustanoviti i otkloniti njihov uzrok.
- 37 -
Sigurnosne napomene
Održavanje i popravka
Ovde treba obratiti pažnju na dotične sigurnosne napomene u uputstvu za održavanje i
popravke
Upozorenje na izvor opasnosti
Kod rukovanja našim uređajima uključujući opremu, delovi koji provode

napon predstavljaju jedan potencijalan izvor opasnosti. Pri tome se radi o:
Naponima uopšte
Naponi preko 50 V su principijelno označeni kao opasni.
Dovođenje mrežnog napona
Ugrožene oblasti su specijalno delovi koji provode napon u uređajima. Ovo
mogu biti: različite lemne tačke, provodne linije, stezaljke za mrežni
priključak, kontakti releja itd.. Pre otvaranja uređaja isključiti mrežni napon
na svim polovima.
Strani naponi
Pri isključivanju jednog uređaja moraju se uzeti u obzir i eventualno
postojeći strani naponi.
Osigurači
Kod uređaja sa predviđenom zamenom osigurača su dopušteni samo
originalni osigurači.
Zaštitni provodnik
Priključak treba dovoljno dimenzionirati i stručno napraviti.
Zamena akumulatora/baterija
Pre zamene akumulatora ili baterija obratiti pažnju na napomene za
upotrebu!
Svrsishodna upotreba
... uređaja
− Uređaj treba korisiti isključivo za njegovu svrsishodnu upotrebu. Svaka upotreba

koja ide van toga je zabranjena. Za štete, koje nastaju kroz nesvrsishodnu
upotrebu, ne odgovara Brüel & Kjær Vibro. Rizik snosi samo korisnik.
Svrsishodnu upotrebu videti u dokumentaciji.
− Uređaj izlažite samo dopuštenim uticajima okoline. Ove treba videti u tehničkim
podacima uređaja.
− Električnu opremu treba redovno održavati. Nedostatke, kao labave spojeve,

neispravne utikačke spojeve itd. treba neodložno otklanjati.
... senzora
− Senzor se sme koristiti samo za, u specifikacijama specificiranu, primenu. Svaka

upotreba koja ide van toga važi kao nesvrsishodna.
- 38 -
Sigurnosne napomene
... kabla
− Senzor se sme koristiti samo za u specifikacijama specificiranu, primenu. Svaka

upotreba koja ide van toga važi kao nesvrsishodna.
− Ne koristite kabal, da bi izvukli utikač iz utičnice.
− Redovno kontrolišite kabal i utikačke spojnice. Kod oštećenja ih odmah dajte

stručnjaku na zamenu.
... primena tuđih proizvoda
− Prijemnik i oprema, koji nisu isporučeni od strane firme Brüel & Kjær Vibro,
podležu oblasti odgovornosti korisnika. Korisnik treba da se brine za to, da
zahtevi u odnosu na električnu sigurnost i tehničke podatke, odgovaraju
obećanim osobinama. Za tuđe proizvode Brüel & Kjær Vibro ne preuzima
odgovornost. Za kvarove na Brüel & Kjær Vibro -proizvodima, koji nastaju kroz
tuđe proizvode odgovara korisnik.
Korisnik je odgovoran ...

... za nameštanje uređaja
− Za nameštanje uređaja i za sigurnost radne okoline je odgovoran korisnik. On

mora brinuti za to, da se poštuju i primenjuju nacionalni i internacionalni
sigurnosni propisi.
... za funkcionalnu sigurnost
− Pre puštanja u pogon jednog postrojenja korisnik mora proveriti funkcionalnu

sigurnost uređaja odnosno postrojenja. Korisnik je odgovoran za to, da se
upotrebljavaju samo periferni uređaji, koji garantuju siguran rad našeg
postrojenja.
Preporuka korisniku
Ako bi kroz upotrebu uređaja u vezi sa mašinama ili delovima postrojenja mogle proizići
opasnosti, koje ne leže u oblasti odgovornosti firme Brüel & Kjær Vibro, od strane korisnika
moraju biti izdata i podeljena, te od pogođenog personala razumena i potvrđena
sigurnosno tehnička uputstva ili upozorenja.
Napomena:
Ako je uređaj ugrađen u neku mašinu ili je predodređen za sastavljanje jedne mašine,
puštanje u pogon je zabranjeno tako dugo, dok mašina, koja se ugrađuje u uređaj ne
odgovara odredbama smernica EU-a.
Zabrana svojevoljnih izmena

Uređaj i oprema bez našeg izričitog slaganja ne smeju ni konstruktivno ni sigurnosno
tehnički biti promenjeni. Svaka promena isključuje odgovornost sa naše strane za štete
koje su iz toga nastale .
Posebno su sve popravke, radovi lemljenjem na pločama i zamena delova/ modula/
štampanih pločica bez izričite dozvole od strane firme Brüel & Kjær Vibro zabranjeni.
Kod upotrebe rezervnih delova treba koristiti samo originalne delove firme Brüel & Kjær
Vibro.
- 39 -
Указания по безопасности
Указания по безопасности по обращению с

приборами контроля и измерения колебаний
В частности здесь речь пойдет о приборах измерения, диагностики и контроля,
называемые в дальнейшем "Прибор".
Во избежание травм при обращении с нашими приборами, включая принадлежности
к ним, необходимо принимать во внимание следующие указания по безопасности.
Перед тем как начать работу с прибором, для обеспечения Вашей собственной
безопасности, Вам необходимо внимательно прочитать соответствующие указания
по безопасности.
Храните данную инструкцию так, чтобы она была доступна всем, кто будет работать
с данным прибором.
Символы и их значение
Наши приборы соответствуют техническим стандартам и существующим правилам
техники безопасности. Несмотря на это? существует опасность получения травм при
эксплуатации, на которую в данной документации указывают соответствующие
пиктограммы. Следующие символы означают:
Предупреждение об источнике Предупреждение об

опасности опасном электрическом
напряжении
Предохранительное Предписываемое
устройство заземление
Подключенный защитный провод
Квалификация пользователя
Все приборы были отрегулированы соответствующим образом, неправильная
эксплуатация может стать причиной поломки прибора или травмирования людей.
Все виды работ нашими приборами должны осуществляться исключительно
компетентным, квалифицированным и имеющим право на выполнение
данного вида работ персоналом. В том числе выполнение следующих операций:
Установка и ввод в эксплуатацию
Говоря об установке и вводе в эксплуатацию речь, в основном, идет о
выполнении работ с электрическим оборудованием. Такие виды работ должны
выполняться исключительно специалистами по электрике или обучающимися
особами под руководством и присмотром специалиста по электрике в
соответствии с электротехническими правилами/предписаниями.
Изменение спецификации прибора
Изменение спецификации прибора влияет на процесс контроля для
стационарного оборудования и на метрологический процесс для переносных
измерительных устройств.
- 40 -
Сообщения о сбое в работе

Такие сообщения должны обязательно приниматься во внимание, причина сбоев
в работе должна быть выяснена и устранена.
Техническое обслуживание и ремонт

Необходимо придерживаться соответствующих указаний по безопасности,
которые содержаться в инструкции по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту.
Предупреждение об источнике опасности
При обращении с нашими приборами, включая принадлежности,

необходимо помнить, что находящиеся под напряжением детали
являют собой потенциальные источники опасности.
При этом речь идет о:
Напряжение
Напряжение свыше 50 В принципиально классифицируются как
опасные.
Подвод сетевого напряжения
Опасными зонами являются токопроводящие детали прибора. Это
могут быть: различные точки спаивания, токопроводящие дорожки,
клеммы для сетевого подключения, контакты реле и т. п.
Перед тем как открыть прибор необходимо отключить все полюсы
сетевого напряжения.
Внешнее напряжение
При отключении прибора необходимо также принимать во внимание
возможные внешние напряжения.
Предохранители
Если модификация прибора предусматривает замену
предохранителей, то их разрешается заменять только оригинальными
предохранителями.
Защитные соединения
Необходимо точно определить параметры соединения и технически
правильно выполнить его.
Замена аккумулятора/батареи
Перед заменой аккумулятора или батареи необходимо изучить
инструкцию по эксплуатации!
- 41 -
Правила надлежащей эксплуатации

прибора
− Необходимо использовать прибор исключительно в соответствии с его

основным предназначением. Любое другое использование запрещено. За
ущерб, причиненный из-за неправильной эксплуатации, компания Brüel &
Kjær Vibro ответственности не несет. Вся ответственность ложиться на
пользователя.
Документация содержит правила надлежащей эксплуатации.
− Прибор всегда должен находится в благоприятных условиях окружающей

среды. Они содержатся в технических данных прибора.
− Электрическое оборудование нуждается в регулярном техническом уходе.

Недостатки, такие как незакрепленные соединения, дефектные
электрические соединители и т. п. должны немедленно устраняться.
Сенсора
Использовать сенсор можно только в соответствии со спецификацией в
паспорте оборудования. Любое другое использование считается недопустимым.
Кабеля
− Использовать кабель можно только в соответствии со спецификацией в

паспорте оборудования. Любое другое использование считается
недопустимым.
− Для того чтобы вынуть штекер из розетки, не тяните за кабель.
− Регулярно проверяйте кабель и штепсельные контакты.

При их повреждении немедленно обратитесь к специалисту.
Применение посторонних фабрикатов
За сенсор и принадлежности, которые не были поставлены компанией Brüel &
Kjær Vibro, всю ответственность несет пользователь. При этом пользователь
должен позаботиться о том, чтобы требования электрической безопасности и
технических данных принадлежностей соответствовали свойствам прибора.
За посторонние фабрикаты компания Brüel & Kjær Vibro ответственности не
несет.
За повреждение изделий компании Brüel & Kjær Vibro вследствие посторонних
фабрикатов вся ответственность ложится на пользователя.
- 42 -
Пользователь несет ответственность ...

за установку
Пользователь несет ответственность за установку прибора и за безопасность
рабочей среды. Он должен позаботиться о том, чтобы были соблюдены все
национальные и международные предписания безопасности и защиты.
за функциональную безопасность
Перед введением в эксплуатацию пользователь должен проверить
функциональную безопасность прибора или оборудования.
Пользователь несет ответственность за использование исключительно
периферийных приборов, которые обеспечивают надежную эксплуатацию
нашего оборудования.
Рекомендация пользователю
В случае возникновения опасной ситуации из-за эксплуатации прибора вместе с
машинами и деталями оборудования, за которые компания Brüel & Kjær Vibro не
несет ответственности, то пользователь должен распространить указания по технике
безопасности, которые должны быть заверены соответствующим персоналом.
Указание:
Если прибор встроен в машину или предназначается для монтажа машины, то
введение его в эксплуатацию будет невозможно до тех пор, пока машина, в
которую встраивается прибор, не будет соответствовать нормам
безопасности ЕС.
Запрещается самовольное внесение изменений

Прибор и принадлежности нельзя изменять ни конструктивно, ни с точки зрения
техники безопасности без нашего четкого на то согласия. Любое изменение снимает
с нас ответственность за повреждения вследствие такого изменения.
Ремонт, пайка плат и замена составных частей/модулей/печатных плат без
письменного согласия компании Brüel & Kjær Vibro запрещается.
При замене запасных деталей необходимо использовать только оригинальные
детали компании Brüel & Kjær Vibro.
- 43 -
Instrucţiuni pentru securitatea muncii
Instrucţiuni pentru securitatea muncii la manipularea

aparatelor pentru măsuarea şi monitorizarea vibraţiilor
În particular este vorba despre aparate pentru măsurare, diagnosticare şi monitorizare,
denumite în cele ce urmează „aparat”.
La manipularea aparatelor noastre, inclusiv a accesoriilor, ca măsuri de protecţie contra
pericolelor de rănire trebuie să se respecte următoarele instrucţiuni pentru securitatea
muncii.
Pentru propria dv. siguranţă trebuie să citiţi şi să vă familiarizaţi cu instrucţiunile referitoare
la securitatea muncii înainte de a lucra cui aparatul.
Păstraţi instrucţiunile pentru securitatea muncii în aşa fel încât să le stea la dispoziţie
pentru consultare tuturor persoanelor care lucrează cu aparatul.
Pictogramele şi semnificaţia lor

Aparatele noastre corespund stadiului tehnicii şi reglementărilor recunoscute în materie de
securitate a muncii. Cu toate acestea mai există riscuri reziduale, la care se face referire în
documentaţie sub formă de pictograme. Sunt utilizate următoarele pictograme:
Avertizare cu privire la o sursă Avertizare cu privire la o

de pericole tensiune electrică periculoasă
Siguranţă Legarea la pământ

specificată
Conductor de protecţie specificat
Calificarea utilizatorului
Aparatele fac obiectul unor reglări diverse, care în cazul în care sunt incorecte pot să aibă
consecinţe grave, de ex. deteriorarea maşinii, vătămări corporale.
Toate lucrările care sunt efectuate cu aparatele noastre trebuie să fie realizate doar de
către personal competent, expert şi autorizat. Printre alte asemenea lucrări sunt şi
următoarele:
Instalarea şi punerea în funcţiune
În cazul instalării şi punerii în funcţiune este vorba preponderent despre lucrări la
echipamente electrice. Este permis ca aceste lucrări să fie efectuate numai de către
un electrician sau de persoane care lucrează sub conducerea şi supravegherea unui
electrician, conform reglementărilor/directivelor din doemniul electrotehnic.
Modificarea specificaţiei aparatului
O modificare a specificaţiei aparatului are efecte asupra procesului de monitorizare în
cazul instalaţiilor staţionare şi are efecte asupra desfăşurării tehnicii de măsurare în
cazul aparatelor de măsură portabile.
Mesaje de eroare
Acestea trebuie neapărat să fie respectate, să li se stabilească cauza şi să fie
remediate.
- 44 -
Întreţinere şi reparare
În acest caz trebuie să se respecte instrucţiunile corespunzătoare pentru securitatea
muncii din instrucţiunile pentru întreţinere şi reparaţii.
Avertizare cu privire la o sursă de pericole
În timpul manipulării aparatelor noastre, inclusiv a accesoriilor, piesele sub

tensiune reprezintă o sursă potenţială de pericole.
În particular este vorba despre:
tensiuni în general
Tensiuni de peste 50 V sunt din principiu clasificate ca fiind periculoase.
alimentarea cu tensiune de la reţeaua electrică
Zonele periculoase în mod special sunt piesele conducătoare de curent din
aparate. Acestea pot să fie: diverse puncte de sudură, conductoare,
bornele pentru racordarea la reţeaua electrică, contactele releelor, etc.
Înaintea deschiderii aparatului deconectaţi toate firele de la reţeaua de
alimentare electrică.
tensiuni exterioare
La deconectarea aparatului trebuie să fie avute în vedere şi eventualele
tensiuni exterioare existente.
Siguranţe
La aparatele la acre este prevăzută înlocuirea siguranţelor sunt admise
numai siguranţe originale.
conductor de protecţie
Racordul se va dimensiona suficient de mare şi se va realiza în mod
corespunzător.
Înlocuirea acumulatorilor/bateriilor
Înaintea înlocuirii acumulatorilor sau a bateriilor consultaţi instrucţiunile
de utilizare!
Utilizare conformă
a aparatului
− Utilizarea aparatului se va face exclusiv conform. Orice utilizare în afara celei

conforme este interzisă. Brüel & Kjær Vibro nu răspunde pentru deteriorări
rezultate dintr-o utilizare neconformă. Riscul cade doar în sarcina utilizatorului.
Utilizarea conformă rezultă din documentaţie.
− Nu expuneţi aparatul la alte influenţe de mediu în afara celor specificate. Acestea

sunt indicate în datele tehnice ale aparatului.
− Lucrările de întreţinere pentru echipamentul electric se efectua la intervale

regulate de timp.
Deficienţe, precum conexiuni slăbite, racorduri tip ştecăr defecte, etc., trebuie să
fie remediate imediat.
a senzorului
Este permisă utilizarea senzorului numai în conformitate cu cea specificată în fişa
tehnică. Orice utilizare în afara acesteia este considerată ca fiind neconformă.
- 45 -
a cablului
− Este permisă utilizarea cablului numai în conformitate cu cea specificată în fişa

tehnică. Orice utilizare în afara acesteia este considerată ca fiind neconformă.
− Nu utilizaţi cablul pentru a trage ştecherul din priză.
− Controlaţi periodic cablul şi conectorii.

În caz de deteriorare puneţi să fie înlocuite imediat de către un specialist.
Utilizarea de produse de fabricaţie străină
Pentru utilizarea senzorul şi accesoriile care nu au fost livrate de Brüel & Kjær Vibro
răspunde doar utilizatorul. Utilizatorul trebuie să aibă grijă ca cerinţele referitoare la
siguranţa electrică şi la datele tehnice să corespundă cu proprietăţile specificate.
Brüel & Kjær Vibro nu răspunde în nici un fel pentru produsele de altă fabricaţie.
Pentru defectele produselor Brüel & Kjær Vibro cauzate de produsele de altă
fabricaţie răspunde utilizatorul.
Utilizatorul răspunde pentru …

setări
Pentru setările aparatului şi pentru securitatea mediului de operare este responsabil
utilizatorul. El se va îngriji să fie respectate şi aplicate prevederile naţionale şi
internaţionale cu privire la securitatea muncii şi protecţie.
securitatea funcţionării
Înaintea punerii în funcţiune a unei instalaţii utilizatorul trebuie să verifice securitatea
funcţionării aparatului, resp. a instalaţiei.
Utilizatorul răspunde de utilizarea numai a aparatelor periferice care garantează
securitatea funcţionării instalaţiei noastre.
Recomandări pentru utilizator

Dacă prin utilizarea aparatului împreună cu maşini sau părţi de instalaţie pot să rezulte
pericole care nu ţin de domeniul de responsabilitate al Brüel & Kjær Vibro trebuie ca
utilizatorul să emită şi să distribuie indicaţii sau avertizări cu privire la tehnica securităţii
muncii, şi să se asigure că personalul în cauză le-a primit şi le-a înţeles.
Notă:
În cazul în care aparatul este integrat într-o maşină sau este destinat pentru a fi asamblat
într-o maşină, punerea în funcţiune este interzisă atât timp cât maşina, în care aparatul
este integrat, nu corespunde prevederilor directivelor UE.
Interzicerea modificărilor neautorizate

Nu este permis să se aducă aparatului şi accesoriilor nici o modificare, atât din punct de
vedere constructiv, cât şi al tehnologiei cu privire la securitate a muncii, fără acordul nostru
expres. Orice modificare exclude orice răspundere a noastră pentru pagubele rezultate din
aceasta.
În mod special, fără aprobarea expresă a Brüel & Kjær Vibro sunt interzise toate
reparaţiile, lucrările de lipire la cald pe plăci şi înlocuirea de componente/module/plăci cu
circuite imprimate.
În cazul utilizării de piese de schimb se vor utiliza numai piese originale de la
- 46 -
Zasady bezpieczeństwa
PL
Zasady bezpieczeństwa w zakresie obsługi urządzeń do
pomiaru i nadzoru drgań
W tym przypadku chodzi o urządzenia do pomiaru, diagnostyki i nadzoru drgań, które w
dalszej części instrukcji zwane są „urządzeniami”.
Aby uniknąć obrażeń, podczas obsługi naszych urządzeń i akcesoriów należy
przestrzegać poniższych wskazówek bezpieczeństwa.
Ze względów bezpieczeństwa, przed przystąpieniem do pracy przy użyciu urządzenia
należy przeczytać i zrozumieć wskazówki bezpieczeństwa.
Wskazówki bezpieczeństwa przechowywać w taki sposób, aby były dostępne dla
wszystkich osób pracujących przy użyciu urządzenia.
Piktogramy i ich znaczenie

Nasze urządzenia są skonstruowane zgodnie ze stanem techniki i według uznanych zasad
bezpieczeństwa. Mimo to istnieją zagrożenia resztkowe, które są w tej dokumentacji
wskazywane za pomocą piktogramów. Zastosowanie mają następujące piktogramy:
Ostrzeżenie przed źródłem Ostrzeżenie przed

zagrożenia niebezpiecznym
napięciem elektrycznym
Bezpiecznik Przepisowe uziemienie
Przepisowe przyłącze przewodu ochron-

nego
Kwalifikacje użytkownika
Urządzenia wymagają dokonywania ustawień. Nieprawidłowe ustawienia mogą skutkować
np. uszkodzeniem maszyny lub szkodami osobowymi.
Wszelkie prace przy urządzeniach powinien wykonywać wyłącznie kompetentny,
posiadający odpowiednią wiedzę i autoryzowany personel. Do tych prac należą m.in.:
Instalacja i rozruch
Podczas instalacji i rozruchu wykonywane są przeważnie prace przy wyposażeniu
elektrycznym. Prace te mogą wykonywać wyłącznie elektrycy lub przeszkolone osoby
pod kierownictwem i nadzorem elektryka zgodnie z zasadami/przepisami
elektrotechnicznymi.
Zmiana specyfikacji urządzenia
Zmiana specyfikacji urządzenia ma wpływ na proces nadzoru w przypadku instalacji
stacjonarnych oraz na proces pomiaru w przypadku mierników przenośnych.
Komunikaty o błędzie
Należy przestrzegać komunikatów o błędzie, znaleźć przyczynę i usunąć błąd.
- 47 -
Konserwacja i naprawy
Należy przestrzegać odpowiednich przepisów bezpieczeństwa zawartych w instrukcji
konserwacji i napraw.
Ostrzeżenie przed źródłem zagrożenia
Przy obsłudze naszych urządzeń i akcesoriów części przewodzące prąd

stanowią potencjalne źródło zagrożenia.
Chodzi przy tym o:
Napięcia ogólnie
Napięcia powyżej 50 V są zasadniczo kwalifikowane jako niebezpieczne.
Doprowadzanie napięcia sieciowego
Specjalne obszary zagrożenia stanowią części urządzeń przewodzące
prąd. Mogą być to: różne punkty lutowania, ścieżki przewodzące, zaciski
przyłącza sieciowego, styki przekaźników itp.
Przed otwarciem urządzenia odłączyć napięcie sieciowe na wszystkich
biegunach.
Napięcia zakłócające
Przy włączaniu urządzenia należy uwzględnić także ew. napięcia
zakłócające.
Bezpieczniki
W urządzeniach z bezpiecznikami, które można wymieniać, stosować
wyłącznie bezpieczniki oryginalne.
Przewód ochronny
Przyłącze powinno mieć odpowiednie wymiary i być wykonane w fachowy
sposób.
Wymiana akumulatorów/baterii
Przed wymianą akumulatorów/baterii zapoznać się ze wskazówkami dot.
obsługi!
Zastosowanie zgodne z przeznaczeniem

Urządzenie
− Urządzenie jest przeznaczone wyłącznie do zastosowania zgodnego z

przeznaczeniem. Każde zastosowanie wychodzące poza ten zakres jest
zabronione. Firma Brüel & Kjær Vibro nie odpowiada za szkody wynikłe na skutek
niezgodnego z przeznaczeniem użytkowania urządzenia. Ryzyko ponosi
wyłącznie użytkownik.
Zastosowanie zgodne z przeznaczeniem jest opisane w dokumentacji.
− Korzystać z urządzenia wyłącznie w dopuszczalnych warunkach otoczenia. Są

one podane w danych technicznych urządzenia.
− Regularnie konserwować wyposażenie elektryczne.

Usterki, takie jak luźne złącza, uszkodzone wtyki itp., niezwłocznie usuwać.
Czujnik
Czujnik może być wykorzystywany wyłącznie do celów określonych w arkuszu
danych. Każde użycie wychodzące poza ten zakres jest niezgodne z przeznaczeniem.
- 48 -
Przewód
− Przewód może być wykorzystywany wyłącznie do celów określonych w arkuszu

danych. Każde użycie wychodzące poza ten zakres jest niezgodne z
przeznaczeniem.
− Nie używać przewodu do wyciągania wtyku z gniazda.
− Regularnie sprawdzać przewód i połączenia wtykowe.

W przypadku uszkodzeń niezwłocznie zlecić ich naprawę fachowcowi.
Stosowanie wyrobów innych producentów
Odpowiedzialność za stosowanie czujników i akcesoriów, które nie są dostarczane
przez firmę Brüel & Kjær Vibro, ponosi użytkownik. Użytkownik musi dopilnować, aby
spełnione były wymagania odnośnie do bezpieczeństwa elektrycznego i określone w
danych technicznych.
Firma Brüel & Kjær Vibro nie ponosi odpowiedzialności za wyroby innych
producentów.
Użytkownik ponosi odpowiedzialność za produkty firmy Brüel & Kjær Vibro, które
zostały uszkodzone na skutek zastosowania wyrobów innych producentów.
Użytkownik jest odpowiedzialny...

za przygotowanie urządzenia do pracy
Użytkownik jest odpowiedzialny za przygotowanie urządzenia i bezpieczeństwo na
stanowisku pracy. Musi on dopilnować przestrzegania krajowych i międzynarodowych
przepisów bezpieczeństwa i BHP.
za bezpieczeństwo działania
Przed rozruchem instalacji użytkownik musi sprawdzić bezpieczeństwo działania
urządzenia lub instalacji.
Użytkownik jest odpowiedzialny za stosowanie wyłącznie takich urządzeń
peryferyjnych, które gwarantują bezpieczną eksploatację instalacji naszej firmy.
Zalecenia dla użytkownika

Jeśli na skutek zastosowania urządzenia w połączeniu z maszynami lub częściami
instalacji może dojść do zagrożeń, które nie są objęte zakresem odpowiedzialności firmy
Brüel & Kjær Vibro, użytkownik jest zobowiązany do wydania stosownych instrukcji lub
ostrzeżeń, rozpowszechnienia ich wśród personelu i otrzymania potwierdzenia ich
zrozumienia.
Wskazówka:
Jeśli urządzenie jest przeznaczone do wbudowania w maszynę lub do jej montażu,
rozruch jest zabroniony, dopóki maszyna, w którą wbudowane jest to urządzenie, nie
spełnia wytycznych WE.
Zakaz wprowadzania samowolnych zmian

Bez wyraźnej zgody naszej firmy w urządzeniu i akcesoriach nie można wprowadzać
zmian konstrukcyjnych lub wpływających na bezpieczeństwo. Każda zmiana wyklucza
naszą odpowiedzialność za szkody wynikłe na jej skutek.
Bez uzyskania wyraźnej zgody firmy Brüel & Kjær Vibro zabronione są zwłaszcza
wszelkie naprawy, prace lutownicze na płytkach oraz wymiana
podzespołów/modułów/obwodów drukowanych.
Należy stosować wyłącznie oryginalne części zamienne firmy Brüel & Kjær Vibro.
- 49 -
Allgemeine Erdungsempfehlung
General grounding recommendation
Recommandations générales de mise à la terre
Beschreibung
Instruction
Description
C 102 812.001
Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH
Leydhecker Str. 10
64293 Darmstadt
Germany:
Tel.: 06151 / 428 1100
Fax: 06151 / 428 1200
E-Mail: info@bkvibro.de
Internet: www.bkvibro.com
Service Hotline:
Tel.: +49(0)6151 / 428 1400
Fax: +49(0)6151 / 428 1401
Alle Rechte vorbehalten.

Jegliche Vervielfältigungen dieser Technischen Dokumentation, gleich welchem Verfahren,
ist ohne vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung durch die Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH, auch
auszugsweise, untersagt.
Änderungen ohne vorherige Ankündigung bleiben vorbehalten.
Copyright 2006 Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH, D-64293 Darmstadt
All rights reserved.

No part of this technical documentation may be reproduced without prior written permission
of Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH.
Subject to change without prior notice
Tous droits réservés.

Toute reproduction de la présentedocumenta-tion technique, par quelque procédé que ce
soitest interdite, même partiellement, sans l'autorisation préalableécrite de la Société Brüel &
Kjær Vibro GmbH.
Tous droits de modifications réservés sans avis préalable.
Erdung Grounding Mise à la terre
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Contents
Table des matières
1 Allgemeine Erdungsempfehlung......................................................................... 3
1 General grounding recommendation .................................................................. 3
1 Recommandations générales de mise à la terre ................................................ 3
1.1 Was beschreibt diese Erdungsempfehlung?................................................................................. 3

1.1 What is described in this recommendation? ................................................................................. 3
1.1 Que décrivent ces recommandations ?......................................................................................... 3
2 Allgemeines........................................................................................................ 4
2 General .............................................................................................................. 4
2 Généralités ......................................................................................................... 4
3 Erdung als Schutzmaßnahme bei indirekter Berührung von

elektrischen Betriebsmitteln................................................................................ 6
3 Grounding as a protective measure on indirect contact with
electrical equipment ........................................................................................... 6
3 Mise à la terre : protection contre un contact accidentel .................................... 6
4 Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit (EMV) ......................................................... 8

4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMV).................................................................. 8
4 Compatibilité électromagnétique (CEM) ............................................................. 8
4.1 Allgemeines ................................................................................................................................... 8

4.1 General.......................................................................................................................................... 8
4.1 Généralités .................................................................................................................................... 8
© Erdung DEF 12.4.2006 Seite/Page 1 von/of/de 24

4.2 Äußere Maßnahmen für die EMV-Sicherheit ................................................................................ 9

4.2 External measures for EMV security............................................................................................. 9
4.2 Précautions à prendre pour garantir la CEM................................................................................. 9
4.2.1 Ableiten von Störungen (EMV) .................................................................................... 10
4.2.1 Diversion of interference (EMV)................................................................................... 10
4.2.1 Elimination des perturbations (CEM) ........................................................................... 10
4.2.2 Abschirmen gegen Störungen (EMV) .......................................................................... 12

4.2.2 Shielding against interference (EMV) .......................................................................... 12
4.2.2 Blindage contre les perturbations (CEM)..................................................................... 12
4.2.3 Richtige Kabelwahl und -verlegung ............................................................................. 16

4.2.3 Correct cable selection and installation ....................................................................... 16
4.2.3 Choix des types de câbles et modes de câblage ........................................................ 16
4.2.4 Zusätzliche Entstörmaßnahmen .................................................................................. 17

4.2.4 Additional interference-suppression measures............................................................ 17
4.2.4 Mise en œuvre de dispositifs d’antiparasitage............................................................. 17
5 Verbinden von 0V-Bezugspotentialen .............................................................. 18

5 Connection of 0V reference potentials ............................................................. 18
5 Raccordement du potentiel de référence (0V).................................................. 18
6 Potential und Bezugspotential .......................................................................... 20

6 Potential and reference potential...................................................................... 20
6 „Potentiel“ et „potentiel de référence“ ............................................................... 20
Seite/Page 2 von/of/de 24 © Erdung DEF 12.4.2006

1 Allgemeine 1 General grounding 1 Recommandations

Erdungsempfehlung recommendation générales de mise à la
terre
1.1 Was beschreibt diese 1.1 What is described in 1.1 Que décrivent ces
Erdungsempfehlung? this recommendation? recommandations ?
Die folgenden Seiten geben praxis- The following pages provide practical Ces pages donnent des informations
nahe Informationen zu den Themen information on the subjects of pratiques les plus actuelles sur les
Erdung, Schirmung, EMV-Sicherheit grounding, shielding, EMV security thèmes „Mise à la terre“, „Blindage“,
und Bezugspotenial, entsprechend and reference potential in accordance „Compatibilité électromagnétique“
dem gegenwärtigen Erkenntnisstand. with present-day practices. (CEM) et „Potentiels de référence“.
Diese Informationen ... This information ... Ces informations ...
• beschränken sich im wesentlichen • is limited mainly to the spheres of • se limitent aux points essentiels
auf den Bereich Montage und installation and operation of our concernant la mise en service et le
Betrieb unserer vorwiegend in der established product range’s fonctionnement industriel des
Messtechnik angesiedelten measurement techniques. appareils de notre gamme.
Produktpalette.
• erheben nicht den Anspruch auf • makes no claim to be a • n’ont pas l’ambition de décrire de
eine vollständige Behandlung des comprehensive summary of the manière exhaustive, sous ses
umfangreichen Themas Erdung, extensive subject of grounding with aspects théorique et pratique, le
mit all seinen Teilgebieten in its many theoretical and practical thème de la mise à la terre.
Theorie und Praxis. facets.
• können nicht ohne weiteres auf • cannot be used as described in • ne peuvent pas être extrapolées à
andere Anwendungsgebiete this manual in other grounding d’autres domaines que ceux
übertragen werden. applications without additional expressément cités.
information.
Ergänzend zu dieser allgemeinen The corresponding instructions in our Ces recommandations sont
Erdungsempfehlung sind die respective instrument manuals should complétées par celles qui sont décrites
entsprechenden Angaben in unseren be used as a supplement to these dans les manuels d’emploi de nos
jeweiligen Gerätebeschreibungen zu grounding recommendations différents appareils.
beachten.
Grundregel: Basic rule: Règle de base :

Erd- und Potentialverhält- Check the ground and Vérifier les niveaux des
nisse prüfen ! potential conditions! différents potentiels de
référence.
Bevor bei der Montage unserer Before the cable connections are Avant d’effectuer le câblage de l’un
Geräte Kabelverbindungen made at an installation of our de nos appareils, il est vivement
hergestellt werden, müssen die instruments the on-site grounding, conseillé de vérifier les différents
örtlichen Erd- und Potentialverhält- potential and power conditions potentiels de référence, ainsi que la
nisse sowie die Netzverhältnisse must be checked. If critical valeur de la tension d’alimentation.
geprüft werden. Werden dabei potential differences are found Si ces valeurs ne sont pas
kritische Potential-unterschiede during this check, (see section 4) admissibles (voir le paragraphe 4),
festgestellt (siehe Abschnitt 4), suitable measures in the sense of l’exploitant devra mettre en œuvre
müssen betreiberseitig geeignete these grounding recommendations les mesures nécessaires au
Maßnahmen im Sinne dieser must be taken by the operators of rétablissement d’une situation
Erdungsempfehlung getroffen the equipment. normale.
werden.

Ausnahme: Exception: Exception :

Sonderfall explosions- Explosive areas Installation en zone
gefährdeter Bereich explosible
In explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen In explosive areas or the areas Dans les zones qui présentent un
und im Bereich von Zuleitungen zu surrounding them, grounding danger d’explosion ou dans celles
diesen können Vorschriften gelten, recommendations which deviate qui possèdent des conduites vers
die von dieser Erdungsempfehlung from these instructions or which ces zones, il peut exister des
abweichen oder zusätzliche require additional measures to be directives supplémentaires ou qui
Maßnahmen erforderlich machen. taken may be required. diffèrent des recommandations de
ce manuel.
Dies muss für jeden einzelnen Fall These must be carefully checked Ceci doit dans tous les cas être
sorgfältig überprüft werden. for each individual case. soigneusement vérifié.
Zusätzlich gilt: Supplementary note: De plus :

Neben dieser Erdungsempfehlung In addition to these grounding Outre les recommandations de mise à
gelten unsere Sicherheitshinweise, recommendations, our safety la terre, nous proposons dans une
die jeder Dokumentation als instructions which accompany all brochure séparée des
gesonderte Broschüre beiliegen. documentation in the form of a special recommandations de sécurité.
brochure are also to be considered.
2 Allgemeines 2 General 2 Généralités

Was bedeutet „Erden" What does „Grounding" Que signifie „mise à la
mean? terre "
Als "Erden" bezeichnet man im In general language usage the term La mise à la terre désigne tout
allgemeinen Sprachgebrauch jeden „grounding“ means any connection raccordement d’un conducteur à un
Anschluss an ein Bezugspotential through a so-called „ground“ to a potentiel de référence (voir le
(siehe Abschnitt 4), das über conductive earth point which provides paragraphe 4), qui est luimême
sogenannte "Erder" mit dem a reference potential (see section 4). directement relié électriquement à la
leitfähigen Erdreich verbunden ist. Grounds are conductive components terre.
Erder sind leitfähige Teile, die in which are electricaly in good contact
gutem elektrischen Kontakt mit dem with earth and whose connection point
Erdreich stehen und deren is mostly led from out of the earth.
Anschlusspunkte meist aus dem
Erdreich herausgeführt sind.
Erder können, je nach Funktion oder Grounds can be, depending on the Selon les conditions locales
örtlichen Gegebenheiten, verschieden site conditions, either provided by a d’exploitation, une „terre“ peut se
ausgeführt sein z.B. als Staberder, rod, a flat band or a plate. présenter sous différentes formes,
Banderder oder Platenerder. telles que : un piquet, une barre ou
bien une platine.

Warum „Erden"? Why is „grounding" Pourquoi une „mise à la

necessary? terre"?
Das Verbinden mit Erdpotential A connection to ground potential has Le raccordement d’un appareil à des
verfolgt unterschiedliche Ziele: various objectives: potentiels de référence permet
d’atteindre les buts suivants :
• das Erden als Schutzmaßnahme • A protective measure in acordance • Protection du personnel. Ce point
im Sinne der geltenden VDE- with the valid VDE prescriptions dépend des différentes exigences
Vorschriften (DIN VDE 0100) und (DIN VDE 0100) and low potential nationales
der Niederspannungsrichtlinien, guidelines whereby various
wobei diverse nationale national distinctions must be
Unterschiede zu beachten sind observed
• das Verhindern von Störein- • Prevention of disturbance • Compatibilité électromagnétique

strahlungen und Störausstrah- emmissions and immissions (CEM)
lungen im Sinne der EMV- according to the EMV guidelines
Richtlinien
• das für den Betrieb elektrischer • For the required determination of a • Détermination d’un „0 volt“
Geräte und Einrichtungen common reference potential for commun à toute une installation
erforderliche Festlegen eines operation of electrical instruments
gemeinsamen Bezugspotentials and equipment
• andere Ziele, die für diese • Other objectives, which may not be • Autres buts de moindre importance
Erdungsempfehlung jedoch nicht relevant for these grounding pour le présent exposé.
relevant sind recommendations
Bezeichnungen für Designations for reference Repérage des conducteurs

Bezugs- und Erdungsleiter and ground points de référence et de mise à
la terre
Für Bezugs und Erdungspunkte sind The following designations are Les pictogrammes suivants sont
die folgenden Bezeichnungen üblich: commonly used for reference and utilisés pour repérer les conducteurs
grounding points: de référence et de mise à la terre :
0 V/Masse - allgemein für das 0 V/ Ground - generally for the 0 V/masse - symbole général
Bezugspotential elektrischer reference potential of electrical d’un potentiel de référence
Schaltungen switching
0 VA - für Bezugsleiter 0 VA - for reference points in 0 VA - „0 volt“ analogique

innerhalb analoger Schaltkreise eines the analog circuits of instruments
Geräts
0 VD - für Bezugsleiter 0 VD - for reference points in 0 VD - „0 volt“ numérique

innerhalb digitaler Schaltkreise eines the digital circuits of instruments
Geräts
TE - für den Sternpunkt TE - for the star connection TE - point collecteur

(meist Sammelschiene), an dem 0 VA (mainly a bus-bar), to which the 0 VA (souvent une barre) du 0 VA et du
und 0 VD zusammengeführt sind. TE and 0 VD are connnected. TE is often 0 VD. TE est également désigné par
wird oft auch als "Elektronikerde" oder de-signated also as „Electronic „0V électronique“ ou bien „terre de
"Messerde" bezeichnet ground" or „Measurement ground". mesure“.

SE - Sternpunkt (meist SE - Star connection SE - point collecteur

Sammelschiene), an dem alle Kabel- (mainly a bus-bar), to which all the (souvent une barre) des blindages des
schirme z.B. in einem Gehäuse cable shields, e.g in an instrument câbles. SE est souvent relié à PE.
aufgelegt werden. SE ist oder wird housing, are connected. SE is
meist mit PE verbunden. normally or mostly connected with PE.
PE - für den Anschluss des PE - for connection of the PE - point collecteur des
grün-gelben Schutzleiters der Netzver- green/yellow protective ground cable conducteurs jaune/vert destinés à la
sorgung oder allgemeiner Schutz- of the power supply or a general protection du personnel.
erdungspunkt protective ground point.
TE und SE können mit PE verbunden TE and SE can be connected to PE TE et SE peuvent être raccordés à PE
werden, wenn PE störungsarm ist. Ist when PE is disturbance-free. If this is lorsque ce dernier est „propre“ au sens
das nicht der Fall, muss zumindest TE not the case TE must at least be électrique, c’est à dire exempt de
an eine getrennte, saubere (störungs- connected to a separate, clean parasites. Si tel n’est pas le cas, TE au
armen) Erde angeschlossen werden. (disturbance-free) ground point. moins doit être raccordé à une terre
spécialement préparée pour une telle
application.
FE - Betriebsstätten mit FE - Some operating FE - terre fonctionnelle.

konsequentem Erdungskonzept stellen plants which have a consistent Ce symbole supplémentaire peut
solche sogenannten Funktionserden grounding concept provide a so-called également exister dans certaines
FE zur Verfügung (z.B. in Schalt- „Functional ground“ FE , e.g. in control installations dont le concept de mise à
warten). rooms la terre a été particulièrement étudié.
3 Erdung als Schutz- 3 Grounding as a 3 Mise à la terre :

maßnahme bei protective measure on protection contre un
indirekter Berührung indirect contact with contact accidentel
von elektrischen electrical equipment
Betriebsmitteln
Elektrische Betriebsmittel besitzen Electrically operated equipment Les composants électriques

normalerweise einen oder mehrere normally consists of one or more so- possèdent généralement plusieurs
"Körper". called „bodies“. „corps“.
Körper sind nach DIN VDE 0100 Bodies“, according to DIN VDE 0100, Selon les normes, un „corps“ est une
berührbare leitfähige Teile, die im are contactable components which, in partie conductrice qui, contrairement
Gegensatz zu den "aktiven Teilen" contrast to „active“ components, can aux „parties actives“, ne peut se
des Betriebsmittels nur infolge eines only possess a potential in the case of trouver sous tension qu’à la suite d’un
Fehlers unter Spannung stehen a fault. Such potentials are designated défaut.
können. Solche Spannungen werden contact potentials and in case of Cette tension est alors appelée
als Berührungsspannungen indirect contact can cause currents „tension de contact“. Elle peut se
bezeichnet, die bei "indirektem which are dangerous to man. révéler dangereuse pour le personnel.
Berühren" gefährliche Körperströme
bei Mensch und Tier verursachen
können.
Beispiele für Körper sind Schalt- Examples of these so-called „bodies“ Exemples de „corps“ : armoires,
schränke, Gehäuse, Schaltgerüste, are cubicles, housings, contactor boîtiers, accessoires et platines de
Montageplatten usw. equipment, mounting panels, etc. montage.
Schutz vor Berührungsspannungen Protective grounding provides La mise à la terre est une protection
bietet die Schutzerdung. protection from contact potentials. contre un défaut accidentel.
Bei der Schutzerdung werden With protective grounding, conductive Elle est établie par le raccordement de
leitfähige Körper mit Erde verbunden bodies are connected to ground either ces „corps“ avec la terre, selon l’une
und zwar entweder des méthodes suivantes :

• mittels eines in der Netzversorgung • through a protective conductor • à l’aide du conducteur de

mitgeführten Schutzleiters oder supplied with the power supply or protection qui est acheminé dans
le câble d’alimentation, ou bien
• durch Anschluss an einen • through connection to a separate • à l’aide d’un conducteur séparé.
separaten lokalen Schutzerder local protective ground via their
mittels eines eigenen Schutzleiters. own protective conductor (ground
cable).
Diese Maßnahme bewirkt, dass im These measures have the effect that Cette mesure permet en cas de
Fehlerfall eine Schutzeinrichtung in the case of failure of the protective défaut, de couper l’alimentation, par
(Überstrom-, Fehlerstrom- oder equipment (over-voltage, incorrect- l’intermédiaire d’un dispositif adapté
Fehlerspannungsschutzeinrichtung) current or incorrect-voltage protective (fusible, disjoncteur, différentiel, ...)
das Betriebsmittel entweder voll- equipment) the operational ou bien de réduire l’intensité du
ständig vom Netz trennt oder die components are either completely courant à une valeur tolérable.
Berührungsspannung auf ein disconnected from power or the
zulässiges Maß reduziert. contact potential is reduced to a
permissible level.
Die zulässigen Berührungsspan- The permissible levels of contact Valeurs des tensions de contact
nungen betragen potentials are tolérables :
• bei Wechselspannung höchstens • Max. 50 Volts in the case of AC 50 V AC

50 Volt voltages ou
• bei Gleichspannung höchstens • Max. 120 Volts in the case of DC 120 V DC

120 Volt. voltages.
Höhere Berührungsspannungen Higher contact potentials cause Lorsque ces valeurs sont
verursachen gefährliche Körper- current levels which are extremely dépassées, un courant électrique
ströme, die zur Schädigung oder dangerous and can lead to injury or parcours le corps humain et peut
sogar zum Tode von Mensch und even death! conduire à de sévères lésions ou
Tier führen können! même à la mort.
Isolierte Schutzleiter sind in ihrem Insulated protective conductors must En règle générale, l’isolant d’un
ganzen Verlauf grün-gelb zu kenn- be identified with green/yellow conducteur de protection est bicolore
zeichnen. Die Anschlusspunkte der colouring over their entire length. The jaune/vert. Les points de
Schutzerdung sind mit „PE" (protective connection point to protective ground raccordement de ces conducteurs
must be marked with „PE" (protective doivent être repérés par "PE"
earth) oder dem Zeichen zu
(protective earth) ou par le
kennzeichnen. earth) or the identifying mark.
pictogramme .
Praktische Hinweise: Practical tips: Notes pratiques

• Der Schutzleiter ist auf dem • The protective conductor must be • Le conducteur de terre doit être le
kürzesten Weg auf einen dafür laid in the shortest possible path to plus court possible.
vorgesehenen zentralen Punkt des a central grounding point provided,
Betriebsmittels, z.B. auf einer e.g. a point on the mounting panel.
Montageplatte, aufzulegen. Dieser This point must be identified either
Punkt muss mit "PE" oder dem
with „PE“ or the identifying
Zeichen gekennzeichnet sein. mark.
• Da der Schutzleiter oft über • Because the protective conductor • Lorsque toutefois, le conducteur de
größere Entfernungen geführt wird, cable is sometimes laid over terre est long, il convient de tester
kann sein Erdpotential sich von considerable distances, its la différence de potentiel entre ses
einem lokalen Erdpotential potential can be different from the extrémités.
unterscheiden. Potentialverhält- local ground potential. Check for
nisse prüfen! potential differences!

• Die Anschlussstelle für den • The connection point for the • Les points de raccordement du
Schutzleiter muss eine gut leitende protective conductor to ground conducteur de terre doivent être
Verbindung gewährleisten. Lack, must guarantee good contact. particulièrement soignés et être
Schmutz, Korrosion und alle Paint, dirt, corrosion and any exempts de tout matériau (laque,
isolierenden Teile müssen sorg- insulation must be carefully salissures, corrosion) pouvant
fältig entfernt werden. Zu removed. Galvanised or stainless altérer la fonction de mise à la
empfehlen sind verzinkte Schraub- steel bolts and washers are terre. Il est recommandé d’utiliser
bolzen und Beilegescheiben. recommended. une visserie zinguée.
• PE kann, wenn keine getrennten • If there is no separate Function • Lorsqu’aucune autre terre n’est
Funktionserden vorhanden sind, ground is available, „PE“ can be prévue, PE peut également être
als Bezugspotential-Sternpunkt für used as the reference potential utilisée comme potentiel de
die Elektronik (Digitalerde und point for the electronics (digital référence pour l’électronique
Analogerde) und als Schirmauflage ground and analog ground) and for (0 VA et 0 VD), ainsi que comme
verwendet werden. Voraussetzung connection of the cable shielding. collecteur des blindages (SE).
dafür ist jedoch ein störungsarmer The prerequisite for this however is Ceci n’est bien entendu possible
Schutzleiter. an interference-free protective que si PE n’est pas parasitée.
conductor.
4 Elektromagnetische 4 Electromagnetic 4 Compatibilité

Verträglichkeit (EMV) compatibility (EMV) électromagnétique
(CEM)
4.1 Allgemeines 4.1 General 4.1 Généralités
Die europaweit geltende The Europe-wide legislation on Les lois européennes fixent les
Gesetzgebung über die elektro- electromagnetic compatibility (EMV) limites de la compatibilité électro-
magnetische Verträglichkeit (EMV) for electrically-operated instruments magnétique (CEM) des appareils et
elektrisch betriebener Geräte und and equipment sets limit values for des installations, aussi bien en ce qui
Einrichtungen legt Grenzwerte sowohl interference resistance and concerne l’émission que la réception.
für die Störfestigkeit als auch für die interference emission.
Störaussendung fest.
Die EMV-gerechte Ausführung von EMV-conforming design of instru- La conformité des appareils aux
Geräten beinhaltet, dass die Erzeu- ments requires that the emission and exigences de la CEM impose que
gung und Einwirkung elektromagne- immission of electromagnetic leurs émissions et leur réception sont
tischer Störungen soweit begrenzt interference must be limited so that, limitées de telle manière que:
wird,
• dass der bestimmungsgemäße • the operation of radio, • l’utilisation d’autres appareils (entre
Betrieb von Funk- und Telekommu- telecommunication and other autres, ceux servant aux
nikationsgeräten sowie sonstiger similar equipment is possible for télécommunications) soit possible
Geräte möglich ist und their designed purpose and sans précautions particulières
• dass die Geräte, Anlagen oder • the instruments, plant or systems • leur résistance aux ondes électro-
Systeme eine angemessene exhibit a resistance to magnétiques leur permettent de
Störfestigkeit gegen elektromagne- electromagnetic interference so fonctionner sans perturbations.
tische Störungen aufweisen, so that their designed intended
dass ein bestimmungsgemäßer operation is possible.
Betrieb möglich ist.
Auch wenn solche Geräte und However even when these instru- Même lorsqu’un appareil est
Einrichtungen die jeweiligen Forde- ments and equipment fulfill the conforme, et porte la marque ,
rungen erfüllen und die CE-Kenn- respective requirements and carry the il faut comprendre qu’il n’est pas
zeichnung tragen, bedeutet das nicht, CE designation, this does not entièrement hermétique aux ondes
dass sie absolut störfest und abstrah- necessarilty imply that they are électromagnétiques. Une étanchéité
lungsfrei sind. Um solche Qualitäten absolutely interference resistant and totale n’est, en effet, pas économi-
geräteseitig zu erreichen, müsste ein interference free. To attain this quement réalisable. C’est la raison
unwirtschaftlich hoher Aufwand absolute level of quality a prohibitive pour laquelle il convient de prendre
getrieben werden. manufacturing cost would be quelques précautions supplémentaires
necessary. qui aideront à réduire les effets des
ondes électro-magnétiques.

Deshalb müssen zusätzliche äussere Therefore some additional external En règle générale, il est indispensable
Maßnahmen getroffen werden, die measures must be taken to effectively de soigner l’exécution des entrées et
Störeinstrahlungen und Störabstrah- reduce the effective interference des sorties des appareils, mais
lungen wirksam reduzieren. Im emission and immission. Normally this également l’isolation ou la mise à la
wesentlichen betrifft das alle Zu- und includes all cables to and from the terre des „corps“ conducteurs tels que
Ableitungen, die an die Geräte instruments as well as the instruments les boîtiers ou les accessoires de
angeschlossen werden sowie leitende and housings connected to them. montage, car ceux-ci agissent comme
Geräteteile und Gehäuse. Sie können These items can act as active and des antennes actives ou passives qui
sowohl als aktive als auch als passive passive antenna which transmit and émettent des ondes
Antennen wirken, die elektromagne- receive electromagnetic interference. électromagnétiques ou les acheminent
tische Störsignale abstrahlen oder in à l’intérieur de l’appareil
Geräte einkoppeln.
Diese Störsignale werden eingeteilt in These interference signals are divided Les signaux perturbateurs sont
into classés en deux groupes :
• leitungsgebundene, wie sie z.B. • Receiver-associated, e.g. by • par conduction, comme par
von Leuchtstoffröhren, EDV- fluorescent tubes, EDV-plant, exemple ceux des tubes à néon,
Anlagen, Schützen, Schalthand- protective-devices, switching des systèmes informatiques et
lungen und vor allem Freqenz- actions and especially frequency surtout ceux des convertisseurs de
umrichter verursacht werden und in converters, and fréquence
• strahlungsgebundene, die z.B. von • Transmitter-associated,e.g. • par rayonnement, comme par

HF-Sendern (Funk, Fernsehen, created by HF transmitters (radio, exemple ceux des émetteurs à
Mobiltelefon usw.) erzeugt werden. television, cellular telephones etc.). haute fréquence (radios,
téléviseurs, téléphones portables).
Die eindeutige Zuordnung der Stör- A clear categorisation of interference Le classement des signaux
quellen ist dabei nicht immer möglich, sources is virtually impossible perturbateurs n’est cependant pas
da viele in beide Kategorien einge- because of the number involved, e.g. toujours aussi aisé car certains
ordnet werden können, wie z.B. protective devices. peuvent être rangés dans les deux
Schütze. catégories à la fois.
4.2 Äußere Maßnahmen für 4.2 External measures for 4.2 Précautions à prendre
die EMV-Sicherheit EMV security pour garantir la CEM
Nachfolgend werden Maßnahmen The following measures can be taken Ce chapitre décrit les précautions à
beschrieben, die dazu beitragen to contribute toward the reduction of prendre qui aident à réduire les
Störaussendung zu reduzieren und vor interference emission and prevention émissions et surtout à éviter la
allem Störeinstrahlungen zu of interference immission. These réception de perturbations électro-
verhindern. Im wesentlichen handelt measures are mainly magnétiques. Elles sont ordonnées
es sich dabei um dans les paragraphes suivants :
• Ableiten von Störungen • Diversion of interference • Elimination
• Abschirmen gegen Störungen • Shielding against interference • Blindage
• richtige Kabelwahl und -verlegung • Correct cable selection and • Choix des types de câbles et
installation modes de câblage
• richtige Wahl des • Correct selection of installation • Choix des accessoires

Installationszubehörs accessories d’installation
• Einsatz zusätzlicher Entstörgeräte • Additional interference • Mise en œuvre de dispositifs

sowie das suppression measures d’antiparasitage
• Beachten der Angaben in den • Observation of instructions in • Prise en compte de ces

jeweiligen Datenblättern respective data sheets renseignement dans les différentes
fiches techniques

4.2.1 Ableiten von Störungen 4.2.1 Diversion of 4.2.1 Elimination des

(EMV) interference (EMV) perturbations (CEM)
Alle leitfähigen Gehäuse und All conductive housings and Toutes les parties conductrices des
Geräteteile, die bestimmungsgemäß instrument components which produce boîtiers et des appareils qui sont
keine Betriebsspannungen führen, no operating voltages are potential sensées être hors tension en
stellen potentielle Antennen dar und antennas which transmit or receive fonctionnement normal, sont des
können somit Störungen abstrahlen interference. Good grounding of these antennes potentielles.
oder aufnehmen. Konsequentes Erden items diverts this interference
dieser Teile leitet solche Störungen extensively and renders them
weitgehend ab und macht sie damit harmless.
unschädlich.
Dies gilt für Schaltschränke, Gehäuse, This is valid also for cubicles, Elles peuvent émettre ou recevoir des
Gehäuseteile, Montageplatten, housings, housing components, perturbations. Leur mise à la terre, si
Baugruppenträger usw. mounting panels and instrumentation elle est effectuée dans les règles de
racks etc. l’art, permet de neutraliser les effets
de ces perturbations.
Normalerweise sind Teile innerhalb Normally components in the housings Normalement, tous les „corps“
eines Gehäuses werksseitig bereits are already in direct contact with conducteurs, installés à l’intérieur d’un
über direkten Kontakt (z.B. (through screws) or are internally appareil sont reliés entre eux, soit par
Verschraubung) oder durch grün-gelbe connected to the housing through vissage soit par un conducteur de
Leiter intern mit dem Gehäuse green/yellow ground cables so that couleur jaune/vert.
verbunden, sodass vor Ort nur noch only the housing itself must be locally Lors de la mise en route sur site, il
das Gehäuse selbst geerdet werden grounded. suffit alors de relier le boîtier externe à
muss. une terre de protection.
Die Erdverbindung muss möglichst The connection to ground must be Ceci se fait de préférence à l’aide d’un
großflächig, impedanzarm und auf large in cross-sectional area, low in conducteur de grosse section, de
kurzem Wege erfolgen. resistance and must be made over the faible impédance et de longueur faible.
shortest possible distance.
Der Anschluss des Schutzleiters der The ground cable of the power supply Le conducteur jaune/vert du câble
Netzversorgung (siehe Abschnitt 1) (see section 1) has purely a protective d’alimentation secteur (voir le
hat reine Schutzfunktion und reicht für function for the power supply and is paragraphe 1) a essentiellement une
die EMV-Sicherheit oftmals nicht aus. normally not sufficient for EMV fonction de protection du personnel et
security. ne suffit souvent pas à assurer une
bonne compatibilité électro-
magnétique.
Wichtige Hinweise: Important hints: Notes importantes :

• Die vorhandenen • The available ground connection • Les conducteurs internes à
Erdungsverbindungen innerhalb within housings or on mounting l’appareil qui relient le boîtier aux
von Gehäusen oder auf panels must not be altered and différentes platines de montage ne
Montageplatten dürfen nicht must be replaced in original doivent jamais être modifiés et
verändert und müssen nach condition after any repairs! doivent être réinstallés après une
Reparaturen wieder in den réparation.
Originalzustand versetzt werden!
• Nachträglich eingebaute Teile oder • Retro-fitted components or • Les modifications de câblage ou de

Veränderungen der Anordnung alterations in the arrangement or disposition des éléments entre eux,
oder der Verdrahtung von Geräten wiring of instruments can lower the les éléments qui sont installés a
können die EMV verschlechtern. EMV security of the system as a posteriori, peuvent détériorer les
Nachträglich eingebaute Teile whole. Retro-fitted components conditions de la compatibilité
müssen möglichst must be connected to a ground électromagnétique. Dans la
sternpunktmässig mit dem star-connection point of the mesure du possible, tous les
Gehäuse verbunden werden. housing. éléments d’un appareil doivent être
reliés en étoile au boîtier.

• Grundsätzlich können • Basically alterations can result in • Fondamentalement, toute modifi-

Veränderungen zum Verlust der loss of the CE conformity. The cation interne d’un appareil lui fait
CE-Konformität führen. Nach EMV security must be checked perdre de bénéfice du sigle .
Veränderungen muss die EMV neu after any alterations. Dans ce cas une nouvelle
überprüft werden. procédure d’agrément doit être
engagée.
• Es ist darauf zu achten, dass • Care should be taken that • Le boîtier d’un appareil doit
Gehäuse immer geschlossen housings are always kept closed. toujours être maintenu fermé. Une
gehalten werden. Schon kleine Even small openings in the ouverture, même de petite
Öffnungsschlitze können die EMV housing can result in a dimension, peut altérer les effets
erheblich verringern. considerable loss of EMV security. de la CEM.
• Schutzleiter und Erder für die • Protective conductors and grounds • Le conducteur de mise à la terre et
EMV-Sicherheit können Potential- for the EMV security can exhibit la terre elle-même peuvent être à
unterschiede aufweisen (siehe potential differences des potentiels différents (voir le
Abschnitt 4).Deshalb sind bereits (see section 4). Therefore local paragraphe 4). Il convient donc,
vor der Montage die lokalen potential differences must be avant toute mise en service, de
Erdverhältnisse zu prüfen. checked before an installation. vérifier les conditions locales de la
mise à la terre.
• Die Auflagepunkte für Erdleiter • The connection point for the • Les points de raccordement du
müssen frei von Schmutz und Lack ground cable must be free of dirt conducteur de terre doivent être
sein. and paint. exempts de tout matériau (laque,
salissures, corrosion) pouvant
altérer la fonction de mise à la
terre.
• Bezugs- und Erdleiter müssen • Reference and grounding cables • Les conducteurs de référence et
ausreichend niederohmig und must be sufficiently low in de mise à la terre doivent posséder
induktivitätsarm sein (großer resistance, and free of inductance une impédance et une capacité
Querschnitt, kurze Wege, flächige (large cross-sectional area, faibles (section importante,
Ankopplung). Sie sollten immer shortest path, flat connection). longueur faible, raccordement
sternpunktförmig verbunden They should always be connected plat). Ils doivent toujours être
werden (Sammelschienen, in a star shape (bus-bars, ring- raccordés en étoile (barre
Ringleiter usw.) und dürfen nie circuit etc.) and may not be fed collectrice par exemple). Dans la
durch Geräte oder Schaltkreise through the instrument or switching mesure du possible, ils ne doivent
hindurch weiterverbunden werden. circuits to further connection pas traverser d’autres appareils, ni
points. des circuits de puissance ou de
commutation.
• Benutzte Erder müssen • Grounds which are used must be • Pour être réellement efficaces, les
regelmäßig auf ihre Wirksamkeit regularly checked for their points de mise à la terre doivent
(Widerstand nach Erde) überprüft efficiency (resistance to ground). être contrôlés régulièrement
werden. (résistance par rapport à la terre).
• Beachten Sie auch unsere • Observe our Security • Nous engageons les opérateurs à
Sicherheitshinweise, die jeder Instructions which accompany all lire attentivement les recomman-
technischen Dokumentation als technical documentation we issue dations de sécurité. Que nous
gesonderte Druckschrift beiliegen. in the form of a separate brochure. joignons à chacune de nos docu-
mentations.

4.2.2 Abschirmen gegen 4.2.2 Shielding against 4.2.2 Blindage contre les
Störungen (EMV) interference (EMV) perturbations (CEM)
Erd- und Potentialver- Check ground and potential Vérification de la différence
hältnisse prüfen ! differences! de potentiel entre la terre et
l’appareil
Bevor Kabelschirme aufgelegt Before cable shields are connected Avant d’effectuer le câblage d’un
werden, müssen die örtlichen Erd- the local ground and potential appareil, il est vivement conseillé
und Potentialverhältnisse beider differences at the ends of the de vérifier les différents potentiels
Auflagestellen geprüft werden. installation must be checked. If de référence.
Werden dabei kritische Potential- critical potential differences are Si ces valeurs ne sont pas
unterschiede festgestellt (siehe found (see section 4) sutiable admissibles (voir le paragraphe 4),
Abschnitt 4), müssen betreiberseitig measures must be undertaken on l’exploitant devra mettre en œuvre
geeignete Maßnahmen im Sinne the part of the end-user regarding les mesures nécessaires au
dieser Erdungsempfehlung these grounding recommendations. rétablissement d’une situation
getroffen werden. normale.
Welches Schirmmaterial? What type of shielding Les différents blindages

material to use?
2
1
Abbildung 1: Figure 1: Fig. 1: Les différents blindages
Wirksame Kabelabschirmungen Efficient cable shielding should if Le blindage d’un câble doit être
sollten möglichst aus gut leitendem possible consist of good conductive constitué d’un matériau particulière-
Material bestehen, wie z.B. verzinntes material, such as tinned or nickel- ment conducteur, tel qu’une tresse de
oder vernickeltes Kupfergeflecht coated copper foil and/or aluminium cuivre zingué ou nickelé et/ou un
und/oder Aluminiumfolie. Stahlgeflecht foil. Steel foil normally serves only for feuillard d’aluminium. Une tresse
dient üblicherweise nur der Armierung mechanical protection of the cable. d’acier sert généralement plutôt à
bzw. dem mechanischen Schutz. assurer la protection mécanique du
câble.
Zu empfehlen sind doppelt abge- Double-shielded cable is Il est recommandé d’utiliser un double
schirmte Kabel also z.B. mit einem recommended, e.g. with an overall blindage : individuel par tresse de
Gesamtschirm (1) aus Kupfergeflecht shield (1) of copper foil and individual cuivre ou feuillard (2) pour un
und Einzelschirmen (2) aus Kupfer- shields (2) of copper or aluminium foil conducteur, une paire, une tierce ou
geflecht oder Folien (see Figure 1). une quarte ; plus un blindage
(siehe Abbildung 1). général (1) en tresse de cuivre.
In besonders kritischen Fällen können In especially critical cases further Dans les cas les plus critiques, des
weitere Verbesserungen erreicht improvements can be made by: précaution supplémentaires peuvent
werden durch: être prises :

• HF-dichte Schutzgehäuse • HF-resistant protective housings • boîtier étanche aux hautes

fréquences (HF)
• abgeschirmte Metallschutz- • Shielded metal protective conduit • gaines métalliques blindées

schläuche mit besonderen with special characteristics in spécialement conçues à cet usage.
Eigenschaften mit denen die which the cable is laid. Metallic Une gaine métallique blindée doit
Verbindungskabel überzogen protective conduit must be être considérée comme un écran à
werden. Metallschutzschläuche regarded as shielding connected at chacune de ses extrémités!
sind wie beidseitig aufgelegte both ends!
Schirme zu sehen!
• Verwenden leitfähiger HF-Dicht- • Use of conductive HF-seals at • presse-étoupes étanches aux

ungen bei Gehäuseeinführungen cable entries to the housing hautes fréquences (HF)
Kabelschirme und Stahl- Must cable shields and Mise à la terre à une ou à
schutzschläuche einseitig protective conduit be deux extrémités ?
oder beidseitig auflegen? connected at one or both
ends?
Kabelschirme und Stahlschutz- Shields and protective conduit must, if Lorsque cela est possible, les
schläuche sollen, wenn möglich possible, be connected to ground at blindages et les gaines de protection
beidseitig aufgelegt werden. both ends. doivent être mis à la terre à chacune
de leurs extrémités.
Früher galt die Regel, Kabelschirme In earlier times the general rule was Jadis, la règle était de ne relier un
nur einseitig aufzulegen, um that shields should be connected only blindage qu’à une seule de ses
Ausgleichsströme (Erdschleifen) zu at one end to avoid equalisation extrémités, afin d’éviter de laisser
vermeiden. currents (ground loops). circuler des courants de compensation
dus à des boucles de terre.
Heute erfordert die elektromagne- Today the requirement for electro- Aujourd’hui, la CEM impose le
tische Verträglichkeit (EMV) meist das magnetic compatibility (EMV) is the contraire dans la plupart des cas !
Gegenteil, also das beidseitige contrary, i.e. connection at both ends.
Auflegen.
Deshalb müssen Ausgleichsströme, Therefore equalisation currents, Dans ces conditions, il faut prendre
verursacht durch örtliche Potential- caused by local potential differences des dispositions visant à neutraliser,
unterschiede, die Schirm, Kabel und which can interfere with the shield, ou tout au moins à limiter les courants
Elektronik zerstören könnten, durch cable and electronics, must be de compensation qui peuvent
geeignete Maßnahmen verhindert eliminated or reduced to small levels perturber les électroniques de mesure.
oder klein gehalten werden. by suitable measures.
Ausgleichströme, die über Abschir- Equalisation currents which flow Les règles suivantes doivent être
mungen fließen, sollten möglichst through shielding must be elimi-nated observées :
vermieden werden. Folgendes ist as far as possible. The following must
unbedingt zu beachten: be unconditionally observed:
• Bei Kabellängen unter 25 m kann • With cable lengths under 25 m this • Lorsque la longueur d’un câble est
dies normalerweise ohne beson- can normally be achieved without inférieure à 25 mètres, aucune
dere Maßnahmen erfolgen, weil bei any special measures since there disposition particulière ne doit
solch kurzen Entfernungen keine will normally not be significant généralement être prise.
erheblichen Potentialunterschiede potential differences over such
zwischen den Auflagepunkten zu short distances.
erwarten sind.
• Bei Kabellängen über 25 m sind • With cable lengths over 25 m the • Lorsque la longueur d’un câble est
die örtlichen Erd- und Potential- local ground and potential supérieure à 25 mètres, la
verhältnisse zu prüfen. Werden differences should be checked. If différence de potentiel entre la
dabei Potentialunterschiede significant potential differences are terre et l’appareil doit être vérifiée.
festgestellt, die Ausgleichsströme found the resultant equalisation Si cette valeur n’est pas voisine de
verursachen können, sind folgende currents can be attenuated using zéro, un courant de compensation
Maßnahmen abzuwägen: the following measures: apparaîtra très vraisemblablement.
Les dispositions suivantes doivent
alors être prises :

• Stromtragfähigkeit des Schirms • Check the current capacity of • vérifier ou calculer la capacité
überprüfen, d.h. durch the shield, i.e. to determine by du blindage à supporter le
Messungen und Berechnungen measurement and calculation courant de compensation ; c’est
feststellen, ob der zu erwar- whether the expected à dire si ce dernier ne risque
tende Ausgleichsstrom Schirm equalisation current will pas d’endommager le blindage
und Kabel schädigen könnte. damage the shield and cable. ou l’un des conducteurs.
• Ist der zu erwartende • If the expected equalisation • si le courant de compensation
Ausgleichsstrom zu groß, um current is too large to be est trop important, il convient :
über den Schirm abgeleitet zu absorbed by the shield, either
werden, muss entweder
• zwischen den unterschiedlichen • an equalisation cable able to carry • soit d’installer un câble
Potentialen eine stromtragfähige the expected current must be d’égalisation des potentiels
Ausgleichsleitung verlegt werden connected between the difference
oder potentials, or
• eine Seite des Kabelschirms nicht • one end of the shield must be • soit raccorder l’une des extrémité
direkt aufgelegt, sondern kapazitiv coupled, not directly but du blindage au travers d’un
(10 ... 100 nF bipolar) an den capacitively (10 … 10 nF bipolar) condensateur(10 à 100 nF
Schirmauflagepunkt angekoppelt to the shield connection point. bipolaire).
werden.
Die Wirksamkeit dieser Maßnahme The effectiveness of this measure L’efficacité de cette méthode doit
muss jedoch überprüft werden. must however be checked before être très sérieusement vérifiée
permanently adopting it. pour chaque cas d’espèce.
Achtung: Note: Attention:

Diese Maßnahme ist in explosions- These measures are not Ces dispositions ne doivent en
gefährdeten Bereichen nicht permissible in explosive areas! aucun cas être mises en œuvre
zulässig! dans le cas d’une installation en
zone explosive !!!
Praktische Hinweise zum Practical hints for Raccordement d’un blindage

Auflegen von Schirmen connecting the shields
Abbildung 2: Figure 2: Figure 2 : Raccordement d’un

blindage

• Schirme sollten nach dem • Shields must be connected to • Un blindage doit être raccordé par
Einführen in ein Gehäuse auf dem ground via the shortest possible le chemin le plus court possible,
kürzesten Weg aufgelegt werden. path immediately after entering the après sont entrée dans un boîtier.
Die vom Schirm nicht überdeckten housing. Individual cable ends La partie des conducteurs qui n’est
Einzeladern an den Kabelenden which are not shielded must be pas recouverte par le blindage doit
sollten so kurz wie irgend möglich kept as short as possible. For être la plus courte possible.
gehalten werden. Für doppelt double-shielded cables this means Lorsque le blindage est double,
geschirmte Kabel bedeutet das, that the overall shield must be celui qui se trouve à l’extérieur doit
dass der aussenliegende Schirm connected by special screws to a être raccordé au boîtier par
direkt beim Eintritt in das Gehäuse, point immediately near the housing l’intermédiaire de presse-étoupes
z.B. über spezielle Verschrau- entry point and the inner shields spécialement adaptés ; celui ou
bungen, und der oder die must be connected to the shield ceux qui se trouvent à l’intérieur
innenliegenden Schirme möglichst connection point as close as doivent cheminer le plus loin
bis zu der Auflagestelle der possible to the cable connection possible sur les conducteurs.
Kabeladern mitgeführt wird. points.
• Schirme sind möglichst großflächig • Shields, which must be as flat and • Le raccordement d’un blindage doit
und impedanzarm, z.B. mittels as resistant-free as possible, must se faire sur une surface importante
Rohrschellen (4) oder Feder- be connected to the grounded bus- et avec une impédance
klammern (3) auf geerdeten bar or mounting panel (1) using négligeable, par exemple en
Sammel-schienen oder Montage- staple brackets (4) or spring serrant une bride (3 ou 4) sur une
platten (1) aufzulegen. Dadurch clamps (3). In this way the shield platine ou une barre collectrice (1).
wird der Schirm (2) ohne Unter- (2) can be fed without a break Ce principe permet de laisser le
brechung weitergeführt bis zur close to the connection point of the blindage (2) recouvrir les
Anschlussstelle des Kabels und die cable and the unshielded portion of conducteurs (5) jusqu'à leur point
unbedeckten Überstände (5) des the cable can be kept extremely de raccordement (voir la figure 2).
Kabels können extrem kurz short (see Fig. 2).
gehalten werden
(siehe Abbildung 2).
• Zusammengedrillte Schirmenden • Shield ends which are twisted • La torsion, l’étamage ou le

sowie angelötete oder angepresste together and cable strands which raccordement de la tresse à un fil
Litzen reduzieren den wirksamen are soldered or pressed together unique réduit très sensiblement la
Querschnitt des Gesamtschirms reduce the effective cross- section du blindage et par là même
auf den eines Einzeldrahtes und sectional area of the total shields son efficacité.
vermindern die Schirmqualität and thus considerably reduce the
erheblich. shield quality.
• Wenn ein Kabelschirm nur einseitig • When a cable shield is to be • Lorsque le blindage ne doit être
aufgelegt werden soll, so muss connected at only one end, care raccordé qu’à une seule de ses
darauf geachtet werden, dass der must be taken that the shield at the extrémités, l’autre extrémité doit
Schirm am anderen Kabelende other end of the cable is not être correctement isolée afin
nicht versehentlich über das inadvertently connected to ground d’éviter tout contact involontaire
Steckergehäuse doch geerdet through a plug housing. The shield avec une masse. Le blindage ne
wird. Der Schirm muss vom must be isolated from the plug doit pas être raccordé à la borne
Steckergehäuse isoliert werden. housing. de mise à la terre d’un boîtier.
• Abschirmende Metallschutz- • Protective metal conduit must be • Une gaine métallique blindée doit
schläuche müssen an beiden connected to the housing concisely être raccordée à chacune de ses
Enden bündig, also ohne Spalten, with suitable screws without any extrémités directement aux boîtiers
mit den Gehäusen durch dazu gap. desquels elle entre ou sort. Ce
passende Verschrau-bungen raccordement se fait par l’intermé-
verbunden werden. diaire de raccords spécialement
adaptés à cet usage.

4.2.3 Richtige Kabelwahl und 4.2.3 Correct cable selection 4.2.3 Choix des types de
-verlegung and installation câbles et modes de câblage
Für den Anschluss von Messwert- For connection of measurement Pour le raccordement des capteurs,
sensoren empfehlen wir sensors we recommend exclusively nous recommandons l’usage exclusif
ausschliesslich unsere doppelt our double-shielded AC-112 de nos câbles AC-112 (4 x 0,5 mm²)
geschirmten Signalkabel AC-112 (4 x 0.5 mm²) for single sensors, or ou AC - 113 (6 x 4 x 0,5 mm²) qui
(4 x 0,5 mm²) für einen, oder AC - 113 our AC-113 (6 x 4 x 0.5 mm²) for up to possèdent un double blindage.
(6 x 4 x 0,5 mm²) für bis zu sechs six sensors.
Sensoren zu verwenden.
Beim Verlegen der Kabel muss auf When connecting the cables the Les points suivants doivent être pris
folgende Punkte geachtet werden: following points must be observed: en compte :
• Signal- und Datenkabel müssen • Signal and data cables must • les câbles transportant des signaux
immer getrennt von Energie- und always be laid seperately or at ou des données ne doivent jamais
Steuerleitungen oder in ausrei- least seperated by sufficient cheminer avec des câbles de
chendem Abstand davon verlegt distance from power or switching puissance ou de commutation. Une
werden. Unvermeidbare cables. Unavoidable crossing of distance suffisante doit toujours
Kreuzungen zwischen diesen these types of cables must always être respectée. Lorsqu’il n’est pas
müssen im rechten Winkel be done at right-angles. possible de procéder autrement, le
verlaufen. croisement des câbles doit toujours
se faire à angle droit.
• Alle nicht benutzten Adern eines • All unused cables must be • tous les conducteurs qui ne sont
Kabels sind einseitig zu erden. grounded at one end. pas utilisés doivent être mis à la
terre à une seule de leurs
extrémités.
• Das Verlegen aller Kabel sollten • All cables must be laid via the • tous les câbles doivent être aussi
auf dem kürzesten Weg unter shortest possible path to prevent courts que possible et éviter de
Vermeidung von Schleifenbildung the formation of loops. former des boucles.
erfolgen.
• Leiter gleichen Potentials sollten • Cables with the same potential • tous les conducteurs qui sont au
möglichst sternförmig, also an must be coupled together in a même potentiel doivent toujours
einem gemeinsamen Punkt star-formation to a common être raccordés en étoile.
miteinander verbunden werden. connection point.
Vierleitertechnik Four-wire technique La technique „4 fils“

Unsere berührungslosen Our non-contacting displacement Nos capteurs sans contact et certains
Wegsensoren und Beschleunigungs- sensors and accelerometers require de nos accéléromètres nécessitent
Sensoren benötigen eine power to operate. Each sensor has une alimentation. Ils possèdent tous
Versorgungsspannung. Sie haben je three connections: trois conducteurs :
drei Anschlüsse:
SIG für das Messsignal, SIG for the measured signal, SIG signal
-24 V für die Spannungsversorgung -24 V for the power requirement -24 V alimentation
und
COM als gemeinsamer Bezugspunkt COM as a common reference point COM commun pour le signal et
für das Messsignal und die for the measured signal and l’alimentation
Spannungsversorgung the power supply.

Der Anschluss an die Messelektronik Nevertheless connection to the Leur raccordement à une électronique
erfolgt jedoch mit einem vieradrigen measurement electronics is made de mesure se fait cependant par un
Kabel (z.B. Typ AC-112). Dabei using a four-wire cable (e.g. type câble à 4 conducteurs (par exemple
werden, wie Abbildung 2-3 zeigt, AC-112). As shown in Figure 2-3 the AC-112). Le signal et l’alimentation
Versorgungsspannung und Mess- power and the measured signal are sont acheminés dans des paires
signal über je ein Adernpaar von der therefore each fed by a separate pair différentes (voir la figure 3) de
Messelektronik bis zur letzten of wires from the measurement l’électronique de mesure vers
Anschlussstelle vor dem Sensor electronics to the last connection point l’oscillateur ou la boîte de jonction.
(Oszillator oder Klemmenschutz- before the sensor (oscillator or Alors seulement, le 0 V de
gehäuse) geführt. Erst dort werden die terminal housing). Only at this point l’alimentation et le 0 V du signal
0V der Versorgung und die 0V für das are the 0V for the power and the 0V (COM) sont reliés ensemble.
Messsignal (COM) miteinander for the measured signal (COM)
verbunden. connected together.
Dies hat den Vorteil, dass durch die This has the advantage that only the Ceci présente l’avantage de séparer le
Signalrückleitung nur der sehr geringe very small signal current flows through circuit du signal dans lequel circule un
Signalstrom fliesst und nicht der the signal pair of wires and not the courant extrêmement réduit, du circuit
wesentlich höhere Rückstrom der considerably higher return current of d’alimentation, dans lequel circule un
Versorgung, wodurch kein signal- the power supply, thus eliminating courant plus important (quelques
verfälschender Spannungsabfall falsification of the measured signal dizaines de milliampères).
entsteht. through a power voltage drop.
Wegsensor Oszillator Eingang Messgerät

Displacement Sensor Oscillator Input measuring instrument
Capteur sans contact Oscillateur Electronique de mesure
SIG SIG
COM COM
Koax -24 V -24 V
0V(GND)
SE
Beschleuigungs-Sensor Klemmenschutzgehäuse Eingang Messgerät

Acceleration Sensor Terminal protective housing Input measuring instrument
Accéléromètre Boîtier de jonction Electronique de mesure
SIG SIG
COM COM
-24 V -24 V
0V(GND)
SE
AUFNEHM1 (060410)
Abb. 3 Vierleitertechnik bei Fig. 3: Four-wire technique with Fig. 3: technique de câblage „4 fils“
berührungslosen Weg- non-contacting displacement pour un capteur sans contact
sensoren (oben) und bei sensor (top) and (en haut) et pour un
Beschleunigungs- accelerometers (bottom) accéléromètre (en bas)
sensoren (unten)
4.2.4 Zusätzliche Entstör- 4.2.4 Additional interference- 4.2.4 Mise en œuvre de

maßnahmen suppression measures dispositifs d’antiparasitage
Wenn am Montageort Störeinflüsse When the influence of interference is Lorsqu‘une installation est parasitée
herrschen, die die vom Gesetzgeber so predominant that the limit values au delà des limites admises par la loi
vorgeschriebenen Grenzwerte prescribed by the authorities are comme par exemple pour une
überschreiten, z.B. bei Altanlagen, exceeded, e.g. in old plants, additional installation ancienne, l’exploitant doit
müssen evtl. betreiberseitig interference-suppression measures prévoir des moyens supplémentaires
zusätzliche Entstörmaßnahmen an der must be undertaken on the part of the d’antiparasitage.
Störquelle getroffen werden. end-user at the source of the
interference.
Ist dies nicht möglich, können weitere If this is not possible further En voici quelques exemples :
Entstörmaßnahmen getroffen werden. interference-suppression measures
Nachfolgend einige Beispiele: can be introduced. The following are
some examples:

• HF-Entstörfilter (Tiefpassfilter) oder • HF-interference filters (low-pass) • HF filtres haute fréquence (passe-
Entstördrosseln zur Dämpfung or interference chokes for damping bas) ou self d’antiparasitage pour
strahlungs- oder leitungsgebun- transmitted or received HF- atténuer l’effet des perturbations
dener HF-Störungen. interference. hautes fréquences qui peuvent
agir par conduction ou par
rayonnement.
• Ferritkerne (Klammerfilter aus • Ferrite cores (Ferrite filters) of • noyaux de ferrite possédant
Ferrit) verschiedener Frequenz- various frequency bands, as a diverses bandes passantes et
bänder, als einfache Alternative zu simple alternative to HF-filters. pouvant être utilisés comme une
HF-Filtern. alternative au filtre haute
fréquence.
• Netzfilter bei Störungen auf der • Power filters for interference on the • filtres secteur, dans le cas où
Netzleitung power supply l’alimentation est parasitée
Die o.a. Geräte sind möglichst nahe The above-mentioned devices must
an der Signalquelle- bzw. Senke zu be installed as close as possible to the
installieren. signal source.
• Funkenlöschbeschaltungen bei • Spark-suppression equipment in • dispositifs anti-étincellle dans le

geschalteten Induktivitäten. the case of inductive switching. cas de charges inductives comme
un relais ou un commutateur.
Sie müssen möglichst nahe an der This must be installed as close as Ces différents dispositifs doivent
Störquelle installiert werden (z.B. possible to the source of the être installés le plus près possible
nahe an Relais, Schaltvorgängen interference (e.g. close to relays, de la source des parasites.
auf Netzleitungen usw.). contactors for power switching
etc.).
5 Verbinden von 0V- 5 Connection of 0V 5 Raccordement du

Bezugspotentialen reference potentials potentiel de référence
(0V)
Im Gegensatz zum vorherigen In contrast to the previous section this Ce chapitre décrit les mesures à
Abschnitt geht es hier nicht um das section deals not with the elimination prendre pour éviter la détérioration des
Verhindern von Störein- und - of interference emission and câbles et des circuits électroniques.
ausstrahlung, also um die EMV- immission, or EMV compatibility, but
Festigkeit, sondern in erster Linie um first of all with elimination of damage
das Vermeiden von Schäden an to cables and circuits.
Kabeln und Schaltkreisen.
Die (0V-) Bezugspotentiale elektri- The 0V reference potential of electrical Les potentiels de référence (0V) de
scher Geräte, die Mess-, Steuer- oder instruments which exchange différents appareils électroniques qui
Datensignale austauschen, müssen measurement, control or data signals échangent des signaux de mesure ou
funktionsbedingt miteinander must be functionally connected with de commande et/ou des données
verbunden werden. one another. doivent être reliés entre eux.
Dabei können örtliche Potentialunter- Local potential differences which Lorsque ces potentiels de référence
schiede unerwünschte Ausgleichs- cause undesirable equalisation présentent des différences, ils
ströme verursachen, die zu Signal- currents can cause falsification of the génèrent des courants de compen-
verfälschung oder im Extremfall zur signals or, in extreme cases, lead to sation qui peuvent perturber les
Zerstörung von Kabeln und damage of cables and circuits. signaux ou, dans certains cas
Schaltkreisen führen können. extrêmes, peuvent détériorer les
câbles et les circuits électroniques.
Folgende Fälle sind zu unterscheiden: The following cases must be Il convient de distinguer les cas
distinguished: suivants :

Potentialfreie Verbindungen Potential-free connection Potentiel flottant

• Die Signalein- bzw. -ausgänge der • The signal inputs or outputs of the • Le potentiel d’un signal est flottant
zu verbindenden Geräte sind instrument are potential-free, i.e. lorsqu’il n’a pas de relation fixe
potentialfrei, also galvanisch von galvanically separate from fixed avec un potentiel de référence.
festen Potentialen getrennt (z.B. potentials (e.g. through C’est le cas lorsque les signaux
durch Optokoppler, Übertrager): optocouplers, transfer device): sont galvaniquement isolés, par
exemple par un optocoupleur ou
un convertisseur.
Hier sind keine besonderen In this case no special measures • Aucune disposition particulière ne
Maßnahmen erforderlich. Dies gilt are necessary. This is also valid if doit généralement être prise. Ceci
auch dann, wenn eines der one of the associated instruments est également vrai lorsque le
beteiligten Geräte nicht is not potential-free. potentiel du signal de l’un des
potentialfrei ist. appareils est référencé
Nicht potentialfreie Non potential-free Potentiel référencé

Verbindungen connection
• Die Signalein- bzw. -ausgänge der • The signal inputs or outputs of the • Le potentiel d’un signal est
Geräte sind nicht potentialfrei, instrument are non potential-free, référencé lorsqu’il a une relation
d.h. die Bezugspotentiale der i.e. the reference potential of the fixe avec un potentiel de référence
Geräte sind mit dem Erdpotential instrument is connected to the local ou bien avec sa tension
ihres jeweiligen Montageortes oder ground potential of the respective d’alimentation. Les règles
der örtlichen Spannungs- mounting location or the local suivantes doivent être observées :
versorgung verbunden. Hier gilt: power supply.
• Bei Kabellängen unter 25 m • With cable lengths under 25 m • Lorsque la longueur d’un câble
kann dies normalerweise ohne this can normally be done est inférieure à 25 mètres,
besondere Maßnahmen without any special measures aucune disposition particulière
erfolgen, weil bei solch kurzen because with such short ne doit être prise car il ne peut
Entfern-ungen normalerweise distances no damaging généralement pas exister de
keine schädigenden Potential- potential differences between différence de potentiel
unterschiede zwischen den the connection points are suffisamment importante pour
Auflagepunkten zu erwarten expected. Nevertheless we endommager les câbles ou les
sind. Trotzdem empfehlen wir recommend that the ground circuits. Il est cependant
sicherheitshalber die Erd- und and potential differences be toujours recommandé de
Potentialverhältnisse zu checked for safety reasons. vérifier à titre préventif la
überprüfen. différence de potentiel entre la
terre et l’appareil.
• Bei Kabellängen über 25 m • With cable lengths of over • Lorsque la longueur d’un câble
sind auf jeden Fall die örtlichen 25 m the ground and potential est supérieure à 25 mètres, la
Erd- und Potentialverhältnisse differences should always be différence de potentiel entre la
zu prüfen. Werden dabei checked. If potential diffe- terre et l’appareil doit être
Potentialunterschiede rences are found which will vérifiée dans tous les cas. Si
festgestellt, die verfälschende cause falsification or damaging cette valeur n’est pas voisine
bzw. schädigende Ausgleich- equalisation currents, the de zéro, un courant de
ströme verursachen können, following measures should be compensation apparaîtra très
sind folgende Maßnahmen initiated: vraisemblablement:
abzuwägen: Il convient alors :
• Zwischen den unterschiedlichen • A potential equalisation bar or • soit d’installer un câble

Potentialen muss eine Potential- cable of sufficient current carrying d’égalisation des potentiels ; ce
ausgleichschiene (PAS) oder - capacity, must be chosen and câble aura alors une section
leitung von ausreichender Strom- must be installed between the suffisante pour absorber sans
tragfähigkeit verlegt werden, d.h. different potentials, i.e. the cross- dommage le courant de
der Querschnitt der Ausgleichs- sectional area of the conductor compensation
leitung muss so gewählt werden, must be chosen so that the
dass der zu erwartende expected equalisation current can
Ausgleichsstrom sicher aufge- be carried with safety, or
nommen wird oder

• die Schaltkreise müssen mittels • The circuits must be coupled using • soit d’installer un convertisseur sur
Trennverstärker o.ä. entkoppelt differential amplifiers. la ligne de mesure.
werden.
• Manche Geräte haben Bezugs- • Some instruments have a • Certains appareils possèdent un
potentiale die angehoben, also reference potential which is not potentiel de référence flottant, c’est
nicht auf das lokale Erdpotential referenced to the local ground à dire qu’il n’est pas relié à la
bezogen sind. Sie dürfen nicht mit potential. These instruments must terre. Dans ce cas, il est impératif
Erdpotential verbunden werden! In not be coupled with the ground de mettre un convertisseur en
diesem Fall muss mittels Trenn- potential! In these cases œuvre.
verstärker entkoppelt werden differential amplifiers must be
used for the coupling!
6 Potential und 6 Potential and 6 „Potentiel“ et

Bezugspotential reference potential „potentiel de
référence“
Was versteht man unter What is electrical Potentiel électrique
elektrischem Potential? potential?
Bei allen elektrischen Einrichtungen, With all electrical equipment, on the La notion de „potentiel“ est fonda-
sowohl auf der Erzeugungs- als auch generation and also the user side and mentale pour traiter des liaisons entre
auf der Verbraucherseite und auch bei all associated equipment coupled with appareils électriques ou électroniques
allen mit diesen leitend verbundenen these the concept of „Potential“ plays Elle est particulièrement importante
Einrichtungen spielt der Begriff an important role. This is especially pour assurer la sécurité de
"Potential" eine wichtige Rolle. Dies true in the interest of safety. l’installation..
gilt im besonderen für die Belange der
Sicherheit.
Die exakte mathematisch-physika- The exact mathematical and physical La définition physique (et
lische Definition des Begriffs Potential definition of the concept of potential is mathématique) de la notion de
ist schwerverständlich und für die difficult to understand and, as far as it „potentiel“ sort du cadre de cette
Betrachtung im Rahmen dieser is concerned within the framework of documentation.
Erdungsempfehlung eher ungeeignet. this grounding recommendation, not
appropriate.
Einfacher und ausreichend ist es, It is simpler and also sufficient to Un „potentiel“ doit être considéré
Potentiale als elektrische Zustände understand potential as the electrical comme un état électrique d’un point de
verschiedener Raumpunkte zu condition of different locations which is l’espace. La tension est une grandeur
verstehen, die die Ursache für the cause for an electrical voltage to définissant la différence entre les
elektrische Spannungen zwischen exist between them. The voltage is potentiels de deux points.
diesen sind. Die Spannung wiederum then a measure of the difference in
ist dann ein Maß für den Potential- potential which exists between two
unterschied zwischen zwei Punkten. points.

Was ist ein What is a reference Potentiel de référence

Bezugspotential? potential?
Wie der o.a. Definition zu entnehmen As can be deduced from the above Le paragraphe précédent décrit le
ist, ist das elektrische Potential eines description, the electrical potential of a „potentiel“ d’un point comme étant une
Punktes eine relative Größe. point is a relative value. grandeur relative.
Um eine absolute Aussage machen zu To be able to make a definitive Pour pouvoir donner une valeur
können, muss ein Bezugspotential statement a reference potential which absolue, il faut définir au préalable un
definiert werden, auf das dann alle is to be the reference for all other „potentiel dit de référence“ auquel les
anderen bezogen werden. Normaler- potentials must be defined. Under potentiels de tous les autres points
weise wird das Potential eines normal circumstances the potential of pourront être comparés. En règle
geerdeten Punktes gewählt, das den a grounded point is selected and is générale, le potentiel de la terre est
Wert Null (Volt) erhält. given the value „zero“ (volt). pris comme référence. On lui donne la
valeur „0 V“.
Die Rückleiter (Nulleiter) aller The return line (neutral line) of all Tous les conducteurs de référence
Verbraucher in einem Versorgungs- users in the supply network is then des appareils d’une installation sont
netz sind dann an dieses Bezugs- connected to this reference potential. généralement reliés à ce potentiel de
potential angeschlossen. référence.
Warum können Bezugs- Why can reference potentials Pourquoi des potentiels de
potentiale unterschiedlich differ? référence peuvent-ils être
sein? différents ?
Im allgemeinen wird nicht nur der In general not only the central En règle générale, on désigne par
zentrale Bezugspunkt, also z.B. der reference point, e.g. the ground point « potentiel de référence », non
Erdungspunkt an einer Transformator- in a transformer station, is designated seulement le point central de mise à la
station, als Bezugspotential as the reference potential, but terre, mais également tous les
bezeichnet, sondern auch alle mit everything connected with the same conducteurs qui lui sont reliés, ainsi
diesem direkt verbundenen Rückleiter return line and bus-bar, as well as que les autres points qui ont été mis
und Sammelschienen, sowie additionally established grounds. directement à la terre.
zusätzlich eingerichtete Erder.
Da alle diese Verbindungen - auch die Because all these connections - Etant donné que ces conducteurs,
Erde - sowohl ohmschen, induktiven including the earth - possess ohmic, mais également la terre, présentent
als auch kapazitiven Widerstand induc-tive or capacitive resistance, une impédance ohmique, inductive et
besitzen und normalerweise die Rück- and normally the return current from capacitive qui dépend de leur
ströme der Verbraucher hin zur the users is fed back to the supply, longueur, on doit considérer qu’ils
Versorgung führen, kommt es auf ihrer this results in a voltage drop over the créent une chute de tension et donc
gesamten Länge zu Spannungsfällen, entire length of the network which is de potentiel. Les valeurs des
die einem Potentialgefälle gleichzu- equivalent to the potential drop. The potentiels locaux de référence, par
setzen sind. Die Abweichung des difference in potential between the rapport au point central de mise à la
lokalen Bezugspotentials vom local reference potential and the terre dépend donc du courant de
zentralen Bezugspunkt hängt also von central reference point is dependent compensation et de l’impédance des
der Stromstärke und dem Widerstand therefore on the strength of the current conducteurs.
des jeweiligen Rückleiters ab. and the resistance of the respective
return line.
Abbildung 4 zeigt an einem einfachen Figure 4 illustrates an example of the La figure 4 montre sur un exemple
Beispiel die oben beschriebenen above described relationship in the simple, la relation qui existe entre des
Zusammenhänge bei der Verwendung case of a reference potential bus-bar. potentiels locaux de référence
einer Bezugspotential-Sammel- Figure 5 shows the corresponding lorsqu’ils sont reliés par un
schiene. Abbildung 5 zeigt die diagram when the earth is used as the conducteur. La figure 5 montre le
entsprechende Darstellung, wenn als return line. même exemple lorsque les potentiels
Rückleiter die Erde benutzt wird. locaux de référence sont seulement
reliés à la terre.

Abb. 4 Beispiel für das Gefälle des Fig. 4: Example for the drop in Fig.e 4: Potentiels locaux de
Bezugspotentials reference potential référence lorsqu’ils sont reliés par un
conducteur
Das dargestellte Netz besteht aus The network illustrated above consists Le circuit qui est représenté sur la
einer Transformatorstation als of a transformer station as the power figure 4 est constitué d’un
Stromversorger an dem Ort (0) und supply at location (0) and two users at transformateur qui génère un courant
zwei Verbrauchern an den Orten (A) locations (A) and (B). électrique au point (0) et de deux
und (B). récepteurs (A) et (B).
Der Einfachheit halber ist eine A single-pole diagram is selected for Pour simplifier l’explication, on ne
einpolige Darstellung gewählt. the sake of simplicity. prend en compte ici qu’un seul
conducteur.
Der Stromrückleiter ist eine Sammel- The currrent return is a bus-bar which Les impédances ohmiques, inductives
schiene, die gleichzeitig das Bezugs- shows at the same time the reference et capacitives de ligne sont désignées
potential darstellt. Stellvertretend für potential. The resistances RL1 and par RL1 entre (0) et (A) et par RL2
den ohmschen, induktiven und RL2 represent the ohmic, inductive entre (A) et (B). Les courants de
kapazitiven Widerstand der Sammel- and capacitive resistance of the bus- compensation correspondants sont
schiene sind die Widerstände RL1 und bar and also designate the sections désignés par I1+I2 entre (0) et (A)
RL2 der beiden Teilabschnitte von of the circuit from (0) to (A) and from et I2 entre (A) et (B).
(0) bis (A) und von (A) bis (B) (A) to (B).
eingezeichnet.
Die Rückströme I1+I2 und I2 verur- The return currents I1+I2 and I2 cause Les différences de potentiel corres-
sachen an diesen Widerständen voltage drops at these resistances, pondantes sont désignées par
Spannungsfälle, die zur Anhebung des and this leads to an increase in the δUA = [(I1+I2) x RL1] pour le point (A)
Bezugspotentials um den Wert reference potential by a value et δUB = [(I1+I2) x RL1 + I2 x RL2] pour
δUA = (I1+I2) x RL1 am Punkt (A) und δUA = (I1+I2) x RL1 at point (A) and le point (B).
δUB = (I1+I2) x RL1 + I2 x RL2 am δUB = (I1+I2) x RL1 + I2 x RL2 at
Punkt (B) führen. point (B).
Das darunter liegende Diagramm zeigt The diagram below illustrates the Le diagramme montre les relations qui
die Verhältnisse als grafische relationships graphically. existent entre les potentiels.
Darstellung.

Abb. 5 Im Unterschied zu Abb. 4 Fig. 5: In contrast to Figure 4 here Fig. 5 Potentiels locaux de
wird hier die Erde als Rückleiter the earth is used as the return line. référence lorsqu’ils sont reliés
benutzt. Die eingezeichneten The resistances RE symbolise the directement à la terre. RE1 et RE2
Widerstände RE symbolisieren den respective earth resistance. Here symbolisent les impédances entre les
jeweiligen Erdwiderstand. Auch hier again this results in an increase in the différents points de mise à la terre. Il
kommt es zu Anhebungen des reference potential, which however is existe bien ici des différences de
Bezugspotentials, dessen Verlauf not linear here as in the case of Fig. 4, potentiels entre les différents points,
jedoch, bedingt z.B. durch die because of the spatial distribution of mais elle ne sont pas réparties de
räumliche Widerstandsverteilung der resistance of the earth. manière linéaire comme dans le cas
Erde, nicht linear ist, wie im Beispiel de la figure 4.
der Abbildung 4.
Was bewirken What influence does Effets d’une différence de

Potentialunterschiede? potential difference have? potentiel
Werden zwei Punkte verschiedenen If two points having a potential Lorsque deux points qui présentent
Potentials miteinander leitend difference are connected together an une différence de potentiel sont reliés
verbunden, so fliesst ein elektrischer electrical current flows from the point entre eux, il existe un courant
Strom vom höheren zum niedrigeren with the higher potential to the point électrique qui circule du potentiel le
Potential. Die dabei auftretende with the lower potential. The strength plus haut vers le potentiel le plus bas.
Stromstärke hängt von der Höhe des of this resultant current depends on L’intensité de ce courant dépend de la
Potentialunterschieds (Spannung), von the magnitude of the potential différence de potentiel, de la
der Leitfähigkeit der Verbindung, und difference between the two points conductibilité des conducteurs et de la
vom Innenwiderstand der mit den (voltage), the current-carrying capacity résistance interne des différents
Punkten verbundenen Einrichtungen of the connection between them and appareils qui sont raccordés.
ab. the internal resistance of the
equipment connecting the two points.
Man unterscheidet zwischen gewollten A differentiation is made between Ces différences de potentiel peuvent
und ungewollten Potentialunter- forced and unforced potential être volontaires ou involontaires :
schieden: differences:
• Gewollte Potentialunterschiede, • Forced potential differences, such • volontaires : sont créées par des
also nutzbare elektrische Span- as usable electrical voltage, is générateurs ou des batteries
nungen, werden von Generatoren created by batteries and d’accumulateurs, dans le but
und Batterien zur Bereitstellung generators in the preparation of d’alimenter les circuits électriques
elektrischer Energie erzeugt. electrical energy.
• Die ungewollten Potentialunter- • Unforced potential differences, • involontaires : sont créées soit
schiede, wie statische Aufladungen such as static electricity and, as par l’accumulation de charges
und vor allem die für unsere discussed in this article, the électriques statiques, soit, dans le
Betrachtung relevanten Verschie- relevant displacement of the cadre de cet exposé, par des
bungen von Bezugspotentialen reference potential by voltage impédances de ligne qui génèrent
durch Spannungsfälle in strom- drops in return lines in which des courants de compensation qui
durchflossenen Rückleitern, current is flowing, can lead to peuvent endommager les
können dagegen zu Störungen interference and also damage to installations.
oder sogar zur Zerstörung von cables and circuits.
Leitungen und Schaltkreisen
führen.

Diese Seite wurde für eigene Notizen frei gelassen.

This page is left blank for your notes.
Notes personnelles.

VIBROCONTROL 1100
C01 / C02 / C11 / C12
Technische Dokumentation
Technical Documentation
Documentation Technique
C 102 844.002
All rights reserved.
No part of this technical documentation may be reproduced
without prior written permission of Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH.
Subject to change without prior notice.
Copyright 2011 by Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH, D-64293

Contents VC 1100
Contents
VIBROCONTROL 1100 - C01 / C02 / C11 / C12
1 Overview
2 Technical Data
3 Connectors and Interfaces
4 Built-in Operating Panel and Display

Error messages
5 List of Setup Parameters
6 Installation and Commissioning and Maintenance
© VC1100GB/contents C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7 → Jan.. 2011 C 102 844.002 Page 1 of 2
VC 1100 Contents
Instrument types - Overview
Instrument Type Supply Voltage Bearing Condition
230 V AC
VC 1100 C01 YES
115 V AC
VC 1100 C02 24 V DC YES
230 V AC
VC 1100 C11 NO
115 V AC
VC 1100 C12 24 V DC NO
The instrument types C01, C02, C11 and C12 listed in the table above are described in the
VIBROCONTROL 1100 documentation.
Apart from the bearing condition, which is not applicable to the instrument types C11 and
C12, the descriptions for all instruments are the same.
Page 2 of 2 Jan. 2011 © VC1100GB/contents C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7 →

Overview VC 1100
1 Overview
VIBROCONTROL 1100 is a 2 channel microprocessor controlled machine
condition monitor. Vibration velocity sensors or vibration acceleration sensors
(accelerometers) are used to sense the vibrations from a machine.
ATTENTION
If the VIBROCONTROL 1100 was converted to a CCS version, only
constant current-supplied acceleration sensors can be attached!
Consider the supplement page!
VIBROCONTROL 1100 is a compact machine monitor. All components, like

power supply, connectors, signal conditioners, microprocessor and operator
panel are integrated to one splash-proofed housing.
1
SE VIBROCONTROL 1100 RS 232 25 TD1
SE
25
1 TE=0V internal
2 (Data 26 RD1 26
2 intern
3 only) 27 SG1 27
+ 3 Output 1
4 4 Ausgang 1 28 TD2 28
5 + 5 Output 2 29 RD2 29
6 6 Ausgang 2 30 SG2 30
7 31
7 Buffer A 31
32
8 8 OK-Relais 32 BA
9 33
9 Buffer B 33
34
10 10 34 BB
35
11 11 Relais K1 Reset 35
36 36
12 12
Esc P M/Ent
13 13
14 14 Relais K2
37
15 15 Pickup 37 DC
16 16 Chan. A 38 38
Aufn. 39
17 17 Relais K3 Kanal A 39 COM
18 40 SIG 40
18
19 L 19 Power supply
20 20 Versorgungs-
spannung
21
PE 21 Jumper Pickup 41 DC 41
22 Brücke Chan. B 42
22 Aufn. 42
230/115Vac
23 23 Serien Nr. Kanal B 43 COM 43
N 24 Series no. 44 SIG
24 44
N° de serie
VC11TOTA (951030)
Figure 1-1: Top view of a VIBROCONTROL 1100 with cover removed
VIBROCONTROL 1100 is complete; there are no options. Three alarm

relays, one OK-relay, two analog outputs, two buffered outputs, remote I/O
interface, and signal conditioners are built-in.
There are no jumpers or potentiometers. All functions are completely
microprocessor controlled and are configured using the built-in operator
panel or via the remote interface with a computer or process controller.
The wiring is done through removable terminal strip connectors.

Vibration analyzers or data collectors can be connected to the buffered
outputs without interrupting the monitoring functions.
© VC1100GB/overview C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7→ Jan. 2011 1-1

VC 1100 Overview
Measured Values
Displayed Parameters
The measured values can be displayed in metric or English units:
Measured Parameter Abbreviation Unit

Vibration Displacement s mm mils
Velocity v mm/s ips
2
Vibration Acceleration a g m/s
If accelerometers are used, the Bearing Condition of rolling element bearings

can be measured and monitored.
The unit for Bearing Condition is BCU.
Bearing Condition --- BCU
BCU Scaling Factor

Due to the BCU scaling factor, the BCU measuring result can be multiplied
with a factor. This factor is determined with parameter J19 for channel A and
J20 for channel B in the range between 0.1 and 10. Factor 1 displays the
measuring result not scaled.
The BCU scaling factor makes it possible to set the measuring result to a
defined inital value in order to compare several measuring points. The BCU
scaling factor is to be employed preferrably with new bearings.
Note:
The selected scaling factor must be considered when setting the BCU limit
value. If for instance the measuring result is divided by two due to the scaling
factor, also the limit value must be divided by two.
1-2 Jan. 2011 © VC1100GB/overview C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7 →

Overview VC 1100
Example how to use the BCU scaling factor

In case of BCU measurements, the measuring result depends on various
factors, e.g. on the place of the sensor installation, on the type of connection
(e.g. tightening torque of the sensor) etc. The consequence may be different
measuring results with identical machines and the same bearing condition
units.
To enable a clear comparison of the single measuring points (change of the
bearing condition over a longer measuring period), by means of the BCU
scaling factor (parameters J19, J20) the measuring results can be set to the
same initial value (desired value at the beginning of the measurement) for
each measuring point.
Carry out scaling

Input the scaling factor 1 for the respective measuring points.
Acquire the current measuring result.
From the desired BCU initial value and the current measuring result of the
respective measuring point, the BCU scaling factor J19 or J20 is calculated
with the following formula:
desired initial value

J 19 =
current measuring result
After the parameter input of all scaling factors, the respective measuring
point must display the desired BCU initial value.
BCU averaging
The BCU value may vary depending on the operating conditions of a
machine, for example due to varying loading conditions.
A defective anti-friction element which regulary changes its position in such a
way that the damaged part comes into contact with the bearing running
surface only after several revolutions, will also cause varying BCU values.
Variations of that kind do not allow the conclusion that the bearing is
damaged.
The measured value can be averaged by means of a filter with settable time
constant (averaging time 10 ... 3600 secs.) in order that these "variations"
(which do not represent the normal condition of the machine) don't cause an
alarm message.
The bigger the selected averaging time
− the more stable the measured value (particularly important for trend
considerations)
− the more delayed the response behaviour of the limit value monitoring.
The averaging be switched on and off separately for channel A and channel
B (parameters J15 ... J18).

VC 1100 Overview
Measuring Ranges
The measuring ranges are microprocessor controlled and can be selected
continuously within the limits defined in the following table:
Sensor : Vibration acceleration sensor

Signal detection : Root mean sqare value
Measured Parameter Measuring Range Unit

Min Max
2
Vibration Acceleration 0 ... 4.00 0 ... 800 m/s
g
0 ... 0.40 0 ... 80.0
Vibration Velocity 0 ... 5.00 0 ... 999 mm/s
0 ... 0.20 0 ... 40.0 ips
Sensor : Vibration Velocity sensor

Signal detection : Root mean sqare value

Min Max
Vibration Velocity 0 ... 5.00 0 ... 150 mm/s
0 ... 0.20 0 ... 6.00 ips
Vibration Displacement 0 ... 50.0 0 ... 333 µm
0 ... 2.00 0 ... 13.3 mils
Multiply values by 1.41 for peak-values and by 2.82 for peak-to-peak values.
The largest acceptable number is 999.
The measuring ranges for BCU-Monitoring are independent of the measuring

ranges for vibration monitoring.

Min Max
Bearing Condition 0 ... 1.00 0 ... 140 BCU

Overview VC 1100
Filters
Machine vibrations are sensed by the vibration velocity sensors or
accelerometers. Which sensor to use depends on the application. The
following table lists the filters that may be used with the different measured
parameters and sensor types:
Measured Parameter Transducer Filter

v a
Vibration displacement x 10 Hz ... 1000 Hz
Vibration Velocity x x 1 Hz ... 1000 Hz
x x 3 Hz ... 1000 Hz
x x 10 Hz ... 1000 Hz
x 10 Hz ... 10 kHz
Vibration Acceleration x 3 Hz ... 1000 Hz
x 10 Hz ... 1000 Hz
x 3 Hz ... 10 kHz
10 Hz ... 10 kHz
Bearing Condition x 15 Hz ... 50 kHz
Sensor : v = Vibration Velocity Sensor

a = Accelerometer
*) Fulfills the requirements of International Standard ISO 2372
Signal Conditioning and Signal Detection Type

The built-in signal conditioners are microprocessor controlled. Gain factors,
filters, and the integrator are set automatically. The settings are determined
by the microprocessor from the configuration.
Linearization
The characteristic of vibration velocity sensors is not linear in the lower
frequency range, i.e. with frequencies around 10 Hz.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 corrects this nonlinearity with a built-in linearization
circuit (Standard fo = 8 Hz / the special design fo = 15 Hz is identifield by an
adhesive label inside the instruments). The result is a linear frequency
response characteristic for the total measuring system down to 1 Hz.
The linearization circuit can be activated or deactivated by means of
parameter input (IO6).
Settling Time and Cycle Times

Electronic components like amplifiers, filters, etc. need a certain amount of
time to provide the correct output signal after the input signal has been
switched or changed.
This time is called settling time. Components used to measure low
frequencies have longer settling times than components used to measure
higher frequencies.

VC 1100 Overview
VIBROCONTROL 1100
can be configured as a single channel monitor or a 2 channel monitor.
Single Channel Monitor (Vibration and Bearing Condition)

Operating as a single channel monitor, settling times are not required, since
the vibration signal is not switched from channel A to channel B. The
configuration, filter characteristic and gain, etc. of the Vibration Signal
Conditioner and the Bearing Condition Detector do not need to be changed;
therefore the vibration signal is measured continuously.
Cycle Time: Built-in Display 0.5 s

Alarm level comparison 0.25 s
2 Channel Monitor (Vibration)

The vibration signals of channel A and B are switched alternately
(multiplexed) to the Vibration Signal Conditioner.
For each switch between channel A and B, the Vibration Signal Conditioner
is automatically re-configured and settling times are required.
The total time for one measurement consists of the settling time and the
measurement time. The measurement time is always 3 seconds.
Outside the measuring times, the current display values of the other channel
are frozen, the current measured value, however, is monitored in intervals of
0.25 seconds.
The following table shows the settling times and the cycle times (sum of
settling and measuring time) for different functions and setups of the
Vibration Signal Conditioner. Different setups can be used for channel A and
B. The total cycle time is the sum of the cycle times for channel A and B.
Activated Function Settling Time Cycle Time

High Pass Filter: 1 Hz 1.75 s 4.75 s
High Pass Filter: 3 Hz 1.00 s 4.00 s
High Pass Filter.: 10 Hz ISO 1.25 s 4.25 s
High Pass Filter: Special 1.75 s 4.25 s
Integrator 6.00 s 9.00 s
Linearization Circuit: 5.75 s 8.75 s
If more than one function has been selected, the function with the longest
settling time determines the total settling time.
2 Channel Monitor (Vibration and Bearing Condition)

Since VIBROCONTROL 1100 is equipped with a Bearing Condition Detector,
the measurement of Bearing Condition is independent of the vibration
measurement.
The settling time is 2.75 s and the measuring time is 1.25 s.

Overview VC 1100
Monitoring
Each measuring channel has three limit values. Two limit values for
monitoring the vibration level, (lim_1 and lim_2), and one limit value for
Bearing Condition (lim_b). Each limit value can be set individually.
Each limit value can be set to any value between 10 % and 100 % of the
measuring range. Larger or smaller limit values are not accepted and will
generate an error message
For each limit value an alarm delay time between 1 and 99 seconds can be
selected. Limit value exceedance is only acknowledged if the monitored
signal remains above the limit value for a period of time longer than the
selected delay time. When acknowledged, the event in entered into the 'Log
Book', and if it is configured to do so, the appropriate relay trips
In the 2 channel mode the alarm delay time is related to the measurement
cycle of the appropriate channel. Two cases have to be considered:
Case 1
The measured value exceeds the limit value and the alarm delay time is
shorter than the remaining measurement time of this cycle. If the measured
value stays above the limit value, the alarm event is acknowledged after the
alarm delay time.
Case 2
The measured value exceeds the limit value and the alarm delay time is
longer than the remaining measurement time of this cycle. At the end of the
measurement cycle, the alarm delay time is suspended. If the measured
value still exceeds the limit value at the beginning of the next measurement
cycle, the alarm delay time is resumed. This procedure is continued until the
end of the alarm delay time. At this point the alarm event is acknowledged. In
case 2 the alarm delay time is prolonged by the measurement cycle of the
other channel.
Log Book
All events are stored in a circular buffer using short notation. This buffer can
store up to 99 events.
Events are:
Power Up; limit value exceedance; reset instructions; and internal errors
detected by the self monitoring.
If the Log Book capacity is exceeded, the "oldest" event is deleted and all
stored events are shifted one position, freeing space to store the new event.
The Log Book can be displayed on the built-in display or read via the remote
interface.
Each Log Book entry begins with an "H", (for History) followed by a two digit
running number and a 'short' notation of the event.

VC 1100 Overview
Example:
H03 K1 Lim1 A
Meaning:
H03 Label of Log Book entry
K1 Relay K1 tripped
Lim1 A because limit value lim_1 of channel A has been exceeded.
The Log Book is deleted every time the VIBROCONTROL 1100 is powered
up. It can also be deleted using the built-in operator panel or via the serial
interface.
Relays
Three relays are provided which are activated on alarm exceedance if so
programmed.
They are designated as K1, K2, and K3.
Programming the Relays

Relay operation is defined by the setup parameters:
1. Which limit value controls which relay.
2. Latching or Non-Latching Mode.
3. Energized or de-energized Operation.
4. Control a relay by combining several limit values using a logical OR or
AND statement.
Comment to 1.
Limit value exceedances can be configured as single events or grouped
events.
A configuration that is commonly used is, lim_1A and lim_1B control relay
K1, and lim_2A and lim_2B control relay K2.
Comment to 2.
Latching Mode
The relay remains latched (tripped) until it is reset using the control panel,
reset switch, or via the remote interface.
Non-Latching Mode
The relay is automatically reset when the measured value drops below the
limit value.

Overview VC 1100
Comment to 3.
This choice depends on the user's philosophy. What is important though, is
preventing a false relay trip if power to the VIBROCONTROL 1100 is
disconnected.
Mode No Alarm Alarm

Normally Energized Relay active Relay not active
Normally De-Energized Relay not active Relay active
Comment to 4.
AND
Several limit values control one relay. This relay is tripped only if all limit
values are exceeded.
OR
Several limit values control one relay. This relay is tripped if at least one limit
value is exceeded.
Note:
If a measuring channel or a limit value has been set to "not active" ("N") and
this limit value is combined with an AND, this logical condition can never
become "true". Therefore the alarm indication can never be activated.
OK-Monitoring
The OK-Monitoring is used to report malfunctions and/or data failure of the
program and data stores, electric damages or the failure of the sensor and
its connection lines. The monitoring covers an "External range recording" of
the vibration signal. Errors caused by cable breakage, short circuit or earth
fault of the signal lines are recognized, reported and written into the log
book.
Since the OK-Relay is normally energized, the messages are output in the
operating state network ON/OFF.

VC 1100 Overview
System messages such as:

– no calibration data in EEprom
– no dialog data in EEprom
will cause an OK-error which can be reset by means of Relay Reset.
Important:
When an OK error occurs, all limit relays maintain their current status. After
removing the OK error and acknowledging it by "Relay Reset", they perform
their normal function again.
In case of a system error message, e.g.
– calibration data not readable (ER -31)
– no valid calibration data in the EEPROM (ER -37)
a hardware error is present.
This error can only be eliminated by a Brüel & Kjær Vibro service station or
in the parent company.

Overview VC 1100
Inputs and Outputs

Inputs
VIBROCONTROL 1100 accepts vibration velocity sensors or accelero-
meters.
In 2 channel operation, sensors of the same type with the same sensitivity
are required.
Accelerometers (passive sensors) are powered by the internal power supply
of VIBROCONTROL 1100.
Outputs
a) Alarm Indication
Alarm level exceedances are indicated by galvanically free relay contacts.
b) Analog-Outputs
Two separate analog outputs are provided for analog meters or strip chart
recorders. Which measured parameter is supplied on which analog output is
determined during the setup. Each analog output can be configured for either
0 ... 10 V or 0.4 ... 20 mA.
Remote I/O (Serial Interface)

Up to 205 VIBROCONTROL 1100 can be daisy-chained to one serial
interface of a computer or process controller. Status, Log Book, and
measured values can be read, stored, displayed, printed, etc.
In addition the configuration of each VIBROCONTROL 1100 can be
confirmed and modified.

VC 1100 Overview
Definitions
Several terms are commonly used for measured vibration parameters. The
following is a summery of terms used in this manual.
Signal Detection Type:

Zero-to-Peak Value *)
Definition: The maximum deviation of the absolute value of the
vibration signal from zero.
Used here: peak or pc
Other terms: peak-value, amplitude, single amplitude

Peak-to-Peak Value *)
Definition: The maximum distance between peak negative and
peak positive of the vibration signal.
Used here: peak-to-peak or ppc
Other terms: amplitude, double amplitude

Root-Mean-Square Value
Definition: The square root of sum of the squared amplitudes
over a period of time.
Describes the energy content of a vibration signal.
Used here: rms
Other terms: effective value, true rms value
*) VIBROCONTROL 1100 measures the true rms value.Peak values are

calculated from the rms value using the formulae:
Beispiel:
zero-to-peak value = rms value x 1.41 [pc]
peak-to-peak value = rms value x 2.82 [ppc]

Technical Data VC 1100
2 Technical Data
Supply Voltage
• Type VC-1100-C01
Type VC-1100-C11 115 V AC or
230 V AC +15 % / -25 %
jumper selectable 48 ... 400 Hz
• Power consumption approx. 15 VA
• Type VC-1100-C02
Type VC-1100-C12 24 V DC (16 ... 36 V)
Power consumption approx. 15 W
Fuses
• Supply Voltage 115/230 V AC 2 Thermo-Resistors

250 °F (125 °C)
built-in the primary transformer
windings
• Supply Voltage 24 V DC NTC - Resistor

Sensor supply -24 V 2 x 30 mA short-circuit-proof
EMC
• according to EN 61326-1: 2006
• GHOST R_B35125 Certificate
WEEE-Reg.-No. 69572330
product category / application area: 9
© VC1100GB/Tedata C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7 → Jan. 2011 2-1

Safety and reliability related values according to DIN EN ISO

13849-1
Safety and reliability related values MTTF, PL and Category according to DIN
EN ISO 13849-1 have been evaluated for VC-1100 with the following results:
Device: VC-1100 C01 and C11
Parameter Value (40°C) Value (50°C)

640.148 h 414.950 h
MTTF
~ 73 years ~ 47 years
PL c c
Category 1 1
Device: VC-1100 C02 and C12

696.209 h 541.741 h
MTTF
~ 79 Jahre ~ 62 Jahre
PL c c
Category 1 1
Device: VC-1100 C01/CCS and C11/CCS

638.674 h 414.143 h
MTTF
PL c c
Category 1 1
Device: VC-1100 C02/CCS and C12/CCS

694.466 h 540.784 h
MTTF
PL c c
Category 1 1
Test conditions:
♦ Operating temperatures: 40°C und 50°C..
♦ Environmental conditions: Ground Benign, Controlled
2-2 Jan. 2011 © VC1100GB/Tedata C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7 →

Note:
The results of this assessment are valid when the following procedures are
followed:
♦ The Relays of the VC-1100 have to be operated in the „normally

energised” mode.
♦ The analog 4-20 mA signal industry-standard current loops must be
used.
♦ The OK Relay has to be used as system function.
♦ The VC-1100 system must be protected against erroneous change in
configuration
Abbreviations:
MTTF Mean Time To Failure

PL Performance Level
From PL "a" (high est failure probability)
to PL "e" (lowest failure probability)
Category Category (CAT)
Classification of the safety related parts
of a control system in respect of their
resistance to faults and their subsequent
behaviour in the fault condition, and
which is achieved by the structural
arrangement of the parts, fault detection
and/or by their reliability
Ground Benign, Nearly zero environmental stress with
Controlled optimum engineering operation and
maintenance.
Note:
The harmonized standard EN 954-1 is still valid (end of 2011), but it is con-
sidered technically outdated. It was replaced by the current harmonized
standards EN ISO 13849-1. More detailed information about safety and reli-
ability values can be obtained on request from Brüel & Kjær Vibro
(info@bkvibro.com

Housing and Operating Conditions

Housing
• Material Aluminium AL Si 12
Seal type IP 65 (DIN 40050) splash proof

(water)
Dimensions 360 x 160 x 91 mm (LxWxH)

14.2 x 6.3 x 3.6 inch (LxWxH)
• Weight app. 5 kg (11 lbs)
• Cable fittings 9 x M16x1,5 and 3 x M20x1,5

feed-throughs adapters
M16x1,5 to 1/2-14 NPT are
available
• Paint RAL 7032 (grey)

Top cover RAL 2011 (orange)
ca.400
360
M16 x 1,5
14
6,5
160
110
M20 x 1,5
340
VC11GEH D metr (030305)
Figure 2-1: Housing Dimensions
Operating Conditions
• Storage Temperature Range -20 ... + 70 °C (4 ... 148 °F)
• Operating Temperature Range 0 ... + 50 °C (32 ... 122 °F)
• Rel. Humidity max. 95 % non condensing

Analog Circuits
Channels 2
1) 2)
Inputs accept
a) Vibration Velocity Sensors with a sensitivity of
100 mV/mm/s, fo = 8 Hz, Ri = 4 kΩ
b) Accelerometer with a sensitivity of
2
100 mV/g (10.2 mV/m/s )
Input Impedance appox. 100 kΩ
Accuracy
(for frequency ranges listed below:)
• Vibration Parameters ± 0.5 % of full-scale plus:
± 4.0 % of the meas. value ( 1 Hz... 3 Hz)
± 2.0 % of the meas. value (1000 Hz...10000 Hz)
• Bearing Condition ± 6 % of the measured value plus or

± 3.5 % of full-scale, whichever is greater
Frequency Range 3)
The 10 Hz high-pass and 1000 Hz low-pass filters are of the 3.rd order, and
meet the requirements of DIN/ISO 2373, DIN/ISO 3945 and DIN 45 666. All
other filters are 2nd order Butterworth filters, with -1 dB damping at specified
corner frequencies.
• Vibration Displacement: 10...1000 Hz (v- sensor)
1) VIBROCONTROL 1100 accepts 2 sensors of the same type and sensitivity.

2) The setup is microprocessor controlled via the built-in operator panel or Remote Interface.
3) The respective selection is made software-controlled in dialog mode.

• Vibration Velocity: 1... 1000 Hz (v-or a-sensor)

or 3... 1000 Hz (v-or a-sensor)
or 10... 1000 Hz (v-or a-sensor)
or 10...10000 Hz ( a-sensor)
• Vibration Acceleration: 3... 1000 Hz (a-sensor)

or 10... 1000 Hz (a-sensor)
or 3...10000 Hz (a-sensor)
or 10...10000 Hz (a-sensor)
• Bearing Condition: 13 kHz ... 64 kHz- 3 dB (a-sensor)
Measured Parameters and Signal Detection Type 3)

• Root-Mean-Square-Value Xrms or Xeff for s/v/a
• Zero-to-Peak-Value Xpc for s/v/a
• Peak-to-Peak-Value Xppc for s/v/a
• Bearing Condition BCU

4) Ranges between min. and max. are infinitely variable.

Measuring Ranges 3) 4)
The measuring range depends on the selected sensor type, measured
parameter, and signal detection type. The range is continuously adjustable
within the minimum and maximum values shown in the table.
Measured Parameters and Signal Detection Type

Sensor Unit rms pc ppc
min max min max min max
2
m/s 0... 4.0 0...800.0 0... 6.0 0...999.0 0... 12.0 0...999.0
a g 0... 0.4 0... 80.0 0... 0.6 0...120.0 0... 1.2 0...240.0
mm/s 0... 5.0 0...999.0 0... 7.5 0...999.0 0... 15.0 0...999.0
ips 0... 0.2 0... 40.0 0... 0.3 0... 60.0 0... 0.6 0...120.0
mm/s 0... 5.0 0...150.0 0... 7.5 0...225.0 0... 15.0 0...450.0
v ips 0... 0.2 0... 6.0 0... 0.3 0... 9.0 0... 0.6 0... 18.0
mm 0...50.0 0...333.0 0...75.0 0...500.0 0...150.0 0...999.0
mils 0... 2.0 0... 13.3 0... 3.0 0... 20.0 0... 6.0 0... 40.0
Sensor Unit Measuring range

min max
a BCU 0 ... 1 0 ... 140
Type of Sensors:
a = vibration acceleration Sensor
v = vibration velocity Sensor
Measuring Cycles
♦ Single-Channel-Mode
• Vibration Displacement 3.0 s

Bearing Condition 1.25 s
• Refresh Display 0.5 s

Comparison of limit values 0.25 s

4) Ranges between min. and max. are infinitely variable.

Dual-Channel-Mode
• Vibration Parameters
Measuring Time per Channel: 3.0 s
Settling Times:
Filter with a lower frequency corner of 1 Hz 1.75 s
Filter with a lower frequency corner of 3 Hz 1.0 s
ISO-Filter with a lower frequency corner of 10 Hz 1.25 s
Special Filter 1.75 s
Integrator 6.0 s
Linearization Circuit 5.75 s
• Bearing Condition
Measuring Time per Channel: 1.25 s
Setting Time 2.75 s
Analog Output
• Number of Outputs 2
3)
Resolution: 256 (8 Bit)
(both outputs independently adjustable)
Refresh time ca. alle 0.5 s
0...10 V DC Rload ≥ 500 Ω

(withstands short circuits)
or 0...20 mA Load ≤ 500 Ω
or 4...20 mA Load ≤ 500 Ω
Error: U-Output
± 1 % of measured value ± 0.1 mV
I-Output
± 2 % of measured value ± 0.2 µA
• Buffered Outputs
Number of Outputs 2 Output of the sensor signal of each
channel with the correct phase. The
signal is attenuated by a factor of 0.1
Source impedance :≈0Ω
Max. output current : 4 mA
Resistance : > 10 kΩ
Max. cable length with cable
capacitance of 70 pF/m
(Wire against wire) : ≤ 16 m

Microprocessor - System
Storage capacity
RAM 8 kByte
EPROM 64 kByte
EEPROM 2 kByte
Built-in Operator Panel

• 5 push buttons
• LCD, 16 characters, alphanumeric
Storage of setup parameters in non-volatile EEPROM
Limit values 3)
• Total number 6 (3 per channel)
• per channel 1 limit value 1 (lim_1)

1 limit value 2 (lim_2)
1 limit value Bearing Condition (lim_b)
Relays
• Self-Monitoring 1 OK-Relay to indicate malfunctions detected by

the self-monitoring function
• Alarm Level Exceedances 3 Relays K1, K2, K3 to indicate alarm level

3)
exceedances
• Range of settings for limit values 10 ... 100 % of the corresponding measuring range
• Contacts 2 pole
• Contact Rating 250 V AC, 5 A (Ohm Load, cos ϕ = 1)

250 V AC, 2 A (Inductive Load, cos ϕ = 0.4 ... 0.7)
24 V DC / 0.4 A
48 V DC / 0.2 A
A spark extinguisher must be installed as close to the spark generator

as possible !
WARNING!
As external voltages are connected to the relay contacts,
hazardous contact voltages may still be present there even after the supply
voltage of the VC-1100 has been interrupted.

Link of limit values to relays
• Each limit value can be linked only once
• None or 1 to 6 limit values can be linked to one relay
• If a relay is linked to several limit values, thelimit value exceedances can be

combined in two ways:
a) AND
The relay trips, if all limit values that are linked to this relay are exceeded.
b) OR
The relay trips, if at least one of the limit values linked to this relay is
exceeded.
• OK-Relay normally energized
• Alarm relays
3)
normally energized
K1, K2, K3 or normally de-energized latching or non-latching
• Alarm delay Time

3)
can be set individually for each limit value from
between 1 and 99 s (accuracy ± 5 %
• Reset function 1 galvanically free contact switch to reset

latched relays.
• Remote Interface Number of Ports 2 Interface Type RS-232-C (EIA),

(Data only)
• Baud rate
3)
1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 Parity none Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1

Connectors and Interfaces VC 1100
3 Connectors and Interfaces

Fundamentals:
ATTENTION
If the VIBROCONTROL 1100 was converted to a CCS version, only constant
current-supplied acceleration sensors (CCS) can be attached!
Consider the supplement page!
♦ All connections including those for power are inside the housing.
♦ Electrical connection of the VIBROCONTROL 1100 may only be
undertaken by trained personnel.
♦ Connection work is to be undertaken in de-energised condition.
♦ As external voltages are connected to the relay contacts, hazardous
contact voltages may still be present there even after the supply voltage
of the VC-1100 has been interrupted.
♦ Feed cables into the housing via feed-through fittings. There is a total of
3 x M20x1,5 and 9 x M16x1,5 feed-through fittings; 6 on each side.
The threads are M16x1,5, a standard commonly used in Europe.
Each VIBROCONTROL 1100 comes with two M16x 1,5/M12 x 1,5
adapters.
Maximum cable size is 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG).
Use flexible cable only.
♦ Cable ends should have crimp ferrules for a proper connection to the
removable terminal strips. Remove (unplug) the terminal strips during
wiring. VIBROCONTROL 1100 groups the terminal strips in functional
blocks (sensors, remote I/O, relays, etc.) and each is coded to prevent
mix-ups.
♦ Use shielded cables to suppress external RF noise. This is not

necessary for power and relay wiring.
Connect all shields to the screw terminals located on top of both sides of
the internal housing (SE).
♦ Run signal cables a minimum of 0.5 m (20 inches) from power cables. If
you must cross a power cable do so at right angles.
By means of steel flexible tubes, protect signal leads from mechanical

damage and electrical interferences.
© VC1100GB/connect C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7 → Jan. 2011 3-1

VC 1100 Connectors and Interfaces
Index of Cable Connections and Interfaces:

Inputs: Terminal: Page:
Power 19 ... 24 4
Sensor Channel A 37 ... 40 5-7
Sensor Channel B 41 ... 44 5-7
Relay Reset 35 ... 36 8
Inputs: Terminal: Page:
Relay 1 10 ... 12 9
Relay 2 13 ... 15 9
Relay 3 16 ... 18 9
OK-Relay 7 ... 9 9
Analog Output 1 Channel A 3 ... 4 11
Analog Output 2 Channel B 5 ... 6 11
Buffered Output Channel A 31 ... 32 12
Buffered Output Channel B 33 ... 34 12
Remote I/O:
RS-232-C IN 25 ... 30 13
RS-232-C OUT C 28 ... 30 13
The connections in particular:
Symbols
The following abbreviations are used:
TE = Technical Earth (Ground)

SE = Shield Earth (Ground)
PE = Protective Earth (Ground)
↓ = General Symbol for Reference Level
0VA = Analog Circuits
0VD = Digital Circuits
L = Line Voltage
N = Neutral
DC = Direct Current/Voltage
AC = Alternating Current/Voltage
TD = Transmit Data (RS-232-C)
RD = Receive Data (RS-232-C)
SG = Signal Ground (RS-232-C)
BA = Buffered Output Channel A
BB = Buffered Output Channel B
TE (0VA) and 0VD can be connected at a central point.
3-2 Jan. 2011 © VC1100GB/connect C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7 →

1
SE VIBROCONTROL 1100 25 TD1
SE
25
1 TE = 0V
2 interno (Data 26 RD1 26
2
3 + 3 only) 27 SG1 27
4 Izlaz 1 TD2 28
4 28
5 + 5 29 RD2 29
Izlaz 2 30 SG2 30
6 6
7 31
7 Buffer A 31
8 32
8 Relej OK 32 BA
9 Buffer B 33 33
9
34
10 10 34 BB
35
11 11 Relej K1 Reset 35
36 36
12 12
Esc P M/Ent
13 13
14 14 Relej K2
15 37 DC 37
15
16 16 Prijem 38 38
kanal A 39 COM 39
17 17 Relej K3
18 40 SIG 40
18
19 L 19
Napon
20 20 napajanja
21 21 41 DC 41
PE Most
22 22 230/115Vac Prijem 42
kanal B 42
23 23 43 COM 43
N 24 Serijski broj 44 SIG
24 44
VC11TOTA (030110)
Fig. 3 - 1: Top view of a VIBROCONTROL 1100 with cover removed
Important: Safety Procedures
The safety instructions are attached as a separate brochure in different

languages.
The user is responsible for commissioning the VIBROCONTROL 1100 and

its placement in the operating environment. Special care should be taken
when installing sensors in hazardous areas.
Apply safety standards properly.
In the event of incorrect connection of the power supply, dangerous voltages

may be conducted onto the housing. Moreover, the measurement inputs and
outputs may be destroyed by the supply voltage.
In the event of incorrect connection of the relay contacts, dangerous
voltages may be conducted onto the housing. Moreover, the measurement
inputs may be destroyed by the supply voltage.
In the event of incorrect connection of the measurement inputs, dangerous
voltages may be conducted onto the housing or transported to other
measuring points. Moreover, the measurement inputs may be destroyed.

Inputs
Power Supply
WARNING!
The power supply may only be connected via a separator (switch or circuit
breaker). A switch used as a separator must fulfil requirements according to
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-3 and be suitable for this application.
Version Supply Voltage

VC 1100 C01/C11 230 V AC or 115 V AC
VC 1100 C02/C12 24 V DC
115 V AC Wiring 230 V AC Wiring
24 V DC Wiring
VC1100
19
+24 V
20
21
Supply
Voltage
* Connect to terminal 1 or 2
(see general ground
22 24 V DC recommendations)
24V DC 0V 23
0V
24
PE
* KL19-24 E (940921)
Fig. 3 - 2 : Supply Voltage Wiring
Coded Terminal strip 19 - 24 cannot be plugged into any other slot but its
own.

The power connection must be protected against abrasion and bending at

the point of entry into the VC-1100. Adequate provision must be made to
relieve strain on the connection cable.
Grounding
Connect protective ground of the power cord to the PE terminal located on
top of the internal housing.
This is the central grounding point for the housing. This point (PE) is
connected to TE by a jumper wire between terminal strip 1/2 and SE. This is
the standard configuration.
In special cases, for example if a peripheral
instrument is used with internally grounded inputs, open the connection
between PE and TE by removing this jumper wire.
Please consult the General Grounding Recommendation in this manual.

Sensors (except of CCS-Sensors)

Two types of sensors can be connected:
a) Vibration Velocity Sensors

b) Vibration Acceleration Sensors (Accelerometers)
Velocity sensors and accelerometers have different interfaces. The velocity

sensors (Type VS - ...) is an active sensor, i.e. it does not require a supply
voltage. The cable has two conductors and a shield.
The accelerometer (Type AS - ...) is a passive sensor, i.e. it has a built-in
charge amplifier which requires a supply voltage. VIBROCONTROL 1100
supplies accelerometers with -24 V DC with a max. current of 30 mA. The
cable has of 4 conductors and a shield.
The connecting cable has 4 conductors when the connection is made
through a terminal box (AC-221). If the sensor is directly connected the
connecting cable has 3 conductors.
Fig. 3 - 3 : Connecting Vibration Velocity and Vibration Acceleration Sensor

rt = red, ws = white, sw = black, ge = yellow, br = brown,
ge/sw = yellow/black
Standard sensor cable length is 5 m (16 feet). A maximum cable length of

200 m (600 feet) requires proper installation including appropriate junction
boxes and signal cables.
For more information, please consult the manual for the sensor used.

Relay Reset
Only a potential-free circuit element (normally open contact) may be
connected to the RESET input. Latched relays can also be reset via the
operating panel or through the remote interface.
VC1100
+5VD 31
32
1k
33
34 Reset
100uH
35
0VD 36
SE
KL35-36 (020123)
Fig. 3 - 4 : Connection of a galvanically free switch to the Relay

Reset-Input

Outputs
Relays
Consider the following if the relay outputs are to be used.
♦ Decide if the relays are to be "normally energized" or "normally de-

energized". Setup parameters (N10, N11, N12) must be consistent with
the wiring.
Refer to the examples on the next page.
♦ If a relay is configured as latching (see parameters N07, N08, N09) there
are three ways to reset it.
With the operating panel; via the remote interface; using the Relay-
Reset Input
To use the Relay-Reset Input, connect a galvanically free switch to
terminals 35 and 36 (see previous page).
♦ If conductive loads are connected, provide appropriate spark
suppression placed as close as possible to the part that would generate
the spark.
♦ Contact load: 220 V / 5 A ohmic load
WARNING!
As external voltages are connected to the relay contacts, hazardous contact
voltages may still be present there even after the supply voltage of the VC-
1100 has been interrupted.
A spark extinguisher must be installed as close to the spark generator
as possible !
VC1100
7
Example 8 OK-Relay
9
+ 10
11 Relay K1
1
2
- 1
3
1
4 Relay K2
1
5
1
6
1
7 Relay K3
1
8
KL7-18 (030109)
Fig. 3 - 5 : Connecting the-Relays

Figure 3 - 5 shows the contacts in the de-energized position.

Relays
The following diagrams explain the terms
− normally de-energized and
− normally energized
The thicker lines show energized circuits.
Normally de-energized
VC1100 VC1100
+ +
10 11 12 10 11 12
+
no
Alarm Alarm
+
KL7-18A (030109) - + - +
Normally energized
VC1100 VC1100
+ +
10 11 12 10 11 12
+
no
KL7-18B (030109) + - Alarm + - Alarm
Fig. 3 - 6: Explanation of the Normally De-Energized and Normally

Energized Mode for Relays

Analog Outputs
The analog outputs are used for example with strip chart recorders and
analog meters. These analog outputs are not galvanically free, (isolated) and
should only be used with instruments that have galvanically free inputs.
Both analog outputs are independent and of equal design.
Their function depends on how they are configured (see parameters L1, L2,
L3, L4).
Example :
Configure analog output 1 for the measured vibration value of channel B
"vib_B" using a 4 ... 20 mA signal.
The setup parameters for channel B are:
− Measured Parameter J04: v (vibration velocity)
− Unit J06: mm/s (or ips)s
− Signal Detection J08: rms
− Measured Tange J10: 50.0 (or 2.00)
Using this setup, an output signal of 4 mA corresponds to a vibration level of

0 mm/s (0 ips). An output signal of 20 mA corresponds to a vibration level of
50.0 mm/s (2.00 ips).
Technical Data :
0/4 ... 20 mA DC: load < 500 Ω
0 ... 10 V DC voltage: load > 1 kΩ, short circuit protected
VC1100
1 TE=0VA
2 TE=0VA
100uH
0-10V 3 +DC
Output 1 100uH
0/4-20mA 4 0VA
100uH
0-10V 5 +DC
Output 2
0/4-20mA 6
SE
SE
KL1-6 (030109)
Fig. 3 - 7: Connecting Analog Outputs

Buffered Outputs
At measurement signal outputs Buffer A and B, the input signals of the
measurement sensors of channels A and B are present in a weakened form
(factor 0.1) (AC ratio only).
Their function is the connection of high-ohmic measuring and testing
devices.
Output current Imax : 4 mA
Load resistance RL : > 10 kΩ
Cable length at cable capacitance
70 pF/m (wire to wire) : ≤ 16 m
VC1100
0VA 31
Channel A
BA 32
33 Channel B
BB 34
35
36
SE
SE
KL31-36 (940718)
Fig. 3 - 8: Connecting to the Buffered Outputs for On Site Analysis

Remote I/O
VIBROCONTROL 1100 has two RS-232C serial interfaces. Hardware
handshakes are not required for communication with process controllers or
personal computers (HOST). This reduces the number of cable conductors
required.
Cables should be shielded with two twisted pairs.
The Remote Interface provides a means to interrogate and modify the
configuration as well as obtain the measured values from up to 205 daisy-
chained VIBROCONTROL 1100's.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 can be connected to a HOST in two different ways:
a) A HOST communicating with one VC-1100

for 25-pole Sub-D Plug
Pin assignment for

25-pole Sub-D Plug
RS-232-C
VC1100
SE
100uH
(3)
TD1 25 RD PC
RD1 26 (2)
TD EDV
SG1 27 (7) SG
EDP
TD2 28 SE
RD2 29
0VD SG2 30
SE
KL25-30a (960729)
Fig. 3 - 9: Interfacing a HOST with one VC-1100
b) A HOST communicating with one VC-1100

for 9-pole Sub-D Plug
Pin assignment for

9-pole Sub-D Plug
25 (2)
RD PC
RD = Receive Data 26 (3) TD EDV
(receive) 27 (5) SG EDP
28 SE
29
TD = Transmit Data 30
(send)
SG = Signal Ground
(Ground) KL25-30b (030110)
Fig. 3 - 10: Interfacing a HOST with one VC 1100

c) A HOST Communicating with Several

VIBROCONTROL 1100
The HOST can control up to 205 daisy-chained VIBROCONTROL 1100's
with one serial interface on the HOST.
Each VIBROCONTROL 1100 has a unique address.If a VIBROCONTROL
1100 does not receive it's unique address, it passes the message to the next
unit. If one unit is removed, the daisy-chain must be closed as shown in
figure 10.
For more information, please consult the "Remote I/O" chapter in this
manual.
VC1100 VC1100
SE SE SE SE
2 1 2 1
SGRDTDSGRDTD SGRDTD SGRDTD
30 29 28 27 26 25 30 29 28 2726 25
RD
next PC
VC 1100 TD EDV
SG
EDP
SE
VC11NETA (960729)
Fig. 3 - 11: Interfacing a HOST with several VC-1100’s
Use commercially available shielded data transfer cables with two twisted
pairs.

Built-in Operating Panel and Display VC 1100
4 Built-in Operating Panel and Display

Open the housing to reveal the operator panel.
WARNING!
Hazardous contact voltages may be present at the terminals of the VC-1100.
Versions
Model
Monitor Unit
Main menu
Display
A 16 digit alphanumeric LCD display provides access to the Measured
Values, Relay Status, Log Book, and Setup Parameters.
During normal operation the display is dark. The display shown in the above
figure appears after pressing any key. This display - the main menu - informs
the user about the monitor unit, model and version.
Starting from the main menu, you can access the different function modes by
pressing appropriate keys.
The microprocessor returns to the main menu automatically if a key is not
pressed for 15 minutes, and the display will be turned off after an additional
15 minutes of inactivity.
© VC1100E/bult-in C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7 → Jan. 2011 4-1

VC 1100 Built-in Operating Panel and Display
Display Setup Parameters
Starting point
During normal operation the display is dark. The main menu will appear if
any key is press.
Press any key.

The main menu appears.
Parameter value
Parameter number
Display Setup Parameters
Pressing this key at this time has no effect, since I01 is the first parameter.
Step to the next parameter number.

Reach any parameter by pressing either the up or down arrow key. Press
and release the key to go to the next parameter (single step). Press and hold
the key if you want to scroll through the parameter numbers faster. The
longer you hold a key down, the faster the parameter numbers change. The
last parameter is P02.
Exit "Display Setup Parameters" mode and return to the main menu.
4-2 Jan. 2011 © VC1100E/bult-in C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7→

Change Setup Parameters

Access all modes from the main menu.
Exit a mode and return to the main menu by pressing
If the display is dark, press any key to turn it on.
or
The main menu appears.
Parameter value
Parameter number
Parameter group
Hold the key DOWN, then press key.

A cursor that underlines the parameter group indicates that the parameter
group and number can be changed.
Step to the next parameter number using the and keys.
Pressing this key at this time has no effect, since I01 is the first parameter.

Reach any parameter by pressing either the up or down arrow keys. Press
and release the key to go to the next parameter (single step). Press and hold
the key if you want to scroll through the parameter numbers faster. The
longer you hold a key down, the faster the parameter numbers change.
The last parameter is P02.
Access the change parameter value mode by pressing .

Parameter value
Parameter number
Indicates:
Parameter value is selectable
A flashing parameter group indicates change of the parameter value is

allowed.
Change the parameter value using the and keys.
To save the shown parameter value press again. The parameter group
no longer flashes. The new parameter value is in effect upon exiting to the
main menu .
or
Exit "Change Setup Parameters" and return to the main menu.

The microprocessor will automatically start a consistency check for the new
parameter list. This check will generate an error message if the parameters
are not consistent.
Example:
The following parameters I03 Vibration velocity sensor v
J05 Unit of the measured parameter g
Error messages see explanations on page 16.

Confirm the error messages by pressing any key. The program will
automatically show the inconsistent parameter.
Correct the error:

Press
Adjust parameter value:
Accept parameter value by pressing .
Exit to main menu .
If the setup is consistent, the program returns to the main menu.

If not, the display shows the next error message. Correct this error and
repeat the procedure until the setup is consistent. Find explanations of error
messages on pages 15 of this chapter
Escape from the change parameter value mode by pressing .
Indicates:
Parameter value is selectable
Indicates:
Parameter numbermode is
selectable
Press to return to the select parameter number mode.
Press again to return to the main menu.

Quick Reference to the Change Setup Parameters Mode
The start is always made from the main menu.

Enter the "Change Setup Parameters" mode
Select the parameter you want to change.
Access the change parameter value mode
Change the parameter value.
Save the new parameter value.

Change other parameters or press to return to the main menu.If
the new setup is consistent, it is accepted and it becomes the
current setup and the main menu appears.
If not, an error message will appear (see previous page).

The consistency check takes about 15 s. During this time the monitoring
function is suspended.

Display Measured Values

Access all modes from the main menu. Exit a mode and return to the main
menu by pressing . If the display is dark, press any key to turn it on.
or
Main menu appears.
Signal detection type

Unit
Measured value
Channel
The display shows vibration level of channel A.

A flashing display indicates a limit value was exceeded.
Step to next measured values:

− Bearing condition channel A
− Vibration level channel B
− Bearing condition channel B
Relay status
Relay identification
Event

No/Yes
Object
Command
Active/Inactive
Step to next entry using key, or press ...
No/Yes
Change is possible
Press to enter the change status mode
Select:
Y: Reset relays
N: Do not reset relays.
Accept reset command and return to display mode.
Press , and show Log Book.
Step to first Log Book entry.

The Log Book stores up to 99 events.

After the last Log Book entry, you can delete the Log Book.
Delete Log Book: Press to allow change

Select Y using
Press to delete the Log Book.
The Log Book is deleted
Exit the Display measured values mode and return to the main
menu.
Find an explanation of the Log Book entries and events on pages 14 and 15
of this chapter.

Service Mode
Access all modes from the main menu. Exit a mode and return to the main
menu by pressing .
If the display is dark, press any key to turn it on.
or
Main menu appears.
Before accessing the service mode,

consider that
a) the service mode suspends the measuring and monitoring
modes.
b) activating the relays could cause machine shut-down.
Service Mode
Service parameter
Hold down the key, and press the key to enter the service mode.The
service functions all start with an S.

Check Relays
The service mode provides direct access to relay activation.
Indicates the test function is

active
Change the relay status by pressing and .

Used to check operation of devices connected to the relays.
K1 off: Relay not active.

K1 on: Relay active
Press to exit test of relay K1.

Step to next function by pressing .
Check relays K2 and K3:
Function S04 checks the OK-Relay.
OK off : OK-Relay not active.

OK on : OK-Relay active.
Press to exit the OK-Relay test.

Test analog output 1.

Select voltages of 0, 2, 5, or 10 Volt by pressing
Press to exit. Press to go to next test.
Test analog output 1.

Select currents of 0, 4, 12, or 20 mA by pressing
Analog output 2 is tested in the same manner.
Analog Output 2 Voltage

S07 0V
2V
5V
10 V
Analog Output 2 Current

S08 0 mA
4 mA
12 mA
20 mA
Press to start the self-test. During the self-test, a count down from 10 to 0
is displayed. OK will appear on the display if the test is completed
successfully.
The self-test does not suspend the monitoring mode.

VIBROCONTROL 1100 has the ability to perform a self-calibration. This

function requires about 20 minutes. During the self-calibration the monitoring
mode is suspended, a count down is and displayed from ??? to 0, at which
time the display returns to:
Press to exit self-calibration and return to the main menu.

Events
The microprocessor stores events in the Log Book using a short notation.
The Log Book can store up to 99 events. When the 100th event occurs, the
"oldest event" is dropped making room for the new 100th event. The Log
Book events are maintained until an instruction is received to erase all
entries.
All Log Book entries start with a "H" (for History) followed by a two digit
running number and a short description of the event. If a relay trips, the Log
Book entry identifies the relay and the cause of the relay trip.
Example :
Cause
Relay
Entry number
If the event is a logical AND combination of events, the combination is

displayed. In this case, the plus sign replaces the AND.
A trip of the OK-Relay generates one of the

following Log Book entries:
Event Cause
OK POWER OFF OK-Relay is active for 15 safter
power is returned.
OK A OK-Relay is active.
Malfunction Channel A
OK B OK-Relay is active.
Malfunction Channel B

A trip of relays K1, K2, or K3 generates the following

Log Book entries:
Event Cause
K1 Cause Relay K1 is active.
See list of causes below.
Cause
Lim1A Channel A: Vibration exceeds lim_1
Lim2A Channel A: Vibration exceeds lim_2
LimbA Channel A: Bearing Condition exceeds lim_b
Lim1B Channel B: Vibration exceeds lim_1
Lim2B Channel B: Vibration exceeds lim_2
LimbB Channel B: Bearing Condition exceeds lim_b
Relay resets generate Log Book entries:
Event Cause
RESET DIALOG Relay reset via built-in operator panel
RESET EXTERN Relay reset via reset input
RESET RS-232 Relay reset via Remote-I/O

Error Messages
VIBROCONTROL 1100 automatically checks for setup consistency upon

exiting the "Change Setup Parameters" mode. If the setup is not consistent,
an error message is displayed.
The consistency check stops at the first inconsistency detected. It assumes

that the parameter with the lowest number is correct.
Therefore, a parameter other than the one displayed could be the cause of
the inconsistency.
A list of error messages appears on the next page.

Unit errors
Format: ER -nn is a number with 1 to 5 digits
Example: < ER -1<
Error see page 20 Meaning

code
-1 ! Error in operating system
-6 ! power down (last message, if time is
sufficient)
-8 r Program monitoring is out of operation or
defective.
-31 r Disrupted calibration data (run auto-
calibration!)
-32 ! Error EEPROM / Hardware error
-33 ! Error ROM / Hardware error
-34 ! Error RAM / Hardware error
-35 ! Disrupted data in RAM / Hardware error
-36 k Auto-calibration not successful /
Hardware error
-37 e/r e) No valid configuration stored in
EEPROM.
(Re-configure) / Hardware error
r) If no valid configuration can be made, a

hardware error is present.

Communication errors
Error see page 20 Meaning (continued)

code
-55 w Correct parameter specifier received, but
command cannot be processed because the
requested data are not available; e.g. channel
not active
-57 w received data not accepted, because:
a) data is not in the list of choices.
b) number (INTEGER or FLOATING
POINT) is out of specified range.
-58 w Received unit of the pickup sensitivity (I04)
does not correspond to the selected pickup
(e.g. mV/g and vibration velocity pickup).
-59 w The sensitivity (I05) is too large or too small.
-60 w The selected measured parameter (J03/J04)
cannot be processedwith the selected pickup
(I03); e.g. vibration acceleration with vibration
velocity pickup.
-61 w The unit (J05/J06) does not correspond to the
measured parameter (J03/J04); e.g. vibration
displacement cannot be measured in g.
-62 w The selected measuring range (J09/J10;
J13/J14) is too small or too large.
-63 w The limit values are smaller than 10 % or
larger than 100 % of the corresponding
measur-ing range (M09/M10; M11/M12;
M13/M14).
-65 w An analog output has been configured to
output BCU's and the pickup type velocity
sensor (I03) has been selected.
-68 Parameter transfer is not possible since
presently another transfer is made or the self-
calibration is running. Repeat the command!

How to react to error-messages?
The 2nd column of the above list of error-messages contains the characters
„k“ „r" „!" 2e" and „w". These characters show what to do if the
corresponding error message occurs.
k Repeat the command.

If VIBROCONTROL 1100 repeats this error-message after several retries,
there is a severe problem and the instrument must be sent to Brüel & Kjær
Vibro for repair.
r Send VIBROCONTROL 1100 to Brüel & Kjær Vibro for repair.
! This error activates the OK-relay temporarily, because an automatic restart is

performed.
Sporadic occurrence of this error indicates that external noise effects the
unit. Check installation, especially shielding of cables and grounds.
Permanent occurrence of this error indicates a severe fault. Send unit to
Brüel & Kjær Vibro for repair.
e Re-do configuration or download consistent setup. If this is not successful,

send unit to Brüel & Kjær Vibro for repair.
w Repeat command using correct data.

This page has been reserved for your notes.

List of Setup Parameters VC 1100
5 List of Setup Parameters

Basic Concepts
VIBROCONTROL 1100 stores its setup parameters in non-volatile memory.
The operating system uses this data to configure the analog circuits and the
software modules. All data is uniquely named. We call this data "Setup
Parameters" or simply "Parameters" and reference them by name. The setup
parameter values can easily be changed within predefined ranges, providing
a convenient way to configure the measuring and monitoring system.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 checks the consistency of the setup after leaving the
"Change Setup Parameters" mode. If the setup is inconsistent, the display
shows an error messages. The setup must be corrected since the
VIBROCONTROL 1100 will not accept an inconsistent setup.
Parameter list structure

Parameters are listed in sequence with a complete definition. The definition
describes its function, choices, and range.
The same format is used for all parameters.
Example:
Group
Number
Title
K 01 Channel A: Lower Frequency Corner
Choices: 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz ISO

Function: Select the lower frequency corner for channel A
Parameter specifier
All setup parameters are organized in functional groups. The "Parameter
Specifier" consists of a group and a number within the group. The first
character specifies the group and the two digit number specifies the
individual parameter.
© VC1100GB/paralist C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7→ Jan. 2011 5-1

VC 1100 List of Setup Parameters
Parameter Title
The "Parameter Title" is a short description of the parameter's function.
Parameter Groups
Group I Channel and Sensor Selection
Define measuring channels
Sensor type and sensitivity
Group J Channel Configuration

Define measured parameters, units, signal detection type, and
full scale.
Group K Filter Configuration

Define upper and lower frequency corners.
Group L Analog Outputs

Assign measured parameters and define signal type.
Group M Limit Configuration

Define monitoring functions, limit values and delay times.
Group N Relay Configuration

Assign limit values to relays. Define relay operation.
Group O OK Monitoring
Enable/Disable
Group P Serial Interface

Define device address and baud rate.
Group S Service Functions

Check relay operation.
Set analog outputs to predefined levels.
Run self-test and
Self-calibration.
5-2 Jan. 2011 © VC1100GB/paralist C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 6 →

Additional Information
A functional description of the setup parameters for a group consists of text
and usually a block diagram. The block diagram shows one channel only for
simplicity.
The following is a list of the symbols that are used in the block diagrams, and
their meaning.
Symbols
Range check
Amplifier
Digital-to-Analog Converter
Limit value check
Filter, exponential
Delay time
Tt
& Logical AND
1 Logical OR
Latch
1 Logical NOR
Setup Parameters and variables
Error message LEGENDE E (940923)
Fig. 5 - 1: Legend

Channel and Sensor Selection Group I

General
Configure VIBROCONTROL 1100 as a Single- or Dual-channel monitor. Use
channel A or channel B in the Single-channel mode.
In the Dual-channel mode, VIBROCONTROL 1100 only accepts sensors of
the same type and sensitivity.
I05
A: I01
B: I02 I03 I04
110,0
mV/g
mV/m/s 2 8,0
A: J03
B: J04 VIBRATION
a SIGNAL
11,2 v
s
PICKUP a 0,816
v
N
110,0 a
v
90,0 s
mV/mm/s 2794,0
mV/ips
2286,0
-58 -59 -60

GRUP-I01E (940923)
Fig. 5 - 2: Parameter Group I, Channel Selection
I 01 Channel A
Choices: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable Channel A.
Y = Yes Channel A is active
N = No Channel A is not active
I01 = Y: For measured value acquisition, connect a sensor to
channel A.
I01 = N: Disables all measuring and monitoring functions for
channel A.

I 02 Channel B
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable Channel B.
Y = Yes Channel B is active
N = No Channel B is not active
I02 = Y: For measured value acquisition, connect a sensor to
channel B.
I02 = N: Disables all measuring and monitoring functions for
channel B.
I 03 Sensors
Choises: a, v
Function: Select sensorr type.
a= Use accelerometers.
v= Use vibration velocity sensors.
Use the same sensor type with the same sensitivity for channel A and B.
I 04 Unit
2
Choises: mV/g, mV/m/s , mV/ips, mV/mm/s
Function: Define unit of sensor sensitivity.
I04 defines the unit of sensor sensitivity for both channels. If the unit does not
match the sensor type, VIBROCONTROL 1100 generates error-message:
-58.
Select
2
mV/g or mV/m/s for accelerometers
mV/mm/s or mV/ips for vibration velocity sensors.

I 05 Sensitivity
Range: 0.8 ... 3750

Resolution: 0.8 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 3750
Function: Sensor sensitivity
I05 defines the sensor sensitivity for channel A and B.

VIBROCONTROL 1100 accepts sensitivities within the ranges listed in the
following table:
Sensor type Unit min. value max. value

Accelerometer mV/g 8.0 120
2
(I03 = a) mV/m/s 0.8 12
Vibration Velocity mV/mm/s 15 150
(I03 = v) mV/ips 375 3750
I 06 Frequency response linearization
Choises: Y, N
Function: Y = Yes Frequency response linearization is active
N = No Frequency response linearization is not active
At a switch-on of the frequency response linearization, the vibration velocity
sensor supplies an exact measurement even in low frequency ranges, e.g.
measurements below the natural frequency of the sensor
(f0 < 8 Hz or f0 < 15 Hz according to the sensor type).
The standard equipment of the VIBROCONTROL 1100 system comprises a
frequency response linearization for sensor natural frequencies of f0 = 8 Hz.
The special design for f0 = 15 Hz is identified by the adhesive label „moving
coil linearization 15 Hz" which is located on the right side of the printed circuit
cover underneath the grounding bar, after opening the lid.

Signal Detection Type Group J

General
Group J defines how the incoming vibration signal is processed and
displayed.
The signal processing block diagram shows the function of the setup
parameter and uses the following terms:
Vibration Signal: Output of the vibration sensor.
Measured Parameter : Vibration displacement, Vibration velocity,
Vibration acceleration.
Unit: Unit of the measured parameter.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 uses the same unit
for the limit values
Signal detection type: rms, zero-to-peak calculated (pc),
peak-to-peak calculated (ppc)
A: J01 A: J03 A: J05 A: J07 A: J09

B: J02 B: J04 B: J06 B: J08 B: J10
m/s2 Meas. Parameter

VIBRATION g rms(a) VIBRATION
SIGNAL a
mm/s
a rms
v v pc
s
ips rms(v) s
pc = 2 x rms ppc
N µm
mils rms(s) ppc = 2 x pc
A: J15 A: J17 A: J13

A: J11 B: J16 B: J18 B: J14
B: J12
Meas. Parameter
BEARCON
BEARCON
N N
-61
GRUPPE-J01 C01 (030109)
Fig. 5 - 3: Parameter Group J, Signal Detection Type
Measuring ranges
The measuring range depends on the selected sensor type, measured
parameter, and signal detection type. The range is continuously adjustable
within the minimum and maximum values shown in the table.

Measuring range
Sensor Unit rms pc ppc
min max min max min max
2
m/s 0... 4.00 0... 800 0... 6.00 0... 999 0... 12.0 0... 999
a g 0... 0.40 0... 80.0 0... 0.60 0... 120 0... 1.20 0... 240
mm/s 0... 5.00 0... 999 0... 7.50 0... 999 0... 15.0 0... 999
ips 0... 0.20 0... 40.0 0... 0.30 0... 60.0 0... 0.60 0... 120
mm/s 0... 5.00 0... 150 0... 7.50 0... 225 0... 15.0 0... 450
v ips 0... 0.20 0... 6.00 0... 0.30 0... 9.00 0... 0.60 0... 18.0
mm 0... 50.0 0... 333 0... 75.0 0... 500 0... 150 0... 999
mils 0... 2.00 0... 13.3 0... 3.00 0... 20.0 0... 6.00 0... 40.0
Bearing condition (BEARCON)
a BCU 0... 1.00 0...140
I: 03 A: J05 A: J07 A: J09

B: J06 B: J08 B: J10
rms
pc
ppc
rms
pc
ppc
rms
pc
m/s2 ppc
g
mm/s rms
ips pc
µm ppc
mils
a
v m/s2
g rms
mm/s pc
ips ppc
µm
mils rms
pc
ppc
rms
pc
ppc
rms
pc
VIBRATION ppc
BEARCON
1 -62
A: J13
B: J14
GRUPPE-J02
GRUPPE-J02 C01
C01 (030108)
E (940923)
Fig. 5 - 4: Parameter Group J, Signal Detection Type

J 01 Channel A : Vibration
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable signal processing for channel A
Y = Yes Channel A processes the vibration signal
N = No Channel A does not processes the vibration
signal
J 02 Channel B : Vibration
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable signal processing for channel B
Y = Yes Channel B processes the vibration signal
N = No Channel B does not processes the vibration
signal
J 03 Channel A : Measured Parameter:
Choises: a, v, s
Function: Define the measured vibration parameter for channel A
a= Vibration acceleration
v= Vibration velocity
s= Vibration displacement
J 04 Channel B : Measured Parameter
Choises: a, v, s
Function: Define the measured vibration parameter for channel B
a= Vibration acceleration
v= Vibration velocity
s= Vibration displacement

J 05 Channel A : Unit
2
Choises: g, m/s , ips, mm/s, mils, µm
Select English or metric units for the measured vibration parameter of
channel A.
2
Select g or m/s for vibration acceleration
Select ips or mm/s for vibration velocity
Select mils or µm for vibration dieplacement
Unit Measured Parameter

2
g m/s J03 = a
mm/s ips J03 = v
µm mils
J03 = s
If the unit does not match the selected measured parameter (J03), the
consistency check generates error-message -61.
J 06 Channel B : Unit
2
Choises: g, m/s , ips, mm/s, mils, µm
Select English or metric units for the measured vibration parameter of
channel B.
2
Select g or m/s for vibration acceleration
Select ips or mm/s for vibration velocity
Select mils or µm for vibration dieplacement
Unit Measured Parameter

2
g m/s J04 = a
mm/s ips J04 = v
µm mils
J04 = s
If the unit does not match the selected measured parameter (J04), the
consistency check generates the error-message - 61.
J 07 Channel A : Signal Setection Type
Choises: rms, pc, ppc

rms = Root-mean-square value
pc = Zero-to-peak calculated value
ppc = Peak-to-peak calculated value

J 08 Channel B : Signal Setection Type
Choises: rms, pc, ppc

s = Root-mean-square value
pc = Zero-to-peak calculated value
ppc = Peak-to-peak calculated value
J 09 Channel A : Full scale (Vibration)
Range: 0.200 ... 999

Resolution: 0.200... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Define full scale value for the measured vibration
parameter of channel A. You can use different full
scale values for channel A and B.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 uses the full scale values to automatically configure

the analog circuits, display functions, monitoring functions, and the analog
outputs.
If you enter full scale values outside the ranges defined in the table, the
consistency check generates error message -62.
J 10 Channel B : Full scale (Vibration)
Range: 0 ... 999

Resolution: 0.200... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Define full scale value for the measured vibration
parameter of channel B. You can use different full
scale values for channel A and B.
For more information see parameter J09

J 11 Channel A : Bearing condition (BCU)
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable processing of BCU values for channel A
Y= Process BCU for channel A.
N= Do not process BCU for channel A.
Connect an accelerometer to channel A to measure BCU.
J 12 Channel B : Bearing condition (BCU)
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable processing of BCU values for channel B.
Y = Yes Process BCU for channel B.
N = No Do not process BCU for channel B.
Connect an accelerometer to channel B to measure BCU.
J 13 Channel A : BCU Full scale:
Range: 1 ... 140

Resolution: 1,00 ... 9,99
10,0 ... 99,9
100 ... 140
Function: Define full scale value for BCU on channel A.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 uses the full scale value to automatically configure

the BCU Signal Conditioner, display functions, monitoring functions, and the
analog outputs.
You can use different full scale values for channel A and B. If you enter a
value outside the defined range, the consistency check generates error-
message: -62.
J 14 Channel B : BCU Full scale
Range: 1 ... 140

Resolution: 1,00 ... 9,99
10,0 ... 99,9
100 ... 140
Function: Define full scale value for BCU on channel B.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 uses the full scale value to automatically configure

the BCU Signal Conditioner, display functions, monitoring functions, and the
analog outputs.
You can use different full scale values for channel A and B. If you enter
values outside the defined range, the consistency check generates error-
message: -62.

J 15 Channel A : BCU Avertaging
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable BCU Averaging
Y = Yes Averaging is active
N = No Averaging is not active
Condition: Only when BCU on channel A (J11) is active.
J 16 Channel B : BCU Averaging
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable BCU Averaging
Y = Yes Averaging is active
N = No Averaging is not active
Condition Only when BCU on channel B (J12) is active.
J 17 Channel A : BCU Averaging delay
Range: 10 ... 3600

Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define time constant for BCU averaging channel A.
Condition: Averaging channel A (J15) = active.
J 18 Channel B : BCU Averaging delay
Range: 10 ... 3600

Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define time constant for BCU averaging channel B.
Condition: Averaging channel B (J16) = active.

J 19 Channel A : BCU Scaling Factor:
Range: 0.1 ... 10.0

Dimension: Factor
Function: Setting of all BCU measuring points to the same initial value by
means of the BCU scaling factor.
J 20 Channel B : BCU Scaling Factor
Range: 0.1 ... 10.0

Dimension: Factor
Function: Setting of all BCU measuring points to the same initial value by
means of the BCU scaling factor.

Filter Configuration Group K

General
Filters eliminate frequency components of the vibration signal outside a
specified frequency range. The lower and upper frequency corners define the
frequency range or the bandwidth of the filter.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides several filters which are selected based on
application. For each channel an upper and lower frequency corner is
selected allowing each channel to use a different filter.
International standard ISO 2373 defines a filter that guarantees comparable
readings (see also standards DIN/ISO 3945 and DIN 45 666).
VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides this type of filter.
ISO 2372 designates the frequency corners for this filter.
The ISO-Filter has an order of 3. The other filters you can select are 2nd
order Butterworth-filters. The damping at the specified frequency corner is
-1 dB.
K 01 Channel A : Lower Frequency Corner:
Choises: 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz ISO

Function: Select lower frequency corner for channel A.
1 Hz = Lower frequency corner
10 Hz ISO = Lower frequency corner
* special = Lower frequency corner
∗ Possible only if a supplementary filter is installed as an option.

K 02 Channel B : Lower Frequency Corner
Choises: 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz ISO

Function: Select lower frequency corner for channel B
10 Hz ISO = Lower frequency corner
* special = Lower frequency corner
K 03 Channel A : Upper Frequency Corner:
Choises: 1000 Hz ISO, 10 kHz

Function: Select upper frequency corner for channel A.
1000 Hz ISO = Upper frequency corner
10 kHz = Upper frequency corner
* special = Upper frequency corner
K 04 Channel B : Upper Frequency Corner
Choises: 1000 Hz ISO, 10 kHz

Function: Select upper frequency corner for channel B.
1000 Hz ISO = Upper frequency corner
10 kHz = Upper frequency corner
* special = Upper frequency corner

Analog Outputs Group L

General
VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides two analog outputs. Select which measured
parameter issent to analog output 1 and 2.
The full scale values selected in setup parameters J09/J10 and J13/J14
determine the analog output calibration.
L03 I03 L01
BCU_A a
v
vib_A 0...10 V
0...20 mA
BCU_B a 4...20 mA
v
vib_B Analog Output 1
Measured Parameter
Channel A: BEARCON(BCU_A)
Channel A: Vibration (vib_A)
Channel B: BEARCON(BCU_B)
Channel B: Vibration (vib_B) L04 L02
BCU_A a
v
vib_A 0...10 V
0...20 mA
BCU_B a 4...20 mA
v
vib_B Analog Output 2
GRUPPE-L C01 (030109) -65
Fig. 5 - 5: Parameter Group L, Analog Outputs
You cannot select BCU values if a vibration velocity sensor is used. The
consistency check will generate error message: -65.
L 01 Analog Output 1 : Signal Range
Choises: 0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA

Function: Select signal type.
L 02 Analog Output 2 : Signal Range
Choises: 0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA

Function: Select signal type.

L 03 Analog Output 1 : Measured Parameter
Choises: vib A, BCU A,vib B, BCU B

Function: Select measured parameter sent to analog output 1.
vib A = Measured Parameter: Vibration Channel A
BCU A = Measured Parameter:
Bearing Condition Channel A
vib B = Measured Parameter: Vibration Channel B
BCU B = Measured Parameter:
Bearing Condition Channel B
L 04 Analog Output 2 : Measured Parameter
Choises: vib A, BCU A,vib B, BCU B

Function: Select measured parameter sent to analog output 2.
vib A = Measured Parameter: Vibration Channel A
BCU A = Measured Parameter:
Bearing Condition Channel A
vib B = Measured Parameter: Vibration Channel B
BCU B = Measured Parameter:
Bearing Condition Channel B
L 05 Analog Output 1 : Range Full Scale
Choises: 0.000 ... 999.0

Function: In connection with an indicator or a plotter, the analog output
can be scaled to an optional full scale value within the present
range limits.
L 06 Analog Output 2 : Range Full Scale
Choises: 0.000 ... 999.0

Function: In connection with an indicator or a plotter, the analog output
can be scaled to an optional full scale value within the present
range limits.

Limit Value Configuration Group M

General
This parameter group enables or disables the monitoring functions for both
channels. Three limit values can be defined for each channel; two for
vibration levels and one for bearing condition. Each limit value can be
enabled or disabled and it's value and alarm delay time set individually.
The manual uses notations lim_1 (limit 1), lim_2 (limit 2), and lim_b (BCU)
for the limit values. The unit of the corresponding measured parameter
defines the unit of the limit value.
VIBROCONTROL 1100 accepts limit values in the range of 10 % to 100 % of
the corresponding full scale. The consistency check generates error-
message -63 if the limit values are outside this range.
Alarm delay times are in seconds. If the measured value exceeds the limit
value for a time longer than the alarm delay time, VIBROCONTROL 1100
generates an event. The event is stored in the Log Book and the assigned
relay is tripped as defined in the setup.
Warning:
When an OK error occurs, all limit relays maintain their current status. After
removing the OK error and acknowledging it by "Relay reset", they perform
their normal function again.
A: M03 A: M09 A: M15

B: M04 B: M10 B: M16
lim_1
N Tt
A: M01 Tt = 0
B: M02
A: M05 A: M11 A: M17

N B: M06 B: M12 B: M18
Measured Parameter
VIBRATION
lim_2
N T
t
Tt = 0
A: M13 A: M19
B: M14 B: M20
A: M07
B: M08
lim_b
N
Measured Parameter
T
t
BEARCON Tt = 0
GRUPPE-M C01 (030109)
Fig. 5 - 6 : Parameter Group M, Limit Value Configuration

M 01 Channel A : Monitoring
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable vibration monitoring for channel A
(lim_1, lim_2).
Y = Monitoring for channel A is active.
N = Monitoring for channel A is not active.
M 02 Channel B : Monitoring
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable vibration monitoring for channel B
(lim_1, lim_2).
Y = Monitoring for channel B is active.
N = Monitoring for channel B is not active.
M 03 Channel A : Monitor lim_1
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable monitoring of limit value lim_1 A.
Y = Monitoring lim_1 A.
N = Do not monitoring lim_1 A.
M 04 Channel B : Monitor lim_1
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable monitoring of limit value lim_1 B.
Y = Monitoring lim_1 B.
N = Do not monitoring lim_1 B.
M 05 Channel A : Monitor lim_2
Choises: Y, N
Y = Monitoringlim_2 A.

M 06 Channel B : Monitor lim_2
Choises: Y, N
Y = Monitoringlim_2 A.
M 07 Channel A : Monitor lim_b
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable monitoring of limit value lim_b
(BCU channel A).
Y = Monitoring lim_b.
N = Do not monitoring lim_b.
M 08 Channel B : Monitor lim_b
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable monitoring of limit value lim_b
(BCU channel B).
Y = Monitoring lim_b.
N = Do not monitoring lim_b.
M 09 Channel A : Limit value lim_1
Choises: 0.020 ... 999

Resolution: 0.020 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Enter limit value lim_1 A in the measured parameter units.
M 10 Channel B : Limit value lim_1
Choises: 0.020 ... 999

Resolution: 0.020 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Enter limit value lim_1 B in the measured parameter units.

M 11 Channel A : Limit value lim_2
Choises: 0.020 ... 999

Resolution: 0.020 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Enter limit value lim_2 A in the measured parameter units.
M 12 Channel B : Limit value lim_2
Choises: 0.020 ... 999

Resolution: 0.020 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 999
Function: Enter limit value lim_2 B in the measured parameter units.
M 13 Channel A : Limit value lim_b
Choises: 0.100 ... 140

Dimension: BCU
Resolution: 0.100 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 140
Function: Enter limit value lim_b, for bearing condition channel A.
M 14 Channel B : Limit value lim_b
Choises: 0.100 ... 140

Dimension: BCU
Resolution: 0.100 ... 0.999
1.00 ... 9.99
10.0 ... 99.9
100 ... 140
Function: Enter limit value lim_b, for bearing condition channel B.

M 15 Channel A : Alarm Delay Time lim_1
Choises: 1 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel A lim_1.
M 16 Channel B : Alarm Delay Time lim_1
Choises: 1 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel B lim_1.
M 17 Channel A : Alarm Delay Time lim_2
Choises: 1 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel A lim_2.
M 18 Channel B : Alarm Delay Time lim_2
Choises: 1 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel B lim_2.
M 19 Channel A : Alarm Delay Time lim_b
Choises: 3 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel A lim_b.
M 20 Channel B : Alarm Delay Time lim_b
Choises: 3 ... 99
Dimension: Seconds
Function: Define alarm delay time for channel B lim_b.

Relay Configuration Group N

General
VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides three relays to indicate alarm level
exceedances. The relays are designated as K1, K2 and K3.
Relay operation can be defined as follows:
A: N01
B: N02
--
lim_1 K1
K2
K3 &* N13 N07 N10
AND N N
OR 1
1
A: N03 K1
B: N04
--
lim_2 K1
K2
K3 &* N14 N08 N11
AND N N
OR 1
1
K2
A: N05 &* N15 N09 N12

B: N06 AND N N
-- OR 1
lim_b K1
K2
K3 1
K3
LOGBOOK RESET
GRUPPE-N C01 (030109)
Fig. 5 - 7 : Parameter Group N, Relais Configuration
Programmable Relay Operation:

1. Which alarm level exceedance controls which relay?
2. Latching or non-latching operation?
3. Normally energized or normally de-energized operation?
4. Logical combinations.
Comments to item 1:
It is common to assign alarm levels lim_1 of channel A and B to relay K1 and
alarm levels lim_2 of channel A and B to relay K2.
Comments to item 2:
In the latching mode, a relay remains latched until VIBROCONTROL 1100
receives a reset command. In the non-latching mode, VIBROCONTROL
1100 resets the relays automatically when the monitored signal drops below
the limit value.

Comments to item 3:
The following table shows the contact positions for normally de-energized
and normally energized relay operating modes.
Mode No alarm Alarm

Normally de-energized Relay active Relay not active
Normally energized Relay not active Relay active
Comments to item 4:
If several alarm limits control one relay, combine the alarms using a logical
AND or a logical OR.
N 01 Channel A : lim_1 controls relay ...
Choises: --, K1, K2, K3

Function: Assign event "lim_1A exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_1A does not control a relay
K1 = lim_1A controls relay K1
N 02 Channel B : lim_1 controls relay ...

Function: Assign event "lim_1B exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_1B does not control a relay
K1 = lim_1B controls relay K1
N 03 Channel A : lim_2 controls relay ...

Function: Assign event "lim_2A exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_2A does not control a relay

N 04 Channel B : lim_2 controls relay ...

Function: Assign event "lim_2B exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_2B does not control a relay
N 05 Channel A : lim_b controls relay ...

Function: Assign event "lim_bA exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_bA does not control a relay
K1 = lim_bA controls relay K1
N 06 Channel B : lim_b controls relay ...

Function: Assign event "lim_bB exceeded" to a relay
-- = lim_bB does not control a relay
K1 = lim_bB controls relay K1
N 07 Relais K1 : Latching
Choises: Y, N
Function: Select latching or non-latching operation for relay K1.
Y = Relay K1 latches.
N = Relay K1 does not latch.
Choises: Y, N

Choises: Y, N
N 10 Relais K1 : Normally Energized
Choises: Y, N
Function: Select normally energized or normally de-energized
mode for relay K1
Y = Relay K1 operates normally energized.
N = Relay K1 operates normally de-energized.
Choises: Y, N
mode for relay K2.
Choises: Y, N
mode for relay K3.
N 13 Relais K1 : Logic
Choises: OR, AND

Function: Define how several alarm level exceedances control
relay K1
OR = Exceedance of at least one of the assigned
alarm levels trips relay K1.
AND = Only exceedance of all assigned alarm levels
trips relay K1.

Choises: OR, AND

Function: Define how several alarm level exceedances control relay K2.
trips relay K2.
Choises: OR, AND

Function: Define how several alarm level exceedances control relay K3.
trips relay K3.

OK-Monitoring Group O
General
VIBROCONTROL 1100 has a cyclic self-monitoring routine.
This routine tests the sensors and the cables between VIBROCONTROL
1100 and the sensors. The sensor signal is checked to verify that it remains
within a predefined range. This method detects errors such as disconnected
sensors, broken cables and shorts. If an OK error occurs, the OK relay is
tripped and the event is stored in the Log Book.
Note:
When vibration velocity sensors with moving coil are used, lead breakage or
short-circuit cannot usually be recognized. A constant current is thus
superposed to the measuring signal. This current effects a direct voltage
drop of approx. 1 V in the VIBROCONTROL 1100. This voltage drop is
measured as OK voltage.
The OK relay is configured to the normally energized mode. In this mode a
power failure at the VIBROCONTROL 1100 will trip the OK relay to the alarm
position.
In special cases, for example if line drivers or isolation amplifiers are used, it
might be necessary to disable the OK monitoring function for the sensors.
Therefore, VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides for disabling this function. This
has no effect on other self-monitoring functions.
O 01 Channel A : OK Monitoring
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable OK monitoring of the sensor on channel A.
Y = OK monitoring for sensor channel A is active
N = OK monitoring for sensor channel A is not active
O 02 Channel B : OK Monitoring
Choises: Y, N
Function: Enable or disable OK monitoring of the sensor on channel B.
Y = OK monitoring for sensor channel B is active
N = OK monitoring for sensor channel B is not active
O 03 Channel A : OK-Lower Limit
Choises: -23 V ... + 23 V

Function: The OK-limits are only settable for acceleration sensors.

O 04 Channel B : OK- Lower Limit
Choises: -23 V ... + 23 V

O 05 Channel A : OK-Upper Limit
Choises: -23 V ... + 23 V

O 06 Channel B : OK- Upper Limit
Choises: -23 V ... + 23 V

Note for the definition of the OK-limits

If the input value of the OK-upper value is smaller than the input value for the
OK-lower value, an OK error message is displayed.
The typical setting values for the OK-upper limit and the OK-lower limit are
dependent on the sensor type. For Brüel & Kjær Vibro sensors the following
settings are recommended:
Velocity sensor (series VS - ...)

OK-upper limit: 2.5
OK-lower limit : 0.5
Acceleration sensor (series AS - ...)

OK-upper limit: -1
OK-lower limit : -20

Serial Interface Group P
P 00 Remote I/O : Device Address
Choises: 1 ... 205

Function: Define a unique address for each VIBROCONTROL 1100
P 01 Serial Port 1 : Baud rate
Choises: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600

Unit: Bit/s
Function: 1200 = Baud rate: 1200 Bd
2400 = Baud rate: 2400 Bd
P 02 Serial Port 2 : Baud rate
Choises: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600

Unit: Bit/s
Function: Select baud rate for serial port 1.

Service Functions Gruppe S

General
VIBROCONTROL 1100 provides direct access to the relays and analog
outputs. Use these functions to test the connected peripherals including
wiring.
These functions also help programmers of process control systems to verify
the interface with VIBROCONTROL 1100. Additionally, VIBROCONTROL
1100 itself can be tested using the self-test and self-calibration functions.
Warning
The service functions suspend all measuring and monitoring functions.
Changing relay outputs could cause machine shutdown !
Relay Test
Switch each relay to the "active" and "inactive" position . Test the reaction of
the system in both positions. Repeat the procedure for all relays including the
OK- relay.
Analog Output Test

Set each analog output to a predefined output voltage or current. Check to
see if the same levels are displayed, for example on the analog meter in the
control room.
Self-test
The self-test takes about 15 seconds. During this test the most important
modules of the microprocessor system are checked, including stored data.
"Test" is displayed during the test along with a countdown from 10 to 0. The
self-test is not interruptible.
Normally, "TEST ok" is displayed at the end of the self-test. Press any key to
continue. If the self-test detects an error, the error message is displayed for x
seconds and automatically restarts the system.
The error message is stored in the Log Book.
Self-calibration
The self-calibration program takes about 15 minutes. During this time, the
signal conditioners, multiplexers, and analog-to-digital converters, etc. are
checked using an internally generated test signal.
This program does not have access to the input and output modules like
relays, pre-amplifiers, and amplifiers for the analog outputs. Use the relay
and analog output tests to check these functions.
"Calibration" is displayed during the self-calibration along with a number
indicating the current test. This program is not interruptible. Remember that
during self-calibration all measuring and monitoring functions are suspended.

The status of the relays and analog outputs does not change during the self-
calibration.
S 01 Relay K1 : Test
Choises: K1 on, K1 off

Funktion: Test relay K1.
K1 on = Relay K1 is active
K1 off = Relay K1 is not active.

K2 off = Relay K2 is not active abgefallen.

K2 off = Relay K3 is not active abgefallen.
S 04 OK-Relay : Test
Choises: OK on, OK off

Funktion: Test OK-relay.
OK on = OK-Relay is active
OK off = OK-Relay is not active
S 05 Analog-Output 1 : Output voltage
Choises: 0 V, 2 V, 5 V, 10 V
Funktion: Set the output voltage level on analog output 1.
0V = The output voltage is 0 Volt
10 V = The output voltage is 10 Volt

S 06 Analog-Output 1 : Output current
Choises: 0 mA, 4 mA, 12 mA, 20 mA

Funktion: Set the output current level on analog output 1.
0 mA = The output current is 0 mA
S 07 Analog-Output 2 : Output voltage
Choises: 0 V, 2 V, 5 V, 10 V
Funktion: Set the output voltage level on analog output 2.
10 V = The output voltage is 10 Volt
S 08 Analog- Output 2 : Output current
Choises: 0 mA, 4 mA, 12 mA, 20 mA

Funktion: Set the output current level on analog output 2.
S 09 TEST
Function: Start self-test of VIBROCONTROL 1100.
S 10 CALIBRATION
Function: Start self-calibration of VIBROCONTROL 1100.

Parameter Configuration Standard

Plant : VC 1100 C01 230 V / C02 24 V
Version : VC VC 1100 V 2.02
Name : Date: ....……..……….
Channel and Sensor Selection - Group I

I01 Channel A Y [X] N []
I02 Channel B Y [X] N []
I03 Sensor a [X] v []
I04 Unit mV/g [X] mV/m/s²2 [ ] mV/mm/s [ ] mV/ips [ ]
I05 Sensitivity [______________]
I06 Frequency response linearization Y [] N [X]
Channel Configuration - Group J

J01 Channel A: Vibration Y [X] N []
J02 Channel B: Vibration Y [X] N []
J03 Channel A: Parameter a [] v [X] s []
J04 Channel B: Parameter a [] v [X] s []
J05 Channel A: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s [X]
ips [] mm [ ] mils []
J06 Channel B: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s [X]
J07 Channel A: Signal Detection rms [X] pc [ ] ppc []
J08 Channel B: Signal Detection rms [X] pc [ ] ppc []
J09 Channel A: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]
J10 Channel B: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]
J11 Channel A: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [X] N []
J12 Channel B: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [X] N []
J13 Channel A: BCU Full Scale [_____2.000 ____]
J14 Channel B: BCU Full Scale [_____2.000 ____]
J15 Channel A: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N [X]
J16 Channel B: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N [X]
J17 Channel A: Mean time (BCU) [_______20_____]
J18 Channel B: Mean time (BCU) [_______20_____]
J19 Channel A: BCU Scaling Factor [_____1.000 ____]
J20 Channel B: BCU Scaling Factor [_____1.000 ____]
Filter Configuration - Group K
K01 Channel A: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [X] * Spec. [ ]
K02 Channel B: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [X] * Spec. [ ]
K03 Channel A: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [X] * Spec. []
K04 Channel B: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [X] * Spec. []
Analog Output - Group L
L01 Analog Output 1: 0..10V [X] 0..20mA [ ] 4..20mA []
L03 Analog Output 1: Parameter vib_A [X] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [] BCU_B [ ]
L04 Analog Output 2: Parameter vib_A [] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [X] BCU_B [ ]
L05 Analog Output 1: Full Scale [_____20.00____]
L06 Analog Output 2: Full Scale [_____20.00____]

Limit Configuration - Group M

M01 Channel A: Monitoring Y [X] N []
M02 Channel B: Monitoring Y [X] N []
M03 Channel A: Monitor lim_1 Y [X] N []
M04 Channel B: Monitor lim_1 Y [X] N []
M07 Channel A: Monitor lim_b Y [] N [X]
M08 Channel B: Monitor lim_b Y [] N [X]
M09 Channel A: Value lim_1 [_____10.00_____]
M10 Channel B: Value lim_1 [_____10.00_____]
M11 Channel A: Value lim_2 [_____15.00_____]
M12 Channel B: Value lim_2 [_____15.00_____]
M13 Channel A: Value lim_b [_____4.000_____]
M14 Channel B: Value lim_b [_____5.000_____]
M15 Channel A: Delay Time lim_1 [_______1 ______]
M16 Channel B: Delay Time lim_1 [_______1 ______]
M17 Channel A: Delay Time lim_2 [_______1 ______]
M18 Channel B: Delay Time lim_2 [_______1 ______]
M19 Channel A: Delay Time lim_b [_______7 ______]
M20 Channel B: Delay Time lim_b [_______8 ______]
Relay Configuration - Group N
N01 Channel A: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [X] K2 [] K3 []
N02 Channel B: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [X] K2 [] K3 []
N03 Channel A: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [X] K3 []
N04 Channel B: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [X] K3 []
N05 Channel A: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 [X]
N06 Channel B: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 [X]
N07 Relay K1: Latching Y [X] N []
N10 Relay K1: Normally Energized Y [X] N []
N13 Relay K1: Logic AND [] OR [X]
OK Monitoring - Group O
O01 Channel A: OK-Monitoring Y [X] N []
O02 Channel B: OK-Monitoring Y [X] N []
O03 Channel A: OK-Lower Limit [____-21.0000___]
O04 Channel B: OK-Lower Limit [____-21.0000___]
O05 Channel A: OK-Upper Limit [_____-2.0000___]
O06 Channel B: OK-Upper Limit [_____-2.0000___]
Baud Rate for Serial Interface - Group P
P00 Device Address [_______1______]
P01 Serial Port 1: 9600 [X] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]
P02 Serial Port 2: 9600 [X] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]

Parameter Configuration Standard

Plant : VC 1100 C11 230 V / C12 24 V
Version : VC VC 1100 V 2.02
Name : Date: ....………..…….

I01 Channel A Y [X ] N []
I02 Channel B Y [X] N []
I03 Sensor a [X] v []
I04 Unit mV/g [X] mV/m/s² [ ] mV/mm/s [ ] mV/ips [ ]
I05 Sensitivity [_____100.0 ____]
I06 Frequency response linearization Y [X] N []

J01 Channel A: Vibration Y [X] N []
J02 Channel B: Vibration Y [X] N []
J03 Channel A: Parameter a [] v [X] s []
J04 Channel B: Parameter a [] v [X] s []
J05 Channel A: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s [X]
J06 Channel B: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s [X]
J07 Channel A: Signal Detection rms [X] pc [ ] ppc []
J08 Channel B: Signal Detection rms [X] pc [ ] ppc []
J09 Channel A: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]
J10 Channel B: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]
J11 Channel A: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [] N []
J12 Channel B: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [] N []
J13 Channel A: BCU Full Scale [______________]
J14 Channel B: BCU Full Scale [______________]
J15 Channel A: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N []
J16 Channel B: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N []
J17 Channel A: Mean time (BCU) [______________]
J18 Channel B: Mean time (BCU) [______________]
J19 Channel A: BCU Scaling Factor [______________]
J20 Channel B: BCU Scaling Factor [______________]
K01 Channel A: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [X] * Spec. [ ]
K02 Channel B: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [X] * Spec. [ ]
K03 Channel A: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [X] * Spec. []
K04 Channel B: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [X] * Spec. []
L03 Analog Output 1: Parameter vib_A [X] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [] BCU_B [ ]
L04 Analog Output 2: Parameter vib_A [] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [X] BCU_B [ ]
L05 Analog Output 1: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]
L06 Analog Output 2: Full Scale [_____20.00 ____]


M01 Channel A: Monitoring Y [X] N []
M02 Channel B: Monitoring Y [X] N []
M07 Channel A: Monitor lim_b Y [] N []
M08 Channel B: Monitor lim_b Y [] N []
M09 Channel A: Value lim_1 [_____10.00 ____]
M10 Channel B: Value lim_1 [_____10.00 ____]
M11 Channel A: Value lim_2 [_____15.00 ____]
M12 Channel B: Value lim_2 [_____15.00 ____]
M13 Channel A: Value lim_b [______________]
M14 Channel B: Value lim_b [______________]
M15 Channel A: Delay Time lim_1 [_______1______]
M16 Channel B: Delay Time lim_1 [_______1______]
M17 Channel A: Delay Time lim_2 [_______1______]
M18 Channel B: Delay Time lim_2 [_______1______]
M19 Channel A: Delay Time lim_b [______________]
M20 Channel B: Delay Time lim_b [______________]
N01 Channel A: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [X] K2 [] K3 []
N02 Channel B: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [X] K2 [] K3 []
N03 Channel A: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [X] K3 []
N04 Channel B: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [X] K3 []
N05 Channel A: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N06 Channel B: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N10 Relay K1: Normally Energized Y [] N [X]
O01 Channel A: OK-Monitoring Y [X] N []
O02 Channel B: OK-Monitoring Y [X] N []
O03 Channel A: OK-Lower Limit [___-22.0000____]
O04 Channel B: OK-Lower Limit [___-22.0000____]
O05 Channel A: OK-Upper Limit [____-2.0000____]
O06 Channel B: OK-Upper Limit [____-2.0000____]
P00 Device Address [_______1______]
P01 Serial Port 1: 9600 [X] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]
P02 Serial Port 2: 9600 [X] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]

Parameter Configuration
Plant :________________________________________________________________________
Version :___VC 1100/C ___V _______________________________________________________
Name :_____________________________________________________Date: ______________

I01 Channel A Y [] N []
I02 Channel B Y [] N []
I03 Sensor a [] v []
I04 Unit mV/g [] mV/m/s² [ ] mV/mm/s [ ] mV/ips [ ]
I05 Sensitivity [______________]
I06 Frequency response linearization Y [] N []

J01 Channel A: Vibration Y [] N []
J02 Channel B: Vibration Y [] N []
J03 Channel A: Parameter a [] v [] s []
J04 Channel B: Parameter a [] v [] s []
J05 Channel A: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s []
J06 Channel B: Unit g [] m/s² [ ] mm/s []
J07 Channel A: Signal Detection rms [] pc [ ] ppc []
J08 Channel B: Signal Detection rms [] pc [ ] ppc []
J09 Channel A: Full Scale [______________]
J10 Channel B: Full Scale [______________]
J11 Channel A: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [] N []
J12 Channel B: Bearing Condition (BCU) Y [] N []
J13 Channel A: BCU Full Scale [______________]
J14 Channel B: BCU Full Scale [______________]
J15 Channel A: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N []
J16 Channel B: BCU Averaging (BCU) Y [] N []
J17 Channel A: Mean time (BCU) [______________]
J18 Channel B: Mean time (BCU) [______________]
J19 Channel A: BCU Scaling Factor [______________]
J20 Channel B: BCU Scaling Factor [______________]
K01 Channel A: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [] * Spec. [ ]
K02 Channel B: Low cutoff frequency 1Hz [ ] 3Hz [] 10Hz ISO [] * Spec. [ ]
K03 Channel A: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [] * Spec. []
K04 Channel B: High cutoff frequency 10kHz [ ] 1kHz ISO [] * Spec. []
L01 Analog Output 1: 0..10V [] 0..20mA [ ] 4..20mA []
L02 Analog Output 2: 0..10V [] 0..20mA [ ] 4..20mA []
L03 Analog Output 1: Parameter vib_A [] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [] BCU_B [ ]
L04 Analog Output 2: Parameter vib_A [] BCU_A [ ] vib_B [] BCU_B [ ]
L05 Analog Output 1: Full Scale [______________]
L06 Analog Output 2: Full Scale [______________]


M01 Channel A: Monitoring Y [] N []
M02 Channel B: Monitoring Y [] N []
M03 Channel A: Monitor lim_1 Y [] N []
M04 Channel B: Monitor lim_1 Y [] N []
M05 Channel A: Monitor lim_2 Y [] N []
M06 Channel B: Monitor lim_2 Y [] N []
M07 Channel A: Monitor lim_b Y [] N []
M08 Channel B: Monitor lim_b Y [] N []
M09 Channel A: Value lim_1 [______________]
M10 Channel B: Value lim_1 [______________]
M11 Channel A: Value lim_2 [______________]
M12 Channel B: Value lim_2 [______________]
M13 Channel A: Value lim_b [______________]
M14 Channel B: Value lim_b [______________]
M15 Channel A: Delay Time lim_1 [______________]
M16 Channel B: Delay Time lim_1 [______________]
M17 Channel A: Delay Time lim_2 [______________]
M18 Channel B: Delay Time lim_2 [______________]
M19 Channel A: Delay Time lim_b [______________]
M20 Channel B: Delay Time lim_b [______________]
N01 Channel A: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N02 Channel B: lim_1 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N03 Channel A: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N04 Channel B: lim_2 assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N05 Channel A: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N06 Channel B: lim_b assigned to -- [] K1 [] K2 [] K3 []
N07 Relay K1: Latching Y [] N []
N10 Relay K1: Normally Energized Y [] N []
N13 Relay K1: Logic AND [] OR []
O01 Channel A: OK-Monitoring Y [] N []
O02 Channel B: OK-Monitoring Y [] N []
O03 Channel A: OK-Lower Limit [______________]
O04 Channel B: OK-Lower Limit [______________]
O05 Channel A: OK-Upper Limit [______________]
O06 Channel B: OK-Upper Limit [______________]
P00 Device Address [______________]
P01 Serial Port 1: 9600 [ ] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]
P02 Serial Port 2: 9600 [ ] 4800 [ ] 2400 [ ] 1200 [ ]

Installation and Commissioning and Maintenance VC 1100
6 Installation and Commissioning and Maintenance

Installation
VIBROCONTROL 1100 Mount rear side down
Vibration sensors: Consult sensor manual
Wiring: Consult chapter 3 of this manual
Grounding: Consult grounding recommendations
See chapters 2 and 3 of this manual for technical data and details on serial
interfacing. Seal unused cable ports using ... AC-xxx.
Commissioning
CAUTION !
The safety instructions are attached as a separate brochure in

different languages.
Check wiring
Check supply voltage
Power Monitor
Enter setup parameters required for this installation
Connect sensors Once the sensors are connected and

power is applied, the OK error must clear
showing everything is configured
correctly.
Connect peripheral devices to relays and analog outputs.

Connect serial interfaces as required
© VC1100GB/mounting C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7 → Jan. 2011 6-1

VC 1100 Installation and Commissioning and Maintenance
Checks
Use the VIBROCONTROL 1100 service functions to verify all connected
peripheral functions.
Service functions are described in chapter 5, under setup parameters
group S.
Relays: Service parameters S01...S04
Analog outputs: Service parameters S05...S08
These functions provide a means to switch each relay separately and to set
the analog outputs to predefined values.
Complete the installation by running self-test (S09) and auto-calibration
(S10).
Recommendation
Run auto-calibration under operating conditions with the machinery running.
The auto-calibration function does not change setup parameters.
Maintenance
Note:
Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by trained personnel
following corresponding authorisation by Brüel & Kjær Vibro GmbH.
♦ Calibration
♦ Maintenance
♦ Checking customer-specific use relative to OK, overload,
measurement and threshhold value resolution
♦ Checking buffer, relay and DC-OUT outputs
♦ Checking power supply
♦ Safeguarding customer-specific configuration
♦ The device may be cleaned externally using a slightly damp cloth
No moisture in the form of water or other fluids may be introduced into

the device!
6-2 Jan. 2011 © VC1100GB/mounting C01 / C02 - C11 / C12 Version 7 →

Analogausgänge/Analog Outputs/Sortie analogiques Analogausgänge/Analog Outputs/Sortie analogiques
1 TE 7 1 TE 7
2 TE OK-Relay 8 2 TE OK-Relay 8
3 +DC 9 3 +DC 9
0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V
0/4 ... 20 mA 0/4 ... 20 mA
10 10
4 4
K1 11 K1 11
* 5 +DC
12 * 5 +DC
12
0 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V
0/4 ... 20 mA 13 0/4 ... 20 mA 13
6 6
K2 14 K2 14
15 15
Netzanschluß/Power Supply/ Netzanschluß/Power Supply/
* Raccordementdu secteur 115 V/230 V AC
16 * Raccordementdu secteur 24 V DC
16
19 L
K3 17 K3 17
20
18 18
21 21 +24 V
115 V 230 V
22 TD1 25 TD1 25
23 RD1 26 23 0V RD1 26
Serielle Schnittstelle SG1 27 Serielle Schnittstelle SG1 27
24 N Serial interface 24 0V Serial interface
Interface série Interface série
TD2 28 TD2 28
Aufnehmeranschlüsse/Pickups/ RD2 29 Aufnehmeranschlüsse/Pickups/ RD2 29

Raccordement des capteurs Raccordement des capteurs
SG2 30 SG2 30
37 -24 V DC 37 -24 V DC
38 0V 38 0V
Kanal A
Channel A Buffer A
31
* Kanal A
Channel A
31
*
39 COM Canal A 39 COM Canal A Buffer A
BA 32 BA 32
40 SIG 40 SIG
33 33
Buffer B Buffer B
BB 34 BB 34
* *
41 -24 V DC 41 -24 V DC
* *
42 0V 42 0V
Kanal B Kanal B
35 35
Channel B Channel B
43 COM Reset 43 COM Reset
Canal B Canal B
36 36
44 SIG 44 SIG
VIBROCONTROL 1100 VIBROCONTROL 1100

C01/C11 C02/C12
* *
PE PE
* Schirm an Kabelverschraubung
Shield on cable screw
Blindage sur boulonnage
Datum Name Zeichng. Nr.

Bearb. 06.04.01 Giegeler VIBROCONTROL 1100 Brüel & Kjær Vibro
Gepr. 06.04.01 Hölzel C01 / C11 - C02 / C12 Leydheckerstr. 10, 64293 Darmstadt C102 230.001
Änderung 08.03.05 Giegeler
AS - 022
Beschleunigungs-Sensor / Acceleration Sensor
Accéléromètre
25 5,30 m
+0,5
40
ø ca.3mm
SW22
M8; 6mm tief
M8; 6mm deep
M8; 6mm de profondeur AS022-1 (050815)
Abb. 1 Beschleunigungs-Sensor Fig. 1 Acceleration Sensor Fig. 1 Accéléromètre AS - 022

AS - 022 AS - 022
Anwendung Application Utilisation

Der Sensor AS-022 wird zur Messung The acceleration sensor AS-022 is L'accéléromètre AS-022 est utilisé
der Schwingbeschleunigung used for measurement of vibration pour la mesure l'accélération de
eingesetzt. acceleration. vibrations.
Messprinzip Measuring Principle Principe de mesure

Beschleunigungs-Sensoren arbeiten Acceleration sensors operate in Les accéléromètres fonctionnement
nach dem piezo-elektrischen accordance with the piezo-electric suivant le principe de compression
Kompressionsprinzip. Im Sensor bilden compression principle. Inside the piézo-électrique. Les disques piézo-
eine Piezo-Keramikscheibe und eine sensor, a spring/mass damping céramiques et une masse forment à
interne Sensormasse ein Feder- system is formed by a piezo-ceramic l'intérieur du capteur un système
Masse-Dämpfungssystem. disk and an internal sensor mass. d'amortissement, pré-contraint à l'aide
d'un ressort.
Werden in dieses System When introducing vibrations into this Lorsque des vibrations agissent sur ce
Schwingungen eingeleitet, übt die system, the mass exerts an alternating système, la masse exerce une force
Masse eine Wechselkraft auf die force on the ceramic disk, and due to alternante sur les disques céramique
Keramikscheibe aus, wodurch infolge the piezoelectric effect, electric ce qui provoque des charges élec-
des Piezo-Effektes elektrische charges are caused which are triques par suite de l'effet piézo-élec-
Ladungen entstehen, die proportional proportional to acceleration. trique; ces variations de charge sont
der Beschleunigung sind. proportionnelles à l'accélération.
Ein integrierter Verstärker wandelt das An integrated charge amplifier Un amplificateur de charge intégré
Ladungssignal in ein nutzbares increases the output signal to a usable permet de relever le signal de sortie à
Spannungssignal um. signal level. un niveau utile.
Brüel & Kjaer Vibro GmbH Tel. : +49 (0)6151 428-1400 © AS022DEF 08.01.2010
Leydheckerstraße 10 Fax : +49 (0) 6151 428-1401 C 102 786.001
D-64293 Darmstadt E-Mail : info@bkvibro.de Seite/Page 1 von/of/de 8
AS – 022
Technische Daten Technical Data Données Techniques
Typ Type Type

piezo-elektrischer Piezoelectric acceleration accéléromètre piézo-
Beschleunigungs-Sensor sensor with integrated électrique avec amplifica-
mit integriertem Ladungs- charge amplifier teur de charge intégré
verstärker
Übertragungsfaktor Transmission factor Facteur de transmission
100 mV/g 5% 100 mV/g 5% 100 mV/g 5%
2
10,2 mV/m/s 5% 10,2 mV/m/s2 5% 10,2 mV/m/s2 5%
+30 dB
+20 dB
+10 dB
-5 dB
1 3 10 100 500 1k 5k 10k 20k 30k 50k 100k
Hz
AS02x-2 (050812)
Abb. 2 Typischer Frequenzgang Fig. 2 Typical frequency response Fig. 2 Courbe en réáponse type du
des Übertragungsfaktors of sensitivity facteur de transmission
Überlastbarkeit Overload capacity Surcharge

dauernd 500 g continuous 500 g permanente 500 g (crête)
Schock 5000 g shock 5000 g par choc 5000 g
(alle Richtungen) (all directions) (toutes directions)
Fall aus 1,5 m auf Beton Fall from 1.5 m on Chute de 1,5 m sur du
ohne Schaden concrete without damage béton sans dommages
Abhängigkeit des Übertragungs- Dependence of sensitivity on Influence de la tension de service
faktors von der Betriebsspannung operating voltage sur le facteur de transmission
<1% <1% <1%
Temperaturabhängikeit des Sensitivity deviation due to Influence de la température sur
Übertragungsfaktors temperature sensibilité
- 22 °C - 3 % - 22 °C - 3 % - 22 °C - 3 %
+ 22 °C 0 % + 22 °C 0 % + 22 °C 0 %
+ 65 °C + 2,5 % + 65 °C + 2,5 % + 65 °C + 2,5 %
+ 120 °C + 5,5 % + 120 °C + 5,5 % + 120 °C + 5,5 %
Arbeitstemperaturbereich Operating temperature range Plage de température de travail
- 50 °C ... + 125 °C - 50 °C ... + 125 °C - 50 °C ... + 125 °C
Lagerungstemperaturbereich Storage temperature range Plage de température de stockage
- 50 °C ... + 150 °C - 50 °C ... + 150 °C - 50 °C ... + 150 °C
Messbereich Measuring range Plage de mesure
 80 g (UB = -24 V...-30 V)  80 g (UB = -24 V...-30 V)  80 g (UB = -24 V...-30 V)
 40 g (UB = -20 V)  40 g (UB = -20 V)  40 g (UB = -20 V)
 20 g (UB = -18 V)  20 g (UB = -18 V)  20 g (UB = -18 V)
Seite/Page 2 von/of/de 8 © AS022DEF 08.01.2010

AS – 022
Linearitätsabweichung Linearity error Ecart de linéarité

 0,1 %  0,1 %  0,1 %
Richtungsfaktor (80 Hz) Transverse sensitivity (80 Hz) Facteur transverse (80 Hz)
7% 7% 7%
Frequenzbereich Frequency range Plage de fréquence
4 ... 10 000 Hz ( 0,5 dB) 4 ... 10 000 Hz ( 0,5 dB) 4 ... 10 000 Hz ( 0,5 dB)
1,5 ... 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB) 1,5 ... 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB) 1,5 ... 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB)
Resonanzfrequenz Resonance frequency Fréquence propre
35 kHz  3 kHz 35 kHz  3 kHz 35 kHz  3 kHz
Rauschen Noise Bruit
0,1Hz-100 kHz  0,6 mVss 0,1Hz-100 kHz  0,6 mVss 0,1Hz-100 kHz  0,6 mVss
0,1Hz- 1 kHz  0,2 mVss 0,1Hz- 1 kHz  0,2 mVss 0,1Hz- 1 kHz  0,2 mVss
Spannungsversorgung UB Voltage supply UB Tension d'alimentation UB
-24 V (-18 V...-30 V) -24 V (-18 V...-30 V) -24 V (-18 V...-30 V)
Dynamischer Innenwiderstand des Output impedance Résistance interne en sortie
Ausgangs
5 5 5
Ruhepotential (- 50 °C ... + 125 °C) Open-circuit potential Potentiel de repos
(- 50 °C ... + 125 °C) (- 50 °C ... + 125 °C)
-12 V 2V -12 V 2V -12 V 2V
Temperatursprungempfindlichkeit Temperature sensitivity Effets de température
< 0,01 g/K < 0,01 g/K < 0,01 g/K
Dehnungsempfindlichkeit Strain sensitivity Sensibilité à la déformation
< 0,0003 g/ ( m/m ) < 0,0003 g/ ( m/m ) < 0,0003 g/ ( m/m )
Magnetfeldempfindlichkeit Magnetic field sensitivity Sensibilité au champ magnétique
< 0,003 g/mT < 0,003 g/mT < 0,003 g/mT
Isolationswiderstand Insulation resistance Résistance diélectrique (Boîtier -
(Gehäuse - Speisespannung 0 V) (Housing supply voltage 0 V) tension d'alimentation 0 V)
 20 M  20 M  20 M
Spannungsfestigkeit der Isolierung Dielectric strength of insulation Rigidité diélectrique de l'isolement
500 VRMS 500 VRMS 500 VRMS
Unterdrückung einer Störspan- Interference voltage suppression Suppression de tension parasite
nung zwischen Gehäuse und 0 V between housing and 0 V entre boîtier et 0 V
(frequenzabhängig) (frequency-dependent) (en fonction de la fréquence)
< 0,5 kHz  140 dB < 0,5 kHz  140 dB < 0,5 kHz  140 dB
1 kHz  120 dB 1 kHz  120 dB 1 kHz  120 dB
10 kHz  100 dB 10 kHz  100 dB 10 kHz  100 dB
Versorgungsspannungs-Durchgriff Supply voltage feed through Pénétration électronique de la
tension d'alimentation
 36 kHz < -30 dB  36 kHz < -30 dB  36 kHz < -30 dB
Stabilität bei kapazitiver Last Stability with capacitive load Stabilité à charge capacitive
0  CL  470 nF 0  CL  470 nF 0  CL  470 nF
Gehäuse Housing Boîtier
Edelstahl, Stainless steel, Acier surfin,
hermetisch verschlossen, hermetically sealed, fermeture hermétique,
robuste Industrieausführung rugged industrial design modèle industriel robuste
© AS022DEF 08.01.2010 Seite/Page 3 von/of/de 8

AS – 022
Schutzart nach EN 60 529 Protection class acc. to EN 60 529 Type de protection conforme á la
norme EN 60 529
IP 66 IP 66 IP 66
Masse Weight Poids
150 g 150 g 150 g
Befestigung Fixing Fixation
Zentralbefestigung mittels Central fixing by means of stud Fixation centrale par goujon
Gewindestift M 8 x 14; M8 x 14; fileté M8 x 14 ;
Max. Anzugsmoment 4,5 Nm max. tightening torque 4.5 Nm couple de serrage maxi
M8 / 1/4“ 28 UNF; M8 / 1/4“ 28 UNF; admissible 4,5 Nm
Max. Anzugsmoment 3,5 Nm max. tightening torque 3.5 Nm M8 / 1/4" 28 UNF ;
couple de serrage maxi
admissible 3,5 Nm
EMV EMC CEM
EN 61326-1 : 2006 EN 61326-1 : 2006 EN 61326-1 : 2006
Anschluss Connection Raccordement

Abgeschirmtes PVDF-Kabel Shielded PVDF cable Câble blindé PVDF
Kabelenden: offen Cable ends: open Bouts de câble: libre
Länge = 5,3 m Length = 5.3 m Longueur = 5,3 m
Biegeradius  30 mm Bending radius  30 mm Rayon de courbure  30 mm
Adernfarben Core colours Couleurs des brins de

câble
-UB rot -UB red -UB rouge
Signal gelb Signal yellow Signal jaune
0V weiss 0V white 0V blanc
Abschirmung gelb/schwarz Shield yellow/black Blindage jaune/noir
Zulässige Signalkabellänge Admissible length of signal Longueur admissible de

cables câble
470 470 470
l = l = l =
CK x f CK x f CK x f
l = zulässige Signalkabellänge l = admissible length of signal l = longuer admissible de câble
[m] cable [ m ] [m]
CK = Kabelkapazität [ nF/m ] CK = cable capacity [ nF/m ] CK = capacité du câble nF/m ]
f = max. genutzte Übertragungs- f = max. effective transmission f = Fréquence de transmission
frequenz [ kHz ] frequency [ kHz ] maxi utilisée [ kHz ]
(für f <1 kHz ist f = 1 kHz zu (for f <1 kHz, f is to be set to (pour f < 1 kHz il faut poser
setzen) 1 kHz) f = 1 kHz)
470 = Produkt aus Frequenz und 470 = product of frequency and 470 = produit de la fréquence par
max. kapazitiver Last max. capacitive load la charge capacitive maxi
Überschreitet die zu überbrückende If the cable length to be bridged Si la longueur de câble nécessaire
Kabellänge den errechneten Wert, ist exceeds the calculated value, a line dépasse la valeur calculée, il faut
an geeigneter Stelle ein Leitungs- driver is to be provided at a suitable prévoir un amplificateur d'attaque à
treiber vorzusehen. location. l'endroit adéquat de la ligne.

AS – 022
Montage Mounting Montage

Ankopplung Coupling Raccordement
Grundsätzlich gilt: General rule: Principe fondamental :
Das Gewicht des Beschleunigungs- The weight of the acceleration sensor Le poids de l'accéléromètre devrait
Sensors sollte wenigstens zehnmal should be lower at least by the factor être au moins dix fois inférieur au
kleiner sein als das schwingungs- ten than the weight relevant for poids, significatif pour la technique
technisch relevante Gewicht des vibration measurement of the vibratoire, de l'objet à mesurer auquel
Messobjektes, an das er montiert ist. measuring object onto which it is il est raccordé.
mounted.
Begründung Reason Motifs :

Der Beschleunigungs-Sensor ist eine The acceleration sensor is an L'accéléromètre est une masse
Zusatzmasse, welche das Messobjekt additional mass which applies a load complémentaire qui sollicite l'objet à
belastet und dessen Schwingverhalten on the measuring object and changes mesurer et modifie son comportement
ändert. the vibrational behaviour of the latter. vibratoire.
Beschleunigungs-Sensor Mounting of acceleration Montage de

montieren sensor l'accéléromètre
Hinweis: Note: Remarque:
Der Beschleunigungs-Sensor benötigt The acceleration sensor requires a La fixation de l'accéléromètre sur
eine kraftschlüssige, kontaktresonanz- friction-locked, contact resonancefree l'objet mesuré doit être rigide, réalisée
freie und steife Befestigung am Mess- and rigid mounting to the measuring en adhérence, sans résonance
objekt, insbesondere für Messungen object, in particular for measurements provoquée par contact, en particulier
bei hohen Frequenzen. at high frequencies. pour les mesures à haute fréquence.
 Der AS-022 ist mit dem beige-  AS-022 is to be mounted with the  Le AS-022 est à monter à l'aide du
fügten Gewindestift zu montieren. stud supplied. goupille filetée jointe à la fourniture.
Wahlweise: Selectable: Au choix :

 Gewindestift M8 x 14  Stud M8 x 14  goupille filetée M8 x 14
 Gewindestift M8 / 1/4“ 28 UNF  Stud M8 / 1/4“ 28 UNF  goupille filetée M8 / 1/4“
28 UNF
Die Einbaulage ist beliebig The sensor can be mounted in any Position de montage quelconque !
position.
Beschleunigungs-Sensor
Acceleration Sensor
Accéléromètre
AS/ASA-020
Montagefläche 90
* 0,8 Mounting surface
Surface de montage
max. Einschraubtiefe
max. reach of screw
Profondeur de vissage maxi
12
15
Gewindestift mit LOCTITE gesichert

M8 Threaded stud secured with LOCTITE
Goupille filetée sécurisée au LOCTITE
> ø25 AS/ASA022-4 (050815)
Abb. 3 Montage Fig. 3 Mounting Fig. 3 Montage

AS – 022
 Die Montagefläche muss im  The mounting surface in the area  La surface d'installation doit être
Bereich des AS-022 plan und of AS-022 must be plane and plane et usinée aux alentours du
bearbeitbar sein. machined. AS-022.
 Montagefläche mit Gewinde-  Provide mounting surface with  Prévoir un perçage fileté M8 x 1,25
bohrung M8 x 1,25 bzw. threaded hole M8 x 1.25 resp. ou bien 1/4" 28 UNF de 12 mm de
1/4"28 UNF, 12 mm tief versehen. 1/4" 28 UNF, 12 mm deep. prof. sur la surface de montage.
 Dünne Schicht Silikonfett auf die  Apply a thin film of silicone grease  Etaler une fine couche de graisse
Montagefläche auftragen, um on the mounting surface to prevent aux silicones sur la surface de
Kontaktresonanz zu vermeiden. contact resonance. montage pour éviter les réso-
nances par contact.
 Gewindestift M8 gemäß Abb. 3 in  Screw stud into the mounting  Visser la goupille filetée suivant
Montagefläche einschrauben und surface in accordance with fig. 3 Fig.3 dans la surface de montage
sichern (z.B. mit LOCTITE). and secure same (e.g. with et sécuriser p.ex. avec du
LOCTITE). LOCTITE.
 Max. Einschraubtiefe  5 mm für  Max. reach of screw  5 mm for  Profondeur maxi de vissage
Beschleunigungs-Sensor einhalten. acceleration sensors to be adhered  5 mm pour l'accéléromètre est
to. impérative.
 AS-022 auf Gewindestift  Screw AS-022 onto the stud.  Visser le AS-022 sur la goupille
aufschrauben Max. Anzugs- Observe max. tightening torque in filetée. Observer le couple de
moment entsprechend Gewinde- accordance with stud. serrage maxi admissible respectif
stift beachten. de la goupille filetée.
Elektrischer Anschluss Electrical Connection Raccordement électrique

Anschlusskabel verlegen Installation of connecting Pose des câbles de
cable raccordement
 Stahlschutzschlauch und -rohre  Use metal conduit or protective  Utiliser flexibles et tubes de
zum Schutz des Kabels gegen tubes to protect the cable from protection en acier pour la
mecha-nische Beschädigungen mechanical damages as well as to protection du câble de toute
sowie zur Erhöhung der EMV- safeguard the increase of EMC. détérioration mécanique, ainsi que
Sicherheit verwenden. pour assurer une meilleure
compatibilité électro-magnétiques.
 Anschlusskabel nicht parallel zu  Connecting cable not to be  Ne pas poser le câble de

Energieleitungen verlegen. Ist installed in parallel to energy lines. raccordement parallèlement aux
dieses nicht möglich, ist zwischen If this is not possible, the minimum lignes énergétiques. Si cela n'était
den Kabeln ein Mindestabstand distance should be 1 m. pas possible, respecter une
von 1 m einhalten. distance minimale de 1 m entre les
câbles.

AS – 022
Falls Anschlusskabel If the connecting cable is to Si le câble de raccordement

verlängert werden soll be extended devait être ralongé
 Nur abgeschirmtes Signalkabel  Use shielded signal cables only  n'utiliser que des câbles-signaux
verwenden blindés
 Verbindungsstellen mit geeignetem  Protect connecting points with a  protéger les connexions par des
Klemmenschutzgehäuse schützen suitable junction box (e.g. AC-121) boîtes à bornes adéquates
(z.B. AC - 121) (p.ex. AC-121)
Anschlusskabel mit Linking the connecting cable Relier le câble de raccorde-

Überwachungsanlage with the monitoring ment avec un équipement de
verbinden system surveillance
 Klemmen- bzw. Buchsenbelegung  Assign terminals or sockets in  procéder au raccordement
sind der Bedienungsanleitung der accordance with the operating conformément à l'affectation des
Überwachungsanlage zu instructions for the monitoring bornes et connecteurs indiquée
entnehmen. system. dans le manuel d'instructions de
l'installation de surveillance.
WEEE-Reg.-Nr. DE 69572330 WEEE-Reg.-No. DE 69572330 WEEE-Reg.-N°. DE 69572330

Produktkategorie / product category / catégorie de produits /
Anwendungsbereich: 9 application area: 9 domaine d'application: 9

AS – 022

Explosionsgefährdeter Bereich Sicherer Bereich
Hazardous area Safety area
Zone dangereuse EX Zone sûre
AC-293 Sicherheitsbarriere
ASA-02x Sensor Klemmenschutzgehäuse EExi AC-293 Safety barrier
Capteur ASA-02x Terminal protective housing EExi AC-293 Barrière de sécurité
Boîtier de protection du bornier EExi
9001/00/280/050/101
RD 3 -1 RD
RD=-24V 1 RD
BK 4 +2 BK RD -24V
a WH=0V 2 BK
u BK 0V
YE=SIG 3 YE zur Elektronik
YE SIG to electronic
WH vers l'électronique
YE 3 -1 YE WH COM
2 4 BK/YE
PA/ > 4 mm
WH 4 +2 WH
PA/ > 4 mm 2
9001/00/280/020/101
Wichtig! Beachten Sie vor der Verdrahtung
unsere "Allgemeine Erdungsempfehlung".
Important! Please consuit our "General
Grounding Recommendations" before
proceeding with any cable installations.
2 Important! Avant d'effecteur le câblage,
Potentialausgleichschiene PA/ > 4 mm veuillez observer nos "Recommandations
Potential equalization system générales pour la mise à la terre".
Bus de compensation de potentiel
AS-02x/03x Sensor Klemmenschutzgehäuse AC-221 zur Elektronik

Capteur AS-02x/030 AS-030 Sensor
Terminal protective housing AC-221 to electronic Capteur AS-030
Boîtier de protection du bornier AC-221 vers l'électronique
RD=-24V RD -24V
RD=-24V 1 RD RD -24V BK=0V BK 0V
a
zur Elektronik
a WH=0V 2 BK BK 0V to electronic
u
YE=SIG YE SIG
u vers l'électronique
YE=SIG 3 YE YE SIG WH=COM
WH COM
WH WH COM
2 PE > 1,5 mm2

PE > 1,5 mm
2
* * PE > 1,5 mm2 PE > 1,5 mm
Adernfarbe / Core colour / Couleur des brins
PE > 1,5 mm2 RD = rot / red / rouge
WH = weiß / white / blanc
BK = schwarz / black / noir
BN = braun / brown / brun
* Schirm an Kabelverschraubung BU = blau / blue / bleu
Shield on cable screw YE = gelb / yellow / jaune
Blindage sur boulonnage YE/BK = gelb/schwarz / yellow/black / jaune/noir
GN/YE = grün/gelb / green/yellow / vert/jaune
Datum Name Zeichng. Nr.

Bearb. Beschleunigungs-Sensoren Typ AS-02x/030 / ASA-02x
06.04.01 Giegeler
Acceleration sensors type AS-02x/030 / ASA-02x Brüel & Kjær Vibro
Gepr. 06.04.01 Hölzel
Änderung 25.11.04 Schumann
Accéléromètres type AS-02x/030 / ASA-02x Leydheckerstr. 10, 64293 Darmstadt C102 222.001

Three-Phase Asynchronous Motor Series 1R.5/1S.5: Operating Instructions Edition 03.2011

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Three-Phase Asynchronous Motor Series 1R.5/1S.5: Operating Instructions Edition 03.2011

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Three-phase asynchronous motor

Order No. AD.06537.00 EN

Order No.: AD.06537.00 EN

1 Safety instructions .......................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Definitions, Warnings ........................................................................ 1-1

1.2 Safety and application instructions.................................................... 1-3

1.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility ........................................................... 1-4

1.4 Declaration of incorporation .............................................................. 1-5

2 Description / Technical Data .......................................................... 2-1

2.1 Field of Application ............................................................................ 2-1

2.2 Design ............................................................................................... 2-1

2.3 Technical Data .................................................................................. 2-6

2.4 Attached drawings ............................................................................. 2-8

3 Installation / Mounting .................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Transport, storage ............................................................................. 3-1

3.2 Notes for installation.......................................................................... 3-2

3.3 Foundations, coarse alignment ......................................................... 3-7

3.3.1 General notes .................................................................................... 3-7

3.4 Fastening, precise alignment .......................................................... 3-17

3.5 Connecting the Stator Winding........................................................ 3-21

3.6 Connecting the Earth Conductor ..................................................... 3-22

3.7 Connecting the Auxiliary Circuits .................................................... 3-23

3.8 Connecting the Current transformers.............................................. 3-23

3.9 Torque of bolt connections .............................................................. 3-24

3.10 Final Activities ................................................................................. 3-25

4 Commissioning ............................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Preparation ........................................................................................ 4-1

4.2 Commissioning .................................................................................. 4-4

5 Parameters ....................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Parameter Configuration VC 1100-C11 ............................................ 5-1

5.2 Vibrational speed values ................................................................... 5-1

6.1 Switching on ...................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 Plant Shutdown ................................................................................. 6-1

7.1 Servicing............................................................................................ 7-1

7.2 Malfunctions and Remedial Measures ............................................ 7-10

8 Spare Parts....................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Spare parts list 1RR5719-6JA90-Z ................................................... 8-1

9 Test Certificates / Logbook ............................................................ 9-1

9.1 Commissioning .................................................................................. 9-1

9.2 Services............................................................................................. 9-3

9.3 Trouble shooting................................................................................ 9-5

9.4 Amendments ..................................................................................... 9-7

9.5 Test Certificates ................................................................................ 9-9

10 Additional Operating Instructions (Options, third-party suppliers)10-1

10.1 Vibration monitoring system VC1100 C11 ...................................... 10-2

10.2 Vibration Velocity Sensor type AS – 022 ........................................ 10-2

1.2 Safety and application instructions

The logbook (chapter 9) is to keep conscientiously.

♦ Operating Instructions and machine documentation are always available during

♦ technical data and details regarding admissible mounting, connection,

♦ unqualified persons are prohibited to work at or near these machines.

The Operating Instructions and machine documentation are available in the

1.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility

1.4 Declaration of incorporation

It is characterised by solid toughness, long service live and reliability as well as

Rating and operation in service IEC / EN 60034-1

2.2.2 Electrical Connections

The terminal box is equipped with 2 grounding conductor connections.

Measuring Point Connection

Protective or Earth Conductor Connections

2.2.3 Auxiliary heating

2.2.5 Anti-friction bearings

Lubricating Type of bearing Relubrication Quantity of re- First filling